{"format_version":1,"site":"WhatsOn","home":"https://whatson.pk/","scope":"Public active Whatson tool pages. Prices, availability and output validity depend on each tool and the values entered.","total":274,"tools":[{"id":"construction_brick","name":"Brick Calculator","description":"Count bricks, deduct openings and estimate ordering quantities.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/brick-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_brick/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_brick.md","page_id":9,"shortcode":"whatson_brick_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Wall dimensions","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Wall dimensions","label":"Wall length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Wall dimensions","label":"Wall height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Wall dimensions","label":"Wall thickness","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Actual brick size","label":"Brick length","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":40},{"group":"Actual brick size","label":"Brick width","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":40},{"group":"Actual brick size","label":"Brick height","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":40},{"group":"Actual brick size","label":"Mortar joint","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0,"max":3},{"group":"Order and quote","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Order and quote","label":"Price per brick","type":"number","unit":"PKR / brick","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Opening","type":"text"},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"A modular volume estimate. Actual bond, brick dimensions and joints affect the count.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A brick order starts with the wall that will actually be built, including its thickness and the spaces left for openings.","Use your own brick dimensions rather than assuming every supplier sells the same size. The allowance belongs on the finished quantity, not on every measurement."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter wall length, wall height and wall thickness.","Enter brick length, brick width, brick height and mortar joint.","Enter ordering allowance and price per brick.","Add the entries in doors and windows to deduct as separate rows. Include opening, width, height and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Door deductions, mortar joints and the purchase allowance stay visible, making it easier to explain the estimate when requesting a supplier quote.","check":"A modular volume estimate. Actual bond, brick dimensions and joints affect the count.","faq":[{"q":"Does the count include broken bricks?","a":"Only the allowance you enter covers extra units. Increase it deliberately for handling losses or difficult cuts rather than changing the wall size."},{"q":"What should I check before using Brick Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Wall length, Wall height and Wall thickness. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_block","name":"Concrete Block Calculator","description":"Estimate facing blocks with adjustable block dimensions.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/block-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_block/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_block.md","page_id":10,"shortcode":"whatson_block_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Wall elevation","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Wall elevation","label":"Wall length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Wall elevation","label":"Wall height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Block face","label":"Actual length","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Block face","label":"Actual height","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Block face","label":"Joint width","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0,"max":3},{"group":"Block order","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Block order","label":"Price per block","type":"number","unit":"PKR / block","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Opening","type":"text"},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Doors and windows to deduct","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Counts blocks by face area. Cell filling and mortar are separate requirements.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Blocks cover a wall by their visible face, so width and height matter more than a guess based on floor area.","Measure the wall, subtract openings and enter the block dimensions you intend to buy. Keep cell filling and mortar as separate material requirements."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter wall length and wall height.","Enter actual length, actual height and joint width.","Enter ordering allowance and price per block.","Add the entries in doors and windows to deduct as separate rows. Include opening, width, height and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Adjustable block sizes let you compare available products against the same wall area before committing to an order.","check":"Counts blocks by face area. Cell filling and mortar are separate requirements.","faq":[{"q":"Is this also a concrete filling estimate?","a":"No. Hollow cells, reinforcement and filling concrete require separate dimensions and specifications. The block count alone cannot supply those quantities."},{"q":"What should I check before using Concrete Block Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Wall length, Wall height and Actual length. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_concrete","name":"Concrete Volume Calculator","description":"Measure slab, cylinder and strip pours before ordering concrete.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/concrete-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_concrete/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_concrete.md","page_id":11,"shortcode":"whatson_concrete_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Shape","type":"select","choices":{"slab":"Rectangular slab","cylinder":"Circular column / pad","strip":"Strip footing"}},{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Diameter","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Thickness or height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Pour shape","label":"Identical pours","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Concrete order","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Concrete order","label":"Ready mix quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / m³","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Volume and order quantities only. It does not select concrete strength or reinforcement.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A slab, round column and foundation strip need different measurements. Putting every pour into a single rough volume can hide expensive omissions.","Choose the matching shape and enter measured dimensions before adding an order allowance. Keep the measured volume separate from the quantity you ask the supplier to deliver."],"steps":["Choose shape and measurement unit. Enter length, width, diameter, thickness or height and identical pours.","Enter ordering allowance and ready mix quote.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Shape based measurements make small pours easier to check, especially when a project combines rectangular sections with cylindrical elements.","check":"Volume and order quantities only. It does not select concrete strength or reinforcement.","faq":[{"q":"Does it choose the concrete strength?","a":"No. Strength, reinforcement and placement requirements belong in the project specification. This calculator estimates volume and ordering quantities only."},{"q":"What should I check before using Concrete Volume Calculator?","a":"Check Shape, Measurement unit, Length and Width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_cement","name":"Cement & Concrete Mix Calculator","description":"Split a nominal volume mix into cement, sand and crush.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/cement-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_cement/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_cement.md","page_id":12,"shortcode":"whatson_cement_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Required wet concrete","label":"Wet volume","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000},{"group":"Required wet concrete","label":"Volume unit","type":"select","choices":{"cft":"Cubic feet","m3":"Cubic metres","litre":"Litres","yd3":"Cubic yards"}},{"group":"Required wet concrete","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Volume proportions","label":"Cement parts","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100},{"group":"Volume proportions","label":"Sand parts","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Volume proportions","label":"Crush parts","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Volume proportions","label":"Dry volume factor","type":"number","unit":"","help":"Editable estimating assumption, not a strength specification.","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Bag and density","label":"Cement bag mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":1,"max":1000},{"group":"Bag and density","label":"Loose cement density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":100,"max":5000},{"group":"Supplier quotes","label":"Cement bag price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / bag","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Supplier quotes","label":"Sand price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Supplier quotes","label":"Crush price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Nominal volume proportions are for material estimates, not a designed structural mix.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A nominal mix estimate helps turn a concrete volume into a shopping quantity for cement, sand and crush.","Enter the intended volume and chosen proportions, then check the material units before buying. A volume ratio is a planning input, not proof of structural performance."],"steps":["Choose volume unit. Enter wet volume and ordering allowance.","Enter cement parts, sand parts, crush parts and dry volume factor.","Enter cement bag mass and loose cement density.","Enter cement bag price, sand price and crush price.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Keeping the mix proportions visible makes it easier to compare material requirements when the nominal ratio or purchase basis changes.","check":"Nominal volume proportions are for material estimates, not a designed structural mix.","faq":[{"q":"Can I use the result as a structural mix design?","a":"No. A designed concrete mix needs material testing and specified performance. Use these quantities for preliminary material planning, with the mix approved separately."},{"q":"What should I check before using Cement & Concrete Mix Calculator?","a":"Check Wet volume, Volume unit, Ordering allowance and Cement parts. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_mortar","name":"Mortar Calculator","description":"Estimate joint mortar and split cement and sand quantities.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/mortar-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_mortar/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_mortar.md","page_id":13,"shortcode":"whatson_mortar_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Masonry area","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Masonry area","label":"Wall length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Masonry area","label":"Wall height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Masonry area","label":"Wall thickness","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Masonry area","label":"Opening area","type":"number","unit":"sq ft","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000},{"group":"Brick and joint dimensions","label":"Brick length","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":40},{"group":"Brick and joint dimensions","label":"Brick width","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":40},{"group":"Brick and joint dimensions","label":"Brick height","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":40},{"group":"Brick and joint dimensions","label":"Mortar joint","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0,"max":3},{"group":"Mortar mix","label":"Sand parts per cement part","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100},{"group":"Mortar mix","label":"Dry volume factor","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Mortar mix","label":"Cement bag mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":1,"max":1000},{"group":"Mortar mix","label":"Cement density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":100,"max":5000},{"group":"Mortar mix","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Quotes","label":"Cement bag price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / bag","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Quotes","label":"Sand price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Mortar volume is net masonry minus estimated brick solids. Bond and site loss can change consumption.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Mortar fills the spaces between masonry units. Its consumption changes when brick dimensions, joints or the wall thickness change.","Measure net masonry and use brick sizes that match the delivery. The calculator separates an estimated mortar volume into cement and sand for your selected proportions."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter wall length, wall height, wall thickness and opening area.","Enter brick length, brick width, brick height and mortar joint.","Enter sand parts per cement part, dry volume factor, cement bag mass, cement density and ordering allowance.","Enter cement bag price and sand price.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The estimate follows the wall and its units, giving you a clearer basis than applying one bag allowance to every room.","check":"Mortar volume is net masonry minus estimated brick solids. Bond and site loss can change consumption.","faq":[{"q":"Why might site consumption differ?","a":"Bond details, joint variation and handling losses can change the amount used. Compare the first completed section with the estimate before ordering later batches."},{"q":"What should I check before using Mortar Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Wall length, Wall height and Wall thickness. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_plaster","name":"Plaster Calculator","description":"Build a surface schedule and estimate plaster mix materials.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/plaster-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_plaster/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_plaster.md","page_id":14,"shortcode":"whatson_plaster_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Application","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Application","label":"Plaster thickness","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Application","label":"Faces per surface","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":2},{"group":"Application","label":"Openings per face","type":"number","unit":"sq ft","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000},{"group":"Mix and allowance","label":"Sand parts per cement part","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100},{"group":"Mix and allowance","label":"Dry volume factor","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Mix and allowance","label":"Bag mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":1,"max":1000},{"group":"Mix and allowance","label":"Cement density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":100,"max":5000},{"group":"Mix and allowance","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Quotes","label":"Cement bag price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / bag","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Quotes","label":"Sand price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Surface schedule","label":"Room","type":"text"},{"group":"Surface schedule","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Surface schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Surface schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Deduction is applied to one face before multiplying by the number of faces.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Plaster quantity depends on the surface you will coat and the finished thickness. Room floor area is a poor substitute for those measurements.","Build a surface schedule, deduct openings from the correct face and choose the number of faces. Check the mix proportions against the work specification."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter plaster thickness, faces per surface and openings per face.","Enter sand parts per cement part, dry volume factor, bag mass, cement density and ordering allowance.","Enter cement bag price and sand price.","Add the entries in surface schedule as separate rows. Include room, length, width and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A surface schedule helps you see which walls are included and prevents a door deduction from being applied twice.","check":"Deduction is applied to one face before multiplying by the number of faces.","faq":[{"q":"Should an opening be deducted for every face?","a":"The tool deducts it from one face before multiplying by the face count. Enter the same measurement basis throughout the surface schedule."},{"q":"What should I check before using Plaster Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Plaster thickness, Faces per surface and Openings per face. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_sand","name":"Sand Filling Calculator","description":"Estimate sand filling, truck loads and delivered cost.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/sand-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_sand/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_sand.md","page_id":15,"shortcode":"whatson_sand_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Filled space","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Filled space","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Filled space","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Filled space","label":"Final filling depth","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Delivery assumptions","label":"Loose to final volume factor","type":"number","unit":"","help":"Supplier volume needed for one unit of final fill.","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Delivery assumptions","label":"Truck capacity","type":"number","unit":"cft","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000},{"group":"Delivery assumptions","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Delivery quote","label":"Loose sand quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Delivery quote","label":"Delivery per truck","type":"number","unit":"PKR / trip","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"The compaction factor is an editable estimate. Truck capacity is the usable load quoted by your supplier.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A sand filling order needs room for the difference between the finished layer and the loose material delivered.","Enter the measured fill dimensions, then use a compaction factor and truck capacity that match your supplier's quote. Those assumptions can change the order substantially."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter length, width and final filling depth.","Enter loose to final volume factor, truck capacity and ordering allowance.","Enter loose sand quote and delivery per truck.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Showing volume, delivery loads and quoted cost together makes it easier to compare truck offers on the same usable capacity.","check":"The compaction factor is an editable estimate. Truck capacity is the usable load quoted by your supplier.","faq":[{"q":"Is the truck capacity a fixed Pakistan standard?","a":"No. Use the usable capacity quoted for the vehicle and delivery. A truck name alone does not establish its loose material volume."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sand Filling Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Length, Width and Final filling depth. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_gravel","name":"Crush & Gravel Calculator","description":"Measure an aggregate layer and estimate volume, mass and cost.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/gravel-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_gravel/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_gravel.md","page_id":16,"shortcode":"whatson_gravel_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Layer dimensions","label":"Shape","type":"select","choices":{"rectangle":"Rectangle","circle":"Circle"}},{"group":"Layer dimensions","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Layer dimensions","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Layer dimensions","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Layer dimensions","label":"Diameter","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Layer dimensions","label":"Layer thickness","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Loose material","label":"Loose bulk density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":100,"max":5000},{"group":"Loose material","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Loose material","label":"Aggregate quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Loose bulk density varies with grading and moisture. Change it to match your supplier.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["The same gravel volume can have different weights because grading and moisture affect bulk density.","Start with the layer area and thickness, then enter a density suited to the supplied aggregate. Compare the resulting volume and mass before applying a purchase rate."],"steps":["Choose shape and measurement unit. Enter length, width, diameter and layer thickness.","Enter loose bulk density, ordering allowance and aggregate quote.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate volume and weight figures help when one supplier quotes by load and another quotes by mass.","check":"Loose bulk density varies with grading and moisture. Change it to match your supplier.","faq":[{"q":"Can I leave the starting density unchanged?","a":"Use it only as an example. Ask the supplier for a suitable bulk density or check delivered material before relying on the weight estimate."},{"q":"What should I check before using Crush & Gravel Calculator?","a":"Check Shape, Measurement unit, Length and Width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_tile","name":"Tile Calculator","description":"Plan tile quantities, boxes and room coverage.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/tile-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_tile/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_tile.md","page_id":17,"shortcode":"whatson_tile_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Room measurements","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Tile and packaging","label":"Tile length","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":200},{"group":"Tile and packaging","label":"Tile width","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":200},{"group":"Tile and packaging","label":"Tiles per box","type":"number","unit":"tiles","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Tile and packaging","label":"Laying pattern","type":"select","choices":{"straight":"Straight lay","diagonal":"Diagonal lay"}},{"group":"Tile and packaging","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Tile quote","label":"Box price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / box","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Room","type":"text"},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Quantity is based on area. The preview illustrates the pattern and does not optimise cutting. Set allowance for the selected pattern.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Tile shopping involves both coverage and whole boxes. A room can need one more box even when its spare area looks small.","Measure the surfaces, choose the actual tile dimensions and enter a cutting allowance suited to the pattern. Check pack contents before comparing the purchase total."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit.","Choose laying pattern. Enter tile length, tile width, tiles per box and ordering allowance.","Enter box price.","Add the entries in room schedule as separate rows. Include room, length, width and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The box count turns an area estimate into an order you can discuss at the shop without losing sight of spare tiles.","check":"Quantity is based on area. The preview illustrates the pattern and does not optimise cutting. Set allowance for the selected pattern.","faq":[{"q":"Does the preview optimise the cutting pattern?","a":"No. It illustrates the arrangement. Corners, diagonal layouts and difficult cuts need their own allowance and a practical installation plan."},{"q":"What should I check before using Tile Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Tile length, Tile width and Tiles per box. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_paint","name":"Paint Calculator","description":"Estimate paint for rooms, selected walls and ceilings.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/paint-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_paint/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_paint.md","page_id":18,"shortcode":"whatson_paint_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Room settings","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Room settings","label":"Include ceilings","type":"select","choices":{"yes":"Yes","no":"No"}},{"group":"Paint specification","label":"Finish coats","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":10},{"group":"Paint specification","label":"Coverage per coat","type":"number","unit":"m²/litre","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Paint specification","label":"Container size","type":"number","unit":"litres","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Paint specification","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Paint quote","label":"Price per container","type":"number","unit":"PKR / container","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Room","type":"text"},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Long walls","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":2},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Short walls","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":2},{"group":"Rooms and wall selection","label":"Openings","type":"number","unit":"sq ft","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000}],"limitations":"Use coverage from your paint tin or product sheet. Primer is a separate product and is not included.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Paint coverage comes from the product and the surface, not simply the size of the house.","List the walls or rooms being painted, include ceilings where needed and use the tin's coverage rate. Change coat counts separately from the measured area."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit and include ceilings.","Enter finish coats, coverage per coat, container size and ordering allowance.","Enter price per container.","Add the entries in rooms and wall selection as separate rows. Include room, length, width, height, long walls, short walls and openings for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Selected surfaces and product coverage make comparisons useful when you are choosing between different pack sizes or paint systems.","check":"Use coverage from your paint tin or product sheet. Primer is a separate product and is not included.","faq":[{"q":"Is primer included?","a":"No. Estimate primer with its own area, coverage and coat requirements. Do not assume the finishing paint quantity covers a separate primer product."},{"q":"What should I check before using Paint Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Include ceilings, Finish coats and Coverage per coat. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_flooring","name":"Flooring Calculator","description":"Estimate plank flooring, packs and underlay for multiple rooms.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/flooring-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_flooring/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_flooring.md","page_id":19,"shortcode":"whatson_flooring_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Room measurements","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Planks and packs","label":"Plank length","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500},{"group":"Planks and packs","label":"Plank width","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":200},{"group":"Planks and packs","label":"Planks per pack","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Planks and packs","label":"Underlay roll coverage","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000},{"group":"Planks and packs","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Flooring quote","label":"Flooring pack price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / pack","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Flooring quote","label":"Underlay roll price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / roll","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Room","type":"text"},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Packs are rounded up after the area allowance. The plank preview is illustrative.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Flooring packs rarely match a room's area exactly. The order needs to account for cutting and the coverage of each complete pack.","Enter all rooms on the same measurement basis, then apply the area allowance once. Compare flooring packs and underlay as separate quantities."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit.","Enter plank length, plank width, planks per pack, underlay roll coverage and ordering allowance.","Enter flooring pack price and underlay roll price.","Add the entries in room schedule as separate rows. Include room, length, width and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A shared room schedule reduces repeated calculations and keeps the purchase rounding visible when several rooms use the same product.","check":"Packs are rounded up after the area allowance. The plank preview is illustrative.","faq":[{"q":"Will the plank illustration show the best cutting layout?","a":"No. It is a visual reference. An installer still needs to plan joins, edge cuts and the direction of the flooring."},{"q":"What should I check before using Flooring Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Plank length, Plank width and Planks per pack. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_roof_area","name":"Roof Area Calculator","description":"Estimate flat or pitched roof surface from a footprint.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/roof-area-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_roof_area/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_roof_area.md","page_id":20,"shortcode":"whatson_roof_area_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Roof footprint","label":"Roof type","type":"select","choices":{"flat":"Flat","gable":"Symmetric gable","shed":"Single slope"}},{"group":"Roof footprint","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Roof footprint","label":"Building length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Roof footprint","label":"Building width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Roof footprint","label":"Horizontal overhang each edge","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000},{"group":"Pitch","label":"Pitch angle","type":"number","unit":"degrees","help":"","min":0,"max":75},{"group":"Pitch","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Pitch","label":"Covering quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / sq ft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Assumes simple planes with no dormers, valleys or roof openings. Enter horizontal overhang.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A pitched roof has more surface than its horizontal footprint. Using the footprint alone can understate the material requirement.","Enter the simple roof geometry, pitch and horizontal overhang. Use a measured layout for roofs with valleys, dormers or several intersecting planes."],"steps":["Choose roof type and measurement unit. Enter building length, building width and horizontal overhang each edge.","Enter pitch angle, ordering allowance and covering quote.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation makes the effect of pitch visible before you compare roofing coverage or coating quantities.","check":"Assumes simple planes with no dormers, valleys or roof openings. Enter horizontal overhang.","faq":[{"q":"Can it handle every roof shape?","a":"No. It assumes simple planes. Treat openings, valleys and complicated junctions through a measured roof schedule rather than a single footprint."},{"q":"What should I check before using Roof Area Calculator?","a":"Check Roof type, Measurement unit, Building length and Building width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_roof_sheet","name":"Roof Sheet Calculator","description":"Lay out roofing sheets with overlaps and count purchase sheets.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/roof-sheet-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_roof_sheet/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_roof_sheet.md","page_id":21,"shortcode":"whatson_roof_sheet_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Roof plane","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Roof plane","label":"Slope length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Roof plane","label":"Plane width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Roof plane","label":"Identical roof planes","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Sheet and overlap","label":"Sheet length","type":"number","unit":"ft","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Sheet and overlap","label":"Sheet width","type":"number","unit":"ft","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Sheet and overlap","label":"End overlap","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Sheet and overlap","label":"Side overlap","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Sheet and overlap","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Sheet quote","label":"Price per sheet","type":"number","unit":"PKR / sheet","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Enter measured slope length, not the horizontal footprint. Effective cover depends on your sheet profile.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Roofing sheets overlap, so their listed width is not the width each sheet adds to the roof.","Measure along the slope and enter the sheet profile's usable dimensions and overlaps. The order count should reflect actual cover, not just the nominal sheet area."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter slope length, plane width and identical roof planes.","Enter sheet length, sheet width, end overlap, side overlap and ordering allowance.","Enter price per sheet.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separating nominal size from effective cover helps you compare profiles without accidentally counting overlap as useful coverage.","check":"Enter measured slope length, not the horizontal footprint. Effective cover depends on your sheet profile.","faq":[{"q":"Should I enter the horizontal roof length?","a":"Use the measured slope length for the covered direction. A horizontal footprint can be shorter than the surface the sheets must cover."},{"q":"What should I check before using Roof Sheet Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Slope length, Plane width and Identical roof planes. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_rebar_weight","name":"Steel Bar Weight Calculator","description":"Build a bar schedule with lengths, quantities and weights.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/rebar-weight-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_rebar_weight/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_rebar_weight.md","page_id":22,"shortcode":"whatson_rebar_weight_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Schedule units","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Schedule units","label":"Steel density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":1000,"max":20000},{"group":"Schedule units","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Steel quote","label":"Steel quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / kg","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Bar schedule","label":"Reference","type":"text"},{"group":"Bar schedule","label":"Diameter","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Bar schedule","label":"Cut length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Bar schedule","label":"Number of bars","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":100000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Nominal cylindrical steel weight. Diameter tolerances, bends and supplier weights can differ.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A steel order is easier to check when bar lengths and quantities are written down before the total weight is calculated.","Build the schedule from the specified diameters and cut lengths. Keep bends, supplier tolerances and delivery weights in mind when comparing the theoretical total with a quote."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter steel density and ordering allowance.","Enter steel quote.","Add the entries in bar schedule as separate rows. Include reference, diameter, cut length and number of bars for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Individual bar rows give you a traceable weight calculation rather than one unexplained steel allowance for the entire building.","check":"Nominal cylindrical steel weight. Diameter tolerances, bends and supplier weights can differ.","faq":[{"q":"Is the calculated weight a delivery guarantee?","a":"No. It uses nominal cylindrical dimensions. Actual diameter tolerances, bends and supplier measurement methods can produce a different delivered weight."},{"q":"What should I check before using Steel Bar Weight Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Steel density, Ordering allowance and Steel quote. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_rebar_mesh","name":"Rebar Mesh Quantity Calculator","description":"Count specified mesh bars and estimate steel weight.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/rebar-mesh-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_rebar_mesh/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_rebar_mesh.md","page_id":23,"shortcode":"whatson_rebar_mesh_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Specified mesh","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Specified mesh","label":"Slab length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Specified mesh","label":"Slab width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Specified mesh","label":"Specified edge cover","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":1000},{"group":"Specified mesh","label":"Spacing across width","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":3000},{"group":"Specified mesh","label":"Spacing across length","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":3000},{"group":"Steel requirements","label":"Specified bar diameter","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Steel requirements","label":"Layers","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":10},{"group":"Steel requirements","label":"Extra lap length per bar","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":10000},{"group":"Steel requirements","label":"Steel density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":1000,"max":20000},{"group":"Steel requirements","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Steel requirements","label":"Steel quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / kg","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Counts a specified layout. Bar size, cover, spacing and laps must come from your project drawings; this tool does not design reinforcement.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Mesh quantities depend on the specified bar spacing, cover and lap details. Those choices must come from the project drawings.","Enter the layout you have been given and review counts in both directions. Use the result to check quantities, with reinforcement design handled by the responsible engineer."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter slab length, slab width, specified edge cover, spacing across width and spacing across length.","Enter specified bar diameter, layers, extra lap length per bar, steel density, ordering allowance and steel quote.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A layout based count helps explain where the steel total comes from when checking a slab material schedule.","check":"Counts a specified layout. Bar size, cover, spacing and laps must come from your project drawings; this tool does not design reinforcement.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool select safe bar spacing?","a":"No. It counts an entered arrangement. It cannot establish the required bar diameter, spacing, cover or structural adequacy."},{"q":"What should I check before using Rebar Mesh Quantity Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Slab length, Slab width and Specified edge cover. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_stairs","name":"Staircase Calculator","description":"Compare risers and treads and estimate stair flight quantities.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/stairs-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_stairs/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_stairs.md","page_id":24,"shortcode":"whatson_staircase_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Flight geometry","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Flight geometry","label":"Floor to floor rise","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Flight geometry","label":"Target maximum riser","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":30},{"group":"Flight geometry","label":"Tread depth","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0.1,"max":50},{"group":"Flight geometry","label":"Flight width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Optional concrete quantity","label":"Waist thickness","type":"number","unit":"in","help":"","min":0,"max":30},{"group":"Optional concrete quantity","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Optional concrete quantity","label":"Concrete quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / m³","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Straight flight geometry only, excluding landings. This is not a building code or structural compliance check.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A straight stair flight begins with the total rise and the space available for its run.","Compare riser and tread options using measured dimensions. Review the resulting geometry before estimating flight quantities, then account for landings and structural details separately."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter floor to floor rise, target maximum riser, tread depth and flight width.","Enter waist thickness, ordering allowance and concrete quote.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Seeing rise and run together helps you notice a layout problem before turning the staircase into a material order.","check":"Straight flight geometry only, excluding landings. This is not a building code or structural compliance check.","faq":[{"q":"Does the result confirm building code compliance?","a":"No. Local requirements, headroom, handrails and structural design require a separate check. This is a straight flight geometry worksheet."},{"q":"What should I check before using Staircase Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Floor to floor rise, Target maximum riser and Tread depth. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_land_area","name":"Land Area Calculator","description":"Measure rectangular, triangular or trapezoidal plot areas.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/land-area-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_land_area/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_land_area.md","page_id":25,"shortcode":"whatson_land_area_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Plot geometry","label":"Shape","type":"select","choices":{"rectangle":"Rectangle","triangle":"Triangle with perpendicular height","trapezoid":"Trapezoid with parallel sides"}},{"group":"Plot geometry","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Plot geometry","label":"Length or first parallel side","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Plot geometry","label":"Width or perpendicular height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Plot geometry","label":"Second parallel side","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Local area units","label":"Marla definition","type":"select","choices":{"225":"225 sq ft","250":"250 sq ft","272.25":"272.25 sq ft","custom":"Custom size"}},{"group":"Local area units","label":"Custom marla area","type":"number","unit":"sq ft","help":"","min":1,"max":10000}],"limitations":"Use perpendicular height for triangles and trapezoids. Irregular boundaries need surveyed measurements.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Plot area depends on the boundary shape and the direction of its measurements. A sloping side is not a triangle's perpendicular height.","Choose the matching simple shape and enter reliable dimensions. Compare the calculated area with surveyed information before using it for a land transaction."],"steps":["Choose shape and measurement unit. Enter length or first parallel side, width or perpendicular height and second parallel side.","Choose marla definition. Enter custom marla area.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The shape choices make common rectangular, triangular and trapezoidal measurements easier to check without combining unrelated formulas.","check":"Use perpendicular height for triangles and trapezoids. Irregular boundaries need surveyed measurements.","faq":[{"q":"Can it measure an irregular property boundary?","a":"Not from a single simple shape. Irregular plots need surveyed dimensions and an appropriate division into measured sections."},{"q":"What should I check before using Land Area Calculator?","a":"Check Shape, Measurement unit, Length or first parallel side and Width or perpendicular height. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_area_converter","name":"Pakistan Area Converter","description":"Convert marla, kanal, square feet and other land area units.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/area-converter-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_area_converter/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_area_converter.md","page_id":26,"shortcode":"whatson_area_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Area to convert","label":"Area","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000},{"group":"Area to convert","label":"Input unit","type":"select","choices":{"sqft":"Square feet","sqm":"Square metres","sqyd":"Square yards","marla":"Marla","kanal":"Kanal","acre":"Acre"}},{"group":"Marla convention","label":"Marla definition","type":"select","choices":{"225":"225 sq ft","250":"250 sq ft","272.25":"272.25 sq ft","custom":"Custom size"}},{"group":"Marla convention","label":"Custom marla area","type":"number","unit":"sq ft","help":"","min":1,"max":10000}],"limitations":"A kanal is 20 selected marlas. Acres retain their fixed square foot definition.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A marla can mean a different square foot area in different records. That choice matters before you convert a plot into kanal.","Select the marla definition used in your document and keep it consistent throughout the conversion. Compare the result with the seller's or surveyor's stated basis."],"steps":["Choose input unit. Enter area.","Choose marla definition. Enter custom marla area.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"An explicit marla size avoids a silent assumption when comparing land figures written in several units.","check":"A kanal is 20 selected marlas. Acres retain their fixed square foot definition.","faq":[{"q":"How is kanal calculated?","a":"The tool treats one kanal as 20 of the selected marlas. Check that the selected marla definition matches the property record."},{"q":"What should I check before using Pakistan Area Converter?","a":"Check Area, Input unit, Marla definition and Custom marla area. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_volume_converter","name":"Construction Volume Converter","description":"Convert cubic feet, cubic metres, litres and gallons.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/volume-converter-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_volume_converter/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_volume_converter.md","page_id":27,"shortcode":"whatson_volume_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Volume to convert","label":"Volume","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000},{"group":"Volume to convert","label":"Input unit","type":"select","choices":{"cft":"Cubic feet","m3":"Cubic metres","litre":"Litres","yd3":"Cubic yards","imp_gallon":"Imperial gallons","us_gallon":"US gallons"}}],"limitations":"Imperial and US gallons are different units and are shown separately.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Material quantities become confusing when a quote uses cubic feet and the measurement uses cubic metres.","Enter the volume and choose the correct source unit. Gallon conversions need particular care because US and imperial gallons are different sizes."],"steps":["Choose input unit. Enter volume.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Keeping the units named lets you compare a site measurement with a supplier's quoted volume without changing the physical quantity.","check":"Imperial and US gallons are different units and are shown separately.","faq":[{"q":"Are US and imperial gallons interchangeable?","a":"No. Select the version used in the source document. Changing the gallon definition changes the converted volume."},{"q":"What should I check before using Construction Volume Converter?","a":"Check Volume and Input unit. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_excavation","name":"Excavation & Backfill Calculator","description":"Build a pit schedule and estimate excavation, spoil and backfill.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/excavation-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_excavation/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_excavation.md","page_id":28,"shortcode":"whatson_excavation_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Measurements","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Measurements","label":"Permanent occupied volume","type":"number","unit":"m³","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Earthwork assumptions","label":"Loose spoil factor","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Earthwork assumptions","label":"Delivered fill factor","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Earthwork assumptions","label":"Truck capacity","type":"number","unit":"cft","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000},{"group":"Work quotes","label":"Excavation rate","type":"number","unit":"PKR / m³","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Work quotes","label":"Delivered fill rate","type":"number","unit":"PKR / cft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Excavation schedule","label":"Reference","type":"text"},{"group":"Excavation schedule","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Excavation schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Excavation schedule","label":"Depth","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Excavation schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Rectangular excavation volumes only. Sloped sides, shoring and site access are not assessed.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Excavated ground, loose spoil and backfill are different quantities. A pit schedule helps keep those stages separate.","Enter rectangular excavation dimensions and the volume assumptions for the work. Add site details such as sloped sides or shoring through a separate measured plan."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter permanent occupied volume.","Enter loose spoil factor, delivered fill factor and truck capacity.","Enter excavation rate and delivered fill rate.","Add the entries in excavation schedule as separate rows. Include reference, length, width, depth and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Several pit rows make the earthwork estimate easier to trace when the project includes foundations, trenches and other rectangular cuts.","check":"Rectangular excavation volumes only. Sloped sides, shoring and site access are not assessed.","faq":[{"q":"Does this assess excavation safety?","a":"No. Ground conditions, shoring, access and safe working methods require site assessment. The calculation is a volume planning aid."},{"q":"What should I check before using Excavation & Backfill Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Permanent occupied volume, Loose spoil factor and Delivered fill factor. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_tank","name":"Water Tank Capacity Calculator","description":"Estimate usable water capacity for three tank shapes.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/tank-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_tank/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_tank.md","page_id":29,"shortcode":"whatson_water_tank_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Internal tank dimensions","label":"Tank type","type":"select","choices":{"rectangle":"Rectangular","vertical":"Vertical cylinder","horizontal":"Horizontal cylinder"}},{"group":"Internal tank dimensions","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Internal tank dimensions","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Internal tank dimensions","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Internal tank dimensions","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Internal tank dimensions","label":"Cylinder diameter","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Water level","label":"Water height as percentage of tank height","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"Use internal dimensions. Horizontal cylindrical tanks use a circular segment for partial water levels.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A tank's usable water capacity depends on its inside dimensions and the water level, not its external label alone.","Choose the actual tank shape and enter internal measurements. A partly filled horizontal cylinder needs a segment calculation rather than a simple height percentage."],"steps":["Choose tank type and measurement unit. Enter length, width, height and cylinder diameter.","Enter water height as percentage of tank height.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The shape based result helps distinguish total tank capacity from the amount available at a selected fill level.","check":"Use internal dimensions. Horizontal cylindrical tanks use a circular segment for partial water levels.","faq":[{"q":"Should I measure outside the tank?","a":"Use internal dimensions for water capacity. Wall thickness and unused space reduce the volume available inside the container."},{"q":"What should I check before using Water Tank Capacity Calculator?","a":"Check Tank type, Measurement unit, Length and Width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_formwork","name":"Formwork Area Calculator","description":"Schedule shuttering for columns, beams and slab soffits.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/formwork-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_formwork/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_formwork.md","page_id":30,"shortcode":"whatson_formwork_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Measurement units","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Measurement units","label":"Shuttering rate","type":"number","unit":"PKR / sq ft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Element schedule","label":"Reference","type":"text"},{"group":"Element schedule","label":"Element","type":"select","choices":{"column":"Column, four sides","beam":"Beam, sides and soffit","slab":"Slab soffit"}},{"group":"Element schedule","label":"Length / height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Element schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Element schedule","label":"Depth","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Element schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Contact areas only. Props, reuse cycles, slab edges and support design are excluded.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Shuttering is counted by the surface touching fresh concrete. It is different from the concrete volume itself.","List columns, beams and slab soffits with their measured dimensions. Use the contact area schedule for quantity planning and assess support arrangements separately."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter shuttering rate.","Add the entries in element schedule as separate rows. Include reference, element, length / height, width, depth and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate element rows make it easier to check which faces have been counted and which parts of the formwork quote need additional allowances.","check":"Contact areas only. Props, reuse cycles, slab edges and support design are excluded.","faq":[{"q":"Does the area include props and support design?","a":"No. Props, support loads, reuse cycles and framing arrangements are outside the contact area calculation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Formwork Area Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Shuttering rate, Reference and Element. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_putty","name":"Wall Putty Calculator","description":"Estimate putty mass and bags from product consumption.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/putty-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_putty/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_putty.md","page_id":31,"shortcode":"whatson_wall_putty_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Surface","label":"Net surface area","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Surface","label":"Area unit","type":"select","choices":{"sqft":"Square feet","sqm":"Square metres"}},{"group":"Product requirements","label":"Total applied thickness","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0.01,"max":50},{"group":"Product requirements","label":"Consumption per mm thickness","type":"number","unit":"kg/m²/mm","help":"","min":0.01,"max":20},{"group":"Product requirements","label":"Bag mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Product requirements","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Product requirements","label":"Bag price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / bag","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Use total finished thickness and consumption from the selected product. Coat count is not applied twice.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A wall putty order should follow the selected product's consumption and total finished thickness.","Measure the treatment area and enter the product figures. If the required thickness spans several coats, avoid multiplying a total thickness by the coat count again."],"steps":["Choose area unit. Enter net surface area.","Enter total applied thickness, consumption per mm thickness, bag mass, ordering allowance and bag price.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Product based quantities are more useful than a single bag rule when wall condition and putty systems differ.","check":"Use total finished thickness and consumption from the selected product. Coat count is not applied twice.","faq":[{"q":"Do I multiply the finished thickness by every coat?","a":"No. Enter the total finished thickness on the stated consumption basis. Applying coat count again would count the same thickness twice."},{"q":"What should I check before using Wall Putty Calculator?","a":"Check Net surface area, Area unit, Total applied thickness and Consumption per mm thickness. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_waterproof","name":"Waterproofing Calculator","description":"Plan coating or membrane quantities from product specifications.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/waterproof-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_waterproof/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_waterproof.md","page_id":32,"shortcode":"whatson_waterproofing_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Net treatment area","label":"Area","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Net treatment area","label":"Area unit","type":"select","choices":{"sqft":"Square feet","sqm":"Square metres"}},{"group":"Net treatment area","label":"System","type":"select","choices":{"coating":"Liquid coating","membrane":"Sheet membrane"}},{"group":"Coating specification","label":"Coats","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":10},{"group":"Coating specification","label":"Consumption per coat","type":"number","unit":"kg/m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":50},{"group":"Coating specification","label":"Container mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Membrane specification","label":"Roll length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000},{"group":"Membrane specification","label":"Roll width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100},{"group":"Membrane specification","label":"Overlap allowance on both axes","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":10},{"group":"Order allowance","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Order allowance","label":"Container or roll price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / unit","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Select quantities from the product specification. Details, upstands and penetrations must be included in net treatment area.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Waterproofing quantities depend on whether the system is a coating or a membrane, and on the product's stated coverage.","Measure the full treatment area, including details that need coverage, then use the selected system's specifications. Keep the material estimate tied to that product."],"steps":["Choose area unit and system. Enter area.","Enter coats, consumption per coat and container mass.","Enter roll length, roll width and overlap allowance on both axes.","Enter ordering allowance and container or roll price.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The system choices help separate coating consumption from membrane coverage when comparing a waterproofing purchase.","check":"Select quantities from the product specification. Details, upstands and penetrations must be included in net treatment area.","faq":[{"q":"Should upstands and penetrations be included?","a":"Include their treatment area where the specification requires it. A floor footprint alone can miss vertical returns and detailed work."},{"q":"What should I check before using Waterproofing Calculator?","a":"Check Area, Area unit, System and Coats. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_grout","name":"Tile Grout Calculator","description":"Estimate joint grout with tile size, joint width and depth.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/grout-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_grout/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_grout.md","page_id":33,"shortcode":"whatson_tile_grout_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Tiled area","label":"Area","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Tiled area","label":"Area unit","type":"select","choices":{"sqft":"Square feet","sqm":"Square metres"}},{"group":"Joint geometry","label":"Tile length","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":3000},{"group":"Joint geometry","label":"Tile width","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":3000},{"group":"Joint geometry","label":"Joint width","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Joint geometry","label":"Joint depth","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Product and order","label":"Mixed grout density","type":"number","unit":"kg/litre","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10},{"group":"Product and order","label":"Pack mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Product and order","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Product and order","label":"Pack price","type":"number","unit":"PKR / pack","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Consumption is a theoretical joint estimate. Use the density and yield assumptions on the grout product sheet.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Grout consumption changes with the tile size, joint width and joint depth. Two tiled floors of equal area can need different amounts.","Use the installed joint dimensions and the product's density or yield assumptions. Compare the theoretical requirement with the practical allowance for the work."],"steps":["Choose area unit. Enter area.","Enter tile length, tile width, joint width and joint depth.","Enter mixed grout density, pack mass, ordering allowance and pack price.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Joint based quantities give you a clearer starting point than copying the grout order from a differently sized tile.","check":"Consumption is a theoretical joint estimate. Use the density and yield assumptions on the grout product sheet.","faq":[{"q":"Can the same grout amount suit every tile size?","a":"No. Smaller tiles create more joint length per unit area. Joint width, depth and product density also change the requirement."},{"q":"What should I check before using Tile Grout Calculator?","a":"Check Area, Area unit, Tile length and Tile width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_skirting","name":"Skirting Calculator","description":"Measure room perimeters, deduct doors and count skirting pieces.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/skirting-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_skirting/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_skirting.md","page_id":34,"shortcode":"whatson_skirting_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Measurements","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Measurements","label":"Total door widths to deduct","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000},{"group":"Skirting order","label":"Piece length","type":"number","unit":"ft","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Skirting order","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Skirting order","label":"Price per piece","type":"number","unit":"PKR / piece","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Room","type":"text"},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Door widths are deducted once from the total room perimeter. Corner cuts are covered by your allowance.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Skirting follows the room perimeter, with doorway gaps deducted from the length that actually receives pieces.","Measure each room, list doors and choose the purchased piece length. Add a cutting allowance before checking the rounded purchase count."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter total door widths to deduct.","Enter piece length, ordering allowance and price per piece.","Add the entries in room schedule as separate rows. Include room, length, width and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A perimeter schedule makes it easier to spot repeated door deductions and compare standard piece lengths at the supplier.","check":"Door widths are deducted once from the total room perimeter. Corner cuts are covered by your allowance.","faq":[{"q":"Are door widths deducted more than once?","a":"No. Each listed door width is deducted once from the total room perimeter. Check the room list for repeated entries."},{"q":"What should I check before using Skirting Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Total door widths to deduct, Piece length and Ordering allowance. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_wallpaper","name":"Wallpaper Calculator","description":"Estimate whole drops and rolls with pattern repeats.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/wallpaper-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_wallpaper/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_wallpaper.md","page_id":35,"shortcode":"whatson_wallpaper_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Walls","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Wallpaper roll","label":"Roll width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10},{"group":"Wallpaper roll","label":"Roll length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000},{"group":"Wallpaper roll","label":"Vertical pattern repeat","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":10},{"group":"Wallpaper roll","label":"Trim allowance per drop","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":10},{"group":"Wallpaper roll","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Wallpaper roll","label":"Price per roll","type":"number","unit":"PKR / roll","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Wall schedule","label":"Wall","type":"text"},{"group":"Wall schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Wall schedule","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Wall schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Whole-height drops are counted. Doors and windows are not deducted, and leftover drops are not shared between different heights.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Wallpaper rolls are constrained by full height drops and pattern matching. Dividing wall area by roll area can miss those losses.","Enter the wall heights, roll dimensions and pattern repeat. Review whole drops for each height before comparing the roll quantity with the room schedule."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit.","Enter roll width, roll length, vertical pattern repeat, trim allowance per drop, ordering allowance and price per roll.","Add the entries in wall schedule as separate rows. Include wall, width, height and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Counting drops gives a more practical purchase estimate when the pattern repeat consumes part of every cut.","check":"Whole-height drops are counted. Doors and windows are not deducted, and leftover drops are not shared between different heights.","faq":[{"q":"Are windows and doors deducted?","a":"No. This calculation retains whole height drops. Openings and reusable offcuts need a separate practical hanging plan."},{"q":"What should I check before using Wallpaper Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Roll width, Roll length and Vertical pattern repeat. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_ceiling","name":"False Ceiling Calculator","description":"Plan ceiling boards or panels and specified grid lengths.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/ceiling-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_ceiling/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_ceiling.md","page_id":36,"shortcode":"whatson_false_ceiling_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Ceiling measurements","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Board and grid","label":"Panel length","type":"number","unit":"ft","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Board and grid","label":"Panel width","type":"number","unit":"ft","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Board and grid","label":"Specified grid spacing","type":"number","unit":"ft","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100},{"group":"Board and grid","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Board and grid","label":"Price per panel","type":"number","unit":"PKR / panel","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Room","type":"text"},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Room schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Board counts and simple grid lengths only. Hangers, anchors, framing specifications and load checks are excluded.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Ceiling boards and grid lengths need a layout basis rather than a rough allowance from the house area.","Enter the room dimensions and chosen board or panel specifications. Use the quantities as a material schedule while checking framing and support details separately."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit.","Enter panel length, panel width, specified grid spacing, ordering allowance and price per panel.","Add the entries in room schedule as separate rows. Include room, length, width and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A measured ceiling area helps you compare board coverage and simple grid quantities for the same room.","check":"Board counts and simple grid lengths only. Hangers, anchors, framing specifications and load checks are excluded.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool specify hangers or anchors?","a":"No. Those depend on the ceiling system, loads and approved fixing details. The worksheet covers board counts and simple grid lengths."},{"q":"What should I check before using False Ceiling Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Panel length, Panel width and Specified grid spacing. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_openings","name":"Door & Window Area Calculator","description":"Schedule opening areas and frame perimeter lengths.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/openings-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_openings/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_openings.md","page_id":37,"shortcode":"whatson_door_window_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Measurement units","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Measurement units","label":"Area rate","type":"number","unit":"PKR / sq ft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Door and window schedule","label":"Reference","type":"text"},{"group":"Door and window schedule","label":"Type","type":"select","choices":{"door":"Door","window":"Window"}},{"group":"Door and window schedule","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Door and window schedule","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Door and window schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Door frames use two jambs and a head. Window frames use the full perimeter. Hardware and profile quantities are separate.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A door frame usually has two jambs and a head, while a window frame follows all four sides.","List each opening with its dimensions and quantity. Compare the area schedule with the frame perimeter before asking for a joinery or glazing quote."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter area rate.","Add the entries in door and window schedule as separate rows. Include reference, type, width, height and quantity for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Different door and window frame rules prevent an opening area from being mistaken for the length of frame material.","check":"Door frames use two jambs and a head. Window frames use the full perimeter. Hardware and profile quantities are separate.","faq":[{"q":"Does it count hinges and other hardware?","a":"No. Hardware, profiles and fittings need their own specification and quantity schedule. The output covers area and frame length."},{"q":"What should I check before using Door & Window Area Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Area rate, Reference and Type. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_house_cost","name":"House Construction Cost Calculator","description":"Build a floor schedule and compare quoted construction costs.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/house-cost-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_house_cost/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_house_cost.md","page_id":38,"shortcode":"whatson_house_construction_cost_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Area convention","label":"Floor area unit","type":"select","choices":{"sqft":"Square feet","sqm":"Square metres","sqyd":"Square yards","marla":"Marla","kanal":"Kanal","acre":"Acre"}},{"group":"Area convention","label":"Marla definition","type":"select","choices":{"225":"225 sq ft","250":"250 sq ft","272.25":"272.25 sq ft","custom":"Custom size"}},{"group":"Area convention","label":"Custom marla area","type":"number","unit":"sq ft","help":"","min":1,"max":10000},{"group":"Budget allowances","label":"Contingency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Budget allowances","label":"Other fixed project costs","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Covered floor schedule","label":"Floor","type":"text"},{"group":"Covered floor schedule","label":"Covered area","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000000},{"group":"Covered floor schedule","label":"Grey structure quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / sq ft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Covered floor schedule","label":"Finishing quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR / sq ft","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Uses your quoted rates and covered floor areas. Land price, permits and other costs are included only when you enter them.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A house cost estimate becomes useful when floor areas and quoted construction rates are visible together.","List the covered area of each floor and use quotes for the intended scope. Add land, permits or other extras only where you want them included."],"steps":["Choose floor area unit and marla definition. Enter custom marla area.","Enter contingency and other fixed project costs.","Add the entries in covered floor schedule as separate rows. Include floor, covered area, grey structure quote and finishing quote for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The floor schedule lets you compare quoted rates without hiding a larger covered area inside a headline house price.","check":"Uses your quoted rates and covered floor areas. Land price, permits and other costs are included only when you enter them.","faq":[{"q":"Are current Pakistan rates supplied automatically?","a":"No. Enter your own quotations. The total reflects only the areas, rates and extra costs you provide."},{"q":"What should I check before using House Construction Cost Calculator?","a":"Check Floor area unit, Marla definition, Custom marla area and Contingency. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_budget","name":"Construction Budget Planner","description":"Build a bill of quantities with labour, taxes and contingency.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/budget-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_budget/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_budget.md","page_id":39,"shortcode":"whatson_construction_budget_planner","inputs":[{"group":"Project label","label":"Project name","type":"text"},{"group":"Extra costs","label":"Labour total","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Extra costs","label":"Transport total","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Extra costs","label":"Tax on entered material subtotal","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Extra costs","label":"Contingency on subtotal plus tax","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Material bill of quantities","label":"Material","type":"text"},{"group":"Material bill of quantities","label":"Unit","type":"text"},{"group":"Material bill of quantities","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000},{"group":"Material bill of quantities","label":"Unit rate","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"A manually entered bill of quantities. It does not infer material quantities from house size.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["A bill of quantities turns a construction budget into costs you can check line by line.","Enter material and labour quantities with quoted rates, then add applicable taxes and contingency. Keep existing allowances out of later rows to avoid counting them twice."],"steps":["Enter project name.","Enter labour total, transport total, tax on entered material subtotal and contingency on subtotal plus tax.","Add the entries in material bill of quantities as separate rows. Include material, unit, quantity and unit rate for each row.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The item schedule makes it easier to update one changing supplier quote without rebuilding the entire budget.","check":"A manually entered bill of quantities. It does not infer material quantities from house size.","faq":[{"q":"Will the tool infer quantities from my house size?","a":"No. Quantities are entered manually. Use measured schedules or the relevant quantity tools before adding items to the budget."},{"q":"What should I check before using Construction Budget Planner?","a":"Check Project name, Labour total, Transport total and Tax on entered material subtotal. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"construction_pavers","name":"Paver Calculator","description":"Estimate paving blocks, bedding sand and edge lengths.","category":"Construction","category_id":"construction","url":"https://whatson.pk/pavers-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_pavers/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/construction_pavers.md","page_id":40,"shortcode":"whatson_paver_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Paved area","label":"Measurement unit","type":"select","choices":{"ft":"Feet","m":"Metres","in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres","mm":"Millimetres"}},{"group":"Paved area","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Paved area","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000},{"group":"Paver module","label":"Paver length","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":1000},{"group":"Paver module","label":"Paver width","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":1,"max":1000},{"group":"Paver module","label":"Joint width","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":50},{"group":"Paver module","label":"Sand bed thickness","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":300},{"group":"Paver module","label":"Ordering allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"Added once to the measured requirement.","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Paver module","label":"Price per paver","type":"number","unit":"PKR / paver","help":"Optional. Enter your own supplier quote.","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Rectangular paver modules only. Bedding volume excludes compaction and base layers.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T14:08:57+00:00","intro":["Paving orders need block quantities, bedding sand and the edges around the area. Those are separate purchase items.","Enter the measured paved area and rectangular module size, then apply a cutting allowance. Check bedding depth and edge lengths on their own measurement basis."],"steps":["Choose measurement unit. Enter length and width.","Enter paver length, paver width, joint width, sand bed thickness, ordering allowance and price per paver.","Select Calculate estimate. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Keeping blocks, bedding and edging together helps you assemble a practical shopping list without confusing their units.","check":"Rectangular paver modules only. Bedding volume excludes compaction and base layers.","faq":[{"q":"Does the sand volume include the base layer?","a":"No. Bedding sand is separate from base preparation and compaction. Add those requirements from the project specification."},{"q":"What should I check before using Paver Calculator?","a":"Check Measurement unit, Length, Width and Paver length. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_recipe_scale","name":"Recipe Scaler","description":"Scale an ingredient list to new servings or a direct multiplier.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/recipe-scale-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_recipe_scale/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_recipe_scale.md","page_id":84,"shortcode":"whatson_recipe_scaler","inputs":[{"group":"Batch size","label":"Scale by","type":"select","choices":{"servings":"Original and target servings","factor":"Direct multiplier"}},{"group":"Batch size","label":"Original servings","type":"number","unit":"servings","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Batch size","label":"Target servings","type":"number","unit":"servings","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Batch size","label":"Multiplier","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Original ingredients","label":"Ingredient","type":"text"},{"group":"Original ingredients","label":"Original quantity","type":"number","unit":"","help":"Decimals, 1/2 and 1 1/2 are accepted.","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Original ingredients","label":"Recipe unit","type":"text"}],"limitations":"All lines scale proportionally. Baking time, pan size and seasonings may need separate decisions.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Cooking for six instead of four should not mean guessing every ingredient separately. A serving multiplier gives the batch a consistent starting point.","Keep the original units on each ingredient row. The quantities scale together, but pan choice, seasoning and cooking time still need attention."],"steps":["Choose scale by. Enter original servings, target servings and multiplier.","Add the entries in original ingredients as separate rows. Include ingredient, original quantity and recipe unit for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Ingredient rows preserve the recipe's proportions and make fractional quantities easier to check before weighing or shopping.","check":"All lines scale proportionally. Baking time, pan size and seasonings may need separate decisions.","faq":[{"q":"Will doubling the recipe double the baking time?","a":"No. Batch depth, pan shape and oven behaviour affect timing. Scale the ingredients here and decide the cooking schedule separately."},{"q":"What should I check before using Recipe Scaler?","a":"Check Scale by, Original servings, Target servings and Multiplier. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_ingredient","name":"Ingredient Weight Converter","description":"Convert ingredient mass and volume with an explicit cup weight reference.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/ingredient-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_ingredient/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_ingredient.md","page_id":85,"shortcode":"whatson_ingredient_weight_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Ingredient","label":"Ingredient reference","type":"select","choices":{"maida":"Plain flour / maida (reference)","sugar":"Granulated sugar (reference)","icing":"Icing sugar, unsifted (reference)","cocoa":"Unsweetened cocoa (reference)","cornstarch":"Cornstarch / cornflour (reference)","besan":"Chickpea flour / besan (reference)","atta":"Whole wheat flour / atta (reference)","ghee":"Ghee (reference)","oats":"Oats, old fashioned (reference)","oil":"Vegetable oil (reference)","custom":"My measured ingredient"}},{"group":"Ingredient","label":"Volume of reference cup","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"Assumed reference cup volume. Use your own measured cup and mass in custom mode.","min":1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient","label":"Custom mass per reference cup","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Quantity","label":"Amount","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Quantity","label":"From","type":"select","choices":{"g":"Grams","kg":"Kilograms","oz":"Ounces by weight","lb":"Pounds by weight","ml":"Millilitres","litre":"Litres","cup":"Cups","tbsp":"Tablespoons","tsp":"Teaspoons","us_fl_oz":"US fluid ounces","imp_fl_oz":"Imperial fluid ounces"}},{"group":"Quantity","label":"To","type":"select","choices":{"g":"Grams","kg":"Kilograms","oz":"Ounces by weight","lb":"Pounds by weight","ml":"Millilitres","litre":"Litres","cup":"Cups","tbsp":"Tablespoons","tsp":"Teaspoons","us_fl_oz":"US fluid ounces","imp_fl_oz":"Imperial fluid ounces"}},{"group":"Your utensils","label":"Measuring standard","type":"select","choices":{"metric":"Metric: 250 ml cup, 15 ml tbsp, 5 ml tsp","us":"US customary: 236.588 ml cup","australian":"Australian: 250 ml cup, 20 ml tbsp","custom":"My own measuring utensils"}},{"group":"Your utensils","label":"Custom cup size","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your utensils","label":"Custom tablespoon","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your utensils","label":"Custom teaspoon","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":0.1,"max":50,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Cup weights are approximate references. Packing, flour type and utensils change the mass; weighing your own ingredient is more reliable.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A cup describes volume, while a gram describes mass. The connection depends on which ingredient fills that cup.","Choose a suitable cup weight reference and match it to your utensil. Flour packing and ingredient type can change the actual weighed amount."],"steps":["Choose ingredient reference. Enter volume of reference cup and custom mass per reference cup.","Choose from and to. Enter amount.","Choose measuring standard. Enter custom cup size, custom tablespoon and custom teaspoon.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The reference stays explicit, so you can adjust a conversion instead of treating every cup as the same mass.","check":"Cup weights are approximate references. Packing, flour type and utensils change the mass; weighing your own ingredient is more reliable.","faq":[{"q":"Is a cup of flour equal in weight to a cup of water?","a":"No. Their densities differ. Use a reference for the actual ingredient, or weigh your own cup for a better kitchen estimate."},{"q":"What should I check before using Ingredient Weight Converter?","a":"Check Ingredient reference, Volume of reference cup, Custom mass per reference cup and Amount. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_volume","name":"Kitchen Volume Converter","description":"Convert cups, spoons and liquid units using your chosen utensil sizes.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/volume-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_volume/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_volume.md","page_id":86,"shortcode":"whatson_kitchen_volume_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Liquid quantity","label":"Amount","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Liquid quantity","label":"From","type":"select","choices":{"ml":"Millilitres","litre":"Litres","cup":"Cups","tbsp":"Tablespoons","tsp":"Teaspoons","us_fl_oz":"US fluid ounces","imp_fl_oz":"Imperial fluid ounces"}},{"group":"Liquid quantity","label":"To","type":"select","choices":{"ml":"Millilitres","litre":"Litres","cup":"Cups","tbsp":"Tablespoons","tsp":"Teaspoons","us_fl_oz":"US fluid ounces","imp_fl_oz":"Imperial fluid ounces"}},{"group":"Measuring standard","label":"Measuring standard","type":"select","choices":{"metric":"Metric: 250 ml cup, 15 ml tbsp, 5 ml tsp","us":"US customary: 236.588 ml cup","australian":"Australian: 250 ml cup, 20 ml tbsp","custom":"My own measuring utensils"}},{"group":"Measuring standard","label":"Custom cup size","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measuring standard","label":"Custom tablespoon","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Measuring standard","label":"Custom teaspoon","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":0.1,"max":50,"integer":false}],"limitations":"This converts volume only. A cup of flour and a cup of water do not have the same mass.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Recipes use cups and spoons that are not always the same size. A written volume conversion makes the utensil choice visible.","Select the volume units and check the cup or spoon definition before measuring. Weight belongs in a separate conversion."],"steps":["Choose from and to. Enter amount.","Choose measuring standard. Enter custom cup size, custom tablespoon and custom teaspoon.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Editable utensil sizes help when a recipe and your kitchen measures use different cup conventions.","check":"This converts volume only. A cup of flour and a cup of water do not have the same mass.","faq":[{"q":"Can this convert a cup directly into grams?","a":"Not without an ingredient weight reference. This tool converts liquid and utensil volume units, not ingredient mass."},{"q":"What should I check before using Kitchen Volume Converter?","a":"Check Amount, From, To and Measuring standard. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_weight","name":"Kitchen Weight Converter","description":"Convert grams, kilograms, ounces and pounds by weight.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/weight-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_weight/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_weight.md","page_id":87,"shortcode":"whatson_kitchen_weight_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Weight","label":"Amount","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Weight","label":"From","type":"select","choices":{"g":"Grams","kg":"Kilograms","oz":"Ounces by weight","lb":"Pounds by weight"}},{"group":"Weight","label":"To","type":"select","choices":{"g":"Grams","kg":"Kilograms","oz":"Ounces by weight","lb":"Pounds by weight"}}],"limitations":"Ounces here are weight. Fluid ounces belong in the volume converter.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["An ingredient list in ounces can be awkward when your scale displays grams. Weight conversion keeps the recipe quantity unchanged.","Enter the amount and source weight unit, then read the destination unit before weighing. Keep fluid ounces out of this calculation."],"steps":["Choose from and to. Enter amount.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Direct weight comparisons remove unnecessary cup estimates when the recipe already provides a mass measurement.","check":"Ounces here are weight. Fluid ounces belong in the volume converter.","faq":[{"q":"Does ounce mean fluid ounce here?","a":"No. Ounces here are mass units. Use the kitchen volume converter for fluid ounces and other liquid measures."},{"q":"What should I check before using Kitchen Weight Converter?","a":"Check Amount, From and To. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_oven","name":"Oven Temperature Converter","description":"Convert Celsius and Fahrenheit and apply an editable fan offset.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/oven-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_oven/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_oven.md","page_id":88,"shortcode":"whatson_oven_temperature_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Recipe setting","label":"Temperature","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Recipe setting","label":"Temperature unit","type":"select","choices":{"c":"Celsius","f":"Fahrenheit"}},{"group":"Recipe setting","label":"Recipe oven mode","type":"select","choices":{"conventional":"Conventional / still air","fan":"Fan / convection"}},{"group":"Fan adjustment","label":"Assumed reduction for fan","type":"number","unit":"°C","help":"","min":0,"max":60,"integer":false}],"limitations":"The fan offset is an editable assumption, not an exact conversion or baking instruction. Use the recipe and oven manufacturer guidance.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A recipe's temperature can be written on a different scale from your oven dial. Convert the scale before considering a fan adjustment.","Enter the temperature and conversion direction, then review the optional fan offset against your oven guidance. An offset is an assumption rather than an exact unit conversion."],"steps":["Choose temperature unit and recipe oven mode. Enter temperature.","Enter assumed reduction for fan.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Keeping the scale conversion and fan adjustment separate helps you see which part is arithmetic and which part is a cooking choice.","check":"The fan offset is an editable assumption, not an exact conversion or baking instruction. Use the recipe and oven manufacturer guidance.","faq":[{"q":"Is the fan offset a universal baking rule?","a":"No. Oven and recipe instructions take priority. Adjust the offset deliberately instead of assuming it suits every oven or dish."},{"q":"What should I check before using Oven Temperature Converter?","a":"Check Temperature, Temperature unit, Recipe oven mode and Assumed reduction for fan. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_pan","name":"Cake Pan Converter","description":"Compare pan areas or batter volumes to find a recipe multiplier.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/pan-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_pan/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_pan.md","page_id":89,"shortcode":"whatson_cake_pan_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Comparison","label":"Preserve","type":"select","choices":{"area":"Same batter depth: compare base area","volume":"Entered batter depths: compare volume"}},{"group":"Original pan","label":"Shape","type":"select","choices":{"round":"Round","square":"Square","rectangle":"Rectangle"}},{"group":"Original pan","label":"Dimension unit","type":"select","choices":{"in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres"}},{"group":"Original pan","label":"Diameter or length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Original pan","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Original pan","label":"Batter depth","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Original pan","label":"Pan count","type":"number","unit":"pans","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"New pan","label":"Shape","type":"select","choices":{"round":"Round","square":"Square","rectangle":"Rectangle"}},{"group":"New pan","label":"Dimension unit","type":"select","choices":{"in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres"}},{"group":"New pan","label":"Diameter or length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"New pan","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"New pan","label":"Batter depth","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"New pan","label":"Pan count","type":"number","unit":"pans","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Use internal measurements. Straight sided pans are assumed. This gives a recipe multiplier, not an automatic baking time.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Changing a cake pan can change batter depth even when the recipe quantity stays the same. Comparing internal dimensions is the first step.","Choose whether you are comparing area or batter volume and measure the inside of both pans. Use the multiplier as a recipe planning figure."],"steps":["Choose preserve.","Choose shape and dimension unit. Enter diameter or length, width, batter depth and pan count.","Choose shape and dimension unit. Enter diameter or length, width, batter depth and pan count.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Area and volume comparisons help explain why a wider pan or a deeper tin may need a different batch quantity.","check":"Use internal measurements. Straight sided pans are assumed. This gives a recipe multiplier, not an automatic baking time.","faq":[{"q":"Does the multiplier also set baking time?","a":"No. Batter depth and the recipe affect baking time. Check doneness separately after choosing a suitable batch and pan."},{"q":"What should I check before using Cake Pan Converter?","a":"Check Preserve, Shape, Dimension unit and Diameter or length. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_batter","name":"Batter Volume Calculator","description":"Estimate pan capacity and batter volume from an entered fill level.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/batter-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_batter/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_batter.md","page_id":90,"shortcode":"whatson_batter_volume_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Internal pan dimensions","label":"Shape","type":"select","choices":{"round":"Round","square":"Square","rectangle":"Rectangle"}},{"group":"Internal pan dimensions","label":"Dimension unit","type":"select","choices":{"in":"Inches","cm":"Centimetres"}},{"group":"Internal pan dimensions","label":"Diameter or length","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Internal pan dimensions","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Internal pan dimensions","label":"Internal pan height","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Internal pan dimensions","label":"Pan count","type":"number","unit":"pans","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Fill and batter","label":"Fill height","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Fill and batter","label":"Measured batter density","type":"number","unit":"g/ml","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Geometric capacity assumes straight sides. Fill level and batter density are your assumptions; the tool does not predict rise or prevent overflow.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A pan's full capacity is not a sensible batter target for every recipe. The chosen fill level leaves space for what happens during baking.","Measure the pan internally and enter the fill fraction you intend to use. Batter mass also depends on the density you provide."],"steps":["Choose shape and dimension unit. Enter diameter or length, width, internal pan height and pan count.","Enter fill height and measured batter density.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate capacity, fill volume and estimated mass help you distinguish the container size from the actual batter quantity.","check":"Geometric capacity assumes straight sides. Fill level and batter density are your assumptions; the tool does not predict rise or prevent overflow.","faq":[{"q":"Will the result prevent batter overflow?","a":"No. Rise depends on the formula and baking conditions. Choose the fill level using guidance for your recipe and pan."},{"q":"What should I check before using Batter Volume Calculator?","a":"Check Shape, Dimension unit, Diameter or length and Width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_hydration","name":"Dough Hydration Calculator","description":"Include starter flour and water in the total dough hydration.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/hydration-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_hydration/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_hydration.md","page_id":91,"shortcode":"whatson_dough_hydration_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Final mix additions","label":"Added flour","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Final mix additions","label":"Added water","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Starter or preferment","label":"Starter mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Starter or preferment","label":"Starter hydration","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Hydration is total water divided by total flour by mass. Milk, eggs and other wet ingredients are not inferred from these flour and water inputs.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Starter brings flour and water into dough before you add the final ingredients. Ignoring either part changes the hydration calculation.","Enter flour and water on a mass basis, including the starter contribution. Keep milk, eggs and other ingredients out of the water total unless separately accounted for."],"steps":["Enter added flour and added water.","Enter starter mass and starter hydration.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The combined flour and water basis makes comparisons between dough formulas clearer when they use different amounts of starter.","check":"Hydration is total water divided by total flour by mass. Milk, eggs and other wet ingredients are not inferred from these flour and water inputs.","faq":[{"q":"Are all wet ingredients treated as water?","a":"No. This worksheet uses the flour and water inputs provided. Milk and eggs have other components and are not inferred automatically."},{"q":"What should I check before using Dough Hydration Calculator?","a":"Check Added flour, Added water, Starter mass and Starter hydration. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_bakers","name":"Baker’s Percentage Calculator","description":"Turn an entered dough schedule into percentages of total flour.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/bakers-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_bakers/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_bakers.md","page_id":92,"shortcode":"whatson_bakers_percentage_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Flour basis","label":"Total flour","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Flour basis","label":"Optional new flour basis","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other ingredients","label":"Ingredient","type":"text"},{"group":"Other ingredients","label":"Mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"All flour, including flour in a preferment, belongs in the flour basis. Break preferments into flour and other ingredients before entering them.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Baker's percentages put every ingredient against the flour basis, making different batch sizes easier to compare.","Include all flour in the basis, including preferment flour, and separate the other ingredients by mass. Check the total flour before interpreting any percentage."],"steps":["Enter total flour and optional new flour basis.","Add the entries in other ingredients as separate rows. Include ingredient and mass for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A consistent flour basis lets you compare formulas without confusing ingredient mass with a share of the entire dough.","check":"All flour, including flour in a preferment, belongs in the flour basis. Break preferments into flour and other ingredients before entering them.","faq":[{"q":"Should a preferment be entered as one ingredient?","a":"Break it into flour and its other components first. Otherwise its flour can be missing from the basis."},{"q":"What should I check before using Baker’s Percentage Calculator?","a":"Check Total flour, Optional new flour basis, Ingredient and Mass. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_pizza","name":"Pizza Dough Calculator","description":"Find flour and ingredient weights for a target number of dough balls.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/pizza-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_pizza/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_pizza.md","page_id":93,"shortcode":"whatson_pizza_dough_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Dough balls","label":"Balls","type":"number","unit":"balls","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Dough balls","label":"Mass per ball","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your baker percentages","label":"Water / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Your baker percentages","label":"Salt / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your baker percentages","label":"Yeast / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your baker percentages","label":"Oil / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Ratios are editable recipe assumptions. The tool does not set fermentation time, yeast type or baking method.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Pizza dough planning starts with the number of balls and their target weight. The ingredient formula then determines the flour needed.","Set the portions and editable ratios to match your recipe. Review the batch mass before weighing flour, water and the remaining ingredients."],"steps":["Enter balls and mass per ball.","Enter water / flour, salt / flour, yeast / flour and oil / flour.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Planning by dough ball mass keeps the batch tied to the portions you intend to shape rather than an arbitrary flour quantity.","check":"Ratios are editable recipe assumptions. The tool does not set fermentation time, yeast type or baking method.","faq":[{"q":"Does it choose fermentation time or yeast type?","a":"No. Those remain recipe decisions. The tool calculates quantities from the ratios you enter."},{"q":"What should I check before using Pizza Dough Calculator?","a":"Check Balls, Mass per ball, Water / flour and Salt / flour. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_bread","name":"Bread Dough Batch Calculator","description":"Build a dough ingredient schedule for weighed loaves before baking.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/bread-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_bread/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_bread.md","page_id":94,"shortcode":"whatson_bread_dough_batch_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Batch target","label":"Loaves","type":"number","unit":"loaves","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Batch target","label":"Dough per loaf before baking","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Baker percentages","label":"Water / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Baker percentages","label":"Salt / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Baker percentages","label":"Yeast / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Baker percentages","label":"Sugar / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Baker percentages","label":"Fat / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"The target is dough mass before baking. Baked loaf mass and yield are not predicted.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A dough target is measured before baking, when each loaf is divided and shaped. It is different from the weight of the finished bread.","Enter your intended loaf count and dough mass, then apply the chosen ingredient ratios. Compare the complete batch with the mixer or workspace capacity."],"steps":["Enter loaves and dough per loaf before baking.","Enter water / flour, salt / flour, yeast / flour, sugar / flour and fat / flour.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Weighed loaf targets make it easier to prepare consistent portions from a single dough batch.","check":"The target is dough mass before baking. Baked loaf mass and yield are not predicted.","faq":[{"q":"Is the result the baked loaf weight?","a":"No. Baking changes moisture and mass. The target here is dough weight before it enters the oven."},{"q":"What should I check before using Bread Dough Batch Calculator?","a":"Check Loaves, Dough per loaf before baking, Water / flour and Salt / flour. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_roti","name":"Roti Dough Calculator","description":"Plan atta and water for weighed roti dough portions.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/roti-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_roti/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_roti.md","page_id":95,"shortcode":"whatson_roti_dough_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Portions","label":"Rotis","type":"number","unit":"rotis","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Portions","label":"Dough per roti","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your dough formula","label":"Water / atta","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Your dough formula","label":"Salt / atta","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your dough formula","label":"Oil / atta","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Hydration and dough ball size are adjustable. Atta absorption and final roti size vary; no diameter or cooking time is predicted.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Roti portions are easier to plan by dough ball weight than by a promise about their final diameter.","Choose the number of portions, ball mass and hydration suited to your atta. Review flour and water quantities before starting the batch."],"steps":["Enter rotis and dough per roti.","Enter water / atta, salt / atta and oil / atta.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The adjustable portion weight helps you keep dough quantities consistent when the household's preferred roti size changes.","check":"Hydration and dough ball size are adjustable. Atta absorption and final roti size vary; no diameter or cooking time is predicted.","faq":[{"q":"Will it predict the cooked roti diameter?","a":"No. Rolling, thickness and flour behaviour affect diameter. The calculation plans dough portions rather than cooking dimensions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Roti Dough Calculator?","a":"Check Rotis, Dough per roti, Water / atta and Salt / atta. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_naan","name":"Naan Dough Calculator","description":"Scale an entered naan formula by total dough ball mass.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/naan-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_naan/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_naan.md","page_id":96,"shortcode":"whatson_naan_dough_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Naan portions","label":"Naans","type":"number","unit":"naans","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Naan portions","label":"Dough per naan","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Water","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Milk","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Yogurt","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Salt","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Yeast","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Sugar","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient percentages of flour","label":"Oil","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Water, milk and yogurt are separate ingredient masses. Their combined percentage is not reported as true water hydration. Ratios are editable, not a tested naan recipe.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A naan formula may contain water, milk and yogurt together. Adding their masses does not make them the same as plain water.","Enter your own ingredient ratios and target dough portions. Keep the dairy ingredients separate so the batch reflects the formula you actually use."],"steps":["Enter naans and dough per naan.","Enter water, milk, yogurt, salt, yeast, sugar and oil.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate ingredient masses make the scaled naan batch easier to weigh and revise.","check":"Water, milk and yogurt are separate ingredient masses. Their combined percentage is not reported as true water hydration. Ratios are editable, not a tested naan recipe.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a tested naan recipe?","a":"No. The ratios are editable planning inputs. Use your own recipe and determine mixing, fermentation and baking separately."},{"q":"What should I check before using Naan Dough Calculator?","a":"Check Naans, Dough per naan, Water and Milk. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_starter","name":"Sourdough Starter Feeding Calculator","description":"Calculate feed amounts from retained starter and feeding ratios.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/starter-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_starter/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_starter.md","page_id":97,"shortcode":"whatson_sourdough_starter_feeding_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Feed ratio by mass","label":"Retained starter","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Feed ratio by mass","label":"Starter parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Feed ratio by mass","label":"Flour parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Feed ratio by mass","label":"Water parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Existing starter","label":"Retained starter hydration","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500,"integer":false}],"limitations":"The final hydration includes flour and water already in the seed. Feeding ratios do not predict readiness time or starter health.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Retained starter already contains flour and water. A feeding calculation needs that starting composition as well as the fresh feed.","Enter the seed amount, hydration and chosen feeding ratio. Compare the fresh flour and water with the resulting total starter."],"steps":["Enter retained starter, starter parts, flour parts and water parts.","Enter retained starter hydration.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Including the retained seed gives a clearer final hydration figure than calculating only the newly added ingredients.","check":"The final hydration includes flour and water already in the seed. Feeding ratios do not predict readiness time or starter health.","faq":[{"q":"Does the ratio tell me when the starter will be ready?","a":"No. Temperature and starter condition affect readiness. The result is a feed quantity, not a fermentation timer."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sourdough Starter Feeding Calculator?","a":"Check Retained starter, Starter parts, Flour parts and Water parts. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_sourdough","name":"Sourdough Recipe Calculator","description":"Split total flour and water between a starter and the final mix.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/sourdough-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_sourdough/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_sourdough.md","page_id":98,"shortcode":"whatson_sourdough_recipe_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Total formula","label":"Total flour including starter","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Total formula","label":"Target total hydration","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Total formula","label":"Flour held in starter","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Total formula","label":"Salt / total flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Starter","label":"Starter hydration","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Prefermented flour percentage is not starter mass percentage. A formula that already has too much starter water is rejected.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A sourdough formula can be balanced around total flour and total water, with part of each arriving through the starter.","Enter the starter hydration and prefermented flour share, then check what remains for the final mix. Keep starter percentage and flour percentage distinct."],"steps":["Enter total flour including starter, target total hydration, flour held in starter and salt / total flour.","Enter starter hydration.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The split lets you weigh the starter and final ingredients without counting the same flour or water twice.","check":"Prefermented flour percentage is not starter mass percentage. A formula that already has too much starter water is rejected.","faq":[{"q":"Why can a requested formula be rejected?","a":"A starter amount may already contribute more water than the target allows. Change the formula rather than treating a negative remaining quantity as an ingredient."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sourdough Recipe Calculator?","a":"Check Total flour including starter, Target total hydration, Flour held in starter and Salt / total flour. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_preferment","name":"Preferment Calculator","description":"Divide an entered flour and water formula into preferment and final mix.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/preferment-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_preferment/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_preferment.md","page_id":99,"shortcode":"whatson_preferment_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Whole formula","label":"Total flour","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Whole formula","label":"Overall water / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Whole formula","label":"Salt / total flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Preferment formula","label":"Prefermented flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Preferment formula","label":"Preferment water / flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Preferment formula","label":"Yeast / preferment flour","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Yeast applies only to preferment flour in this worksheet. No further final mix yeast is inferred and no fermentation schedule is supplied.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A preferment moves part of the recipe's flour and water into an earlier mix. The final dough still needs a balanced ingredient total.","Set the preferment share and hydration, then inspect the ingredients left for the final mix. Apply the entered yeast rate on its stated flour basis."],"steps":["Enter total flour, overall water / flour and salt / total flour.","Enter prefermented flour, preferment water / flour and yeast / preferment flour.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The division keeps the earlier mix visible while preserving the overall flour and water plan.","check":"Yeast applies only to preferment flour in this worksheet. No further final mix yeast is inferred and no fermentation schedule is supplied.","faq":[{"q":"Is additional final mix yeast supplied?","a":"No. The worksheet calculates yeast for preferment flour only. Enter any further recipe requirement separately."},{"q":"What should I check before using Preferment Calculator?","a":"Check Total flour, Overall water / flour, Salt / total flour and Prefermented flour. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_portions","name":"Dough Portion Calculator","description":"Divide available dough by desired count or target ball weight.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/portions-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_portions/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_portions.md","page_id":100,"shortcode":"whatson_dough_portion_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Available dough","label":"Total dough","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Available dough","label":"Handling loss","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99,"integer":false},{"group":"Portion choice","label":"Divide by","type":"select","choices":{"count":"Number of equal portions","weight":"Target mass per portion"}},{"group":"Portion choice","label":"Desired portions","type":"number","unit":"portions","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Portion choice","label":"Target ball mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Loss is deducted once. Target weight mode rounds down to complete portions and shows remaining dough.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Available dough does not always divide neatly into the portion weight you want. The remainder should stay visible.","Choose a count or target ball weight and deduct any intended loss allowance once. Compare complete portions with the dough left at the end."],"steps":["Enter total dough and handling loss.","Choose divide by. Enter desired portions and target ball mass.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Both portion modes help when you are planning from either a finished dough batch or a known serving count.","check":"Loss is deducted once. Target weight mode rounds down to complete portions and shows remaining dough.","faq":[{"q":"Does target weight mode round portions up?","a":"No. It counts complete portions and shows the remaining dough. A partial ball is not treated as a full serving."},{"q":"What should I check before using Dough Portion Calculator?","a":"Check Total dough, Handling loss, Divide by and Desired portions. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_rice","name":"Rice Portion Calculator","description":"Plan dry rice and compare an entered cooked yield and water ratio.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/rice-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_rice/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_rice.md","page_id":101,"shortcode":"whatson_rice_portion_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Portion plan","label":"People","type":"number","unit":"people","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Portion plan","label":"Dry rice per person","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your recipe assumptions","label":"Cooked mass / dry mass","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"","min":0.01,"max":20,"integer":false},{"group":"Your recipe assumptions","label":"Water volume / dry rice mass","type":"number","unit":"ml/g","help":"","min":0,"max":20,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Water ratio is a user entered recipe quantity. Rice variety, soaking and absorption or draining methods change the actual requirement.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A rice plan needs a dry portion basis before it can become a shopping quantity. Cooked yield is a separate assumption.","Enter the guest count, dry rice per person and your recipe's water ratio. Compare the expected cooked amount without treating it as a guaranteed batch yield."],"steps":["Enter people and dry rice per person.","Enter cooked mass / dry mass and water volume / dry rice mass.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate dry rice, water and cooked yield keep the purchase quantity clear when rice varieties or methods change.","check":"Water ratio is a user entered recipe quantity. Rice variety, soaking and absorption or draining methods change the actual requirement.","faq":[{"q":"Will the water ratio suit every rice variety?","a":"No. Soaking, absorption and draining methods matter. Use a ratio appropriate to your own recipe."},{"q":"What should I check before using Rice Portion Calculator?","a":"Check People, Dry rice per person, Cooked mass / dry mass and Water volume / dry rice mass. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_daal","name":"Daal Portion Calculator","description":"Plan dry lentils and water from your preferred per person quantities.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/daal-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_daal/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_daal.md","page_id":102,"shortcode":"whatson_daal_portion_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Servings","label":"People","type":"number","unit":"people","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Servings","label":"Dry daal per person","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Recipe ratios","label":"Water volume / dry daal mass","type":"number","unit":"ml/g","help":"","min":0,"max":30,"integer":false},{"group":"Recipe ratios","label":"Measured cooked mass / dry mass","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"","min":0.01,"max":30,"integer":false}],"limitations":"This is a quantity worksheet. Lentil type, soaking, consistency and cooking method are not chosen by the calculator.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Daal portions depend on the dry lentil quantity and the consistency you prefer after cooking.","Choose your per person basis, guest count and water quantity. Keep tarka and other additions in a separate ingredient plan."],"steps":["Enter people and dry daal per person.","Enter water volume / dry daal mass and measured cooked mass / dry mass.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The portion worksheet lets you resize your own daal batch without imposing a lentil variety or cooking method.","check":"This is a quantity worksheet. Lentil type, soaking, consistency and cooking method are not chosen by the calculator.","faq":[{"q":"Does the calculator choose the water for my lentil type?","a":"No. Water is an entered recipe quantity. Match it to the lentil, soaking and cooking method you use."},{"q":"What should I check before using Daal Portion Calculator?","a":"Check People, Dry daal per person, Water volume / dry daal mass and Measured cooked mass / dry mass. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_biryani","name":"Biryani Batch Planner","description":"Build an ingredient purchase list from editable per person quantities.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/biryani-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_biryani/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_biryani.md","page_id":103,"shortcode":"whatson_biryani_batch_planner","inputs":[{"group":"Guests","label":"People","type":"number","unit":"people","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Your quantities per person","label":"Dry rice","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your quantities per person","label":"Raw protein purchase mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your quantities per person","label":"Potatoes","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your quantities per person","label":"Onions","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your quantities per person","label":"Yogurt","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your quantities per person","label":"Oil","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Extra portions","label":"Extra ingredient allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Starting quantities are editable planning examples, not a complete biryani recipe. Raw protein includes only the purchase basis you enter; no cooked edible yield is inferred.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A biryani shopping list is clearer when each ingredient has an explicit quantity per guest.","Set the guest count and edit the rice, protein and other ingredient amounts to match your recipe. Check the purchase basis before applying an extra allowance."],"steps":["Enter people.","Enter dry rice, raw protein purchase mass, potatoes, onions, yogurt and oil.","Enter extra ingredient allowance.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Editable ingredient rows let you compare batch sizes without treating one example formula as the right recipe for every event.","check":"Starting quantities are editable planning examples, not a complete biryani recipe. Raw protein includes only the purchase basis you enter; no cooked edible yield is inferred.","faq":[{"q":"Is the protein amount a cooked edible yield?","a":"No. It follows the raw purchase basis you enter. Bone, trimming and cooking losses need separate consideration."},{"q":"What should I check before using Biryani Batch Planner?","a":"Check People, Dry rice, Raw protein purchase mass and Potatoes. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_tea","name":"Chai Batch Calculator","description":"Plan milk, water, tea and sugar for your chosen serving cup.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/tea-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_tea/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_tea.md","page_id":104,"shortcode":"whatson_chai_batch_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Servings","label":"Cups","type":"number","unit":"cups","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Servings","label":"Finished drink per cup","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your chai formula","label":"Milk share of finished volume","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your chai formula","label":"Water evaporation allowance per cup","type":"number","unit":"ml","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your chai formula","label":"Tea leaves per cup","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your chai formula","label":"Sugar per cup","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Evaporation allowance is added to water only. Finished volume is a planning target, not a guarantee of yield or brew strength.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Chai cup size matters when a small household recipe becomes a larger serving batch.","Enter the finished cup target, milk share and flavour quantities you want. Review the added water allowance without assuming it guarantees the exact final yield."],"steps":["Enter cups and finished drink per cup.","Enter milk share of finished volume, water evaporation allowance per cup, tea leaves per cup and sugar per cup.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The cup based plan connects the batch to your intended servings instead of starting with an unexplained pot of water.","check":"Evaporation allowance is added to water only. Finished volume is a planning target, not a guarantee of yield or brew strength.","faq":[{"q":"Where is the evaporation allowance applied?","a":"It is added to water only. Milk and flavour quantities remain on their entered serving basis."},{"q":"What should I check before using Chai Batch Calculator?","a":"Check Cups, Finished drink per cup, Milk share of finished volume and Water evaporation allowance per cup. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_spice","name":"Spice Mix Scaler","description":"Scale your spice blend to a target total mass while keeping its proportions.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/spice-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_spice/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_spice.md","page_id":105,"shortcode":"whatson_spice_mix_scaler","inputs":[{"group":"Blend size","label":"Target blend","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your blend parts","label":"Spice","type":"text"},{"group":"Your blend parts","label":"Weight parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Parts are weight ratios, not spoon counts. Enter your own blend; the example is not a complete masala recipe.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A spice blend can be resized without changing the relationship between its ingredients when the parts are measured by weight.","Enter your blend ratios and the target total mass. Check that the resulting ingredient weights match the batch you intend to store or use."],"steps":["Enter target blend.","Add the entries in your blend parts as separate rows. Include spice and weight parts for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Weight based parts make a blend easier to reproduce than mixing spoon counts from ingredients with different densities.","check":"Parts are weight ratios, not spoon counts. Enter your own blend; the example is not a complete masala recipe.","faq":[{"q":"Can the parts be teaspoon counts?","a":"The calculation treats parts as weight ratios. Convert or weigh spoon quantities before using them as mass based proportions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Spice Mix Scaler?","a":"Check Target blend, Spice and Weight parts. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_egg","name":"Egg Portion Converter","description":"Convert edible egg quantities to grams for partial recipe portions.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/egg-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_egg/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_egg.md","page_id":106,"shortcode":"whatson_egg_portion_converter","inputs":[{"group":"Egg basis","label":"Portion","type":"select","choices":{"whole":"Whole edible egg","white":"White only","yolk":"Yolk only"}},{"group":"Egg basis","label":"Input quantity","type":"select","choices":{"count":"Number of portions","grams":"Edible grams"}},{"group":"Egg basis","label":"Amount","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured mass per portion","label":"Whole edible egg","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured mass per portion","label":"One white","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured mass per portion","label":"One yolk","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Default masses are illustrative and exclude shell. Weigh your own eggs; the whole, white and yolk references are independent estimates.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A fraction of an egg is easier to measure in grams than by eye. Whole eggs, whites and yolks need separate weight references.","Choose the edible portion type and a suitable reference mass. Weigh your own ingredient when the recipe needs close control."],"steps":["Choose portion and input quantity. Enter amount.","Enter whole edible egg, one white and one yolk.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate portion references help you scale a small batch without assuming every egg has the same edible mass.","check":"Default masses are illustrative and exclude shell. Weigh your own eggs; the whole, white and yolk references are independent estimates.","faq":[{"q":"Is shell weight included?","a":"No. The references describe edible portions. Use the weighed egg contents when precision matters."},{"q":"What should I check before using Egg Portion Converter?","a":"Check Portion, Input quantity, Amount and Whole edible egg. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_fat","name":"Butter and Oil Fat Equivalent","description":"Compare masses by entered fat content and show the nonfat difference.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/fat-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_fat/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_fat.md","page_id":107,"shortcode":"whatson_butter_oil_fat_equivalent","inputs":[{"group":"Original ingredient","label":"Original mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Original ingredient","label":"Original fat content","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Replacement ingredient","label":"Replacement fat content","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Matching fat mass is not a guaranteed baking substitution. Nonfat material is not automatically water, and texture and emulsification can differ.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Butter and oil contain different shares of fat. Matching fat mass can reveal why equal ingredient weights are not always equivalent.","Enter both fat percentages and compare the masses needed to match the fat amount. Review the nonfat difference before changing the recipe."],"steps":["Enter original mass and original fat content.","Enter replacement fat content.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The comparison keeps fat content separate from ingredient mass, giving you a clearer basis for evaluating a substitution.","check":"Matching fat mass is not a guaranteed baking substitution. Nonfat material is not automatically water, and texture and emulsification can differ.","faq":[{"q":"Does matching fat guarantee the same baking result?","a":"No. Water content, emulsification and texture may differ. Treat the result as a mass comparison rather than a complete substitution rule."},{"q":"What should I check before using Butter and Oil Fat Equivalent?","a":"Check Original mass, Original fat content and Replacement fat content. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_chocolate","name":"Chocolate Blend Calculator","description":"Blend two labelled cocoa percentages to a target weighted percentage.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/chocolate-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_chocolate/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_chocolate.md","page_id":108,"shortcode":"whatson_chocolate_blend_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Batch","label":"Total chocolate","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Batch","label":"Target cocoa content","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Available chocolate","label":"Chocolate A cocoa content","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Available chocolate","label":"Chocolate B cocoa content","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"This is a weighted label percentage, not a guarantee of flavour, viscosity or cocoa butter content. The target must lie between the two inputs.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Blending chocolates by labelled cocoa percentage is a weighted calculation. The target needs to sit between the two input percentages.","Enter the labels, intended blend weight and target percentage. Check the separate chocolate weights before combining them."],"steps":["Enter total chocolate and target cocoa content.","Enter chocolate A cocoa content and chocolate B cocoa content.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation makes the blend proportions explicit when you are working with two available chocolates.","check":"This is a weighted label percentage, not a guarantee of flavour, viscosity or cocoa butter content. The target must lie between the two inputs.","faq":[{"q":"Does the cocoa percentage predict flavour or viscosity?","a":"No. Sugar, cocoa butter and formulation also matter. The tool balances labelled percentages only."},{"q":"What should I check before using Chocolate Blend Calculator?","a":"Check Total chocolate, Target cocoa content, Chocolate A cocoa content and Chocolate B cocoa content. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_ganache","name":"Ganache Ratio Calculator","description":"Split a target batch into chocolate and cream using your own ratio.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/ganache-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_ganache/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_ganache.md","page_id":109,"shortcode":"whatson_ganache_ratio_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Target mass","label":"Total ganache ingredients","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Mass ratio","label":"Chocolate parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Mass ratio","label":"Cream parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"The ratio is an input, not a recommendation for every chocolate or use. Cooking loss and texture are not predicted.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A ganache batch can be divided into chocolate and cream once you have chosen a ratio appropriate to its use.","Enter the desired total mass and your own ratio. Review the two ingredient weights before preparing the mixture."],"steps":["Enter total ganache ingredients.","Enter chocolate parts and cream parts.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The batch split avoids repeatedly recalculating the same ratio when you need a different filling or coating quantity.","check":"The ratio is an input, not a recommendation for every chocolate or use. Cooking loss and texture are not predicted.","faq":[{"q":"Is the ratio suitable for every chocolate?","a":"No. Chocolate type and intended texture affect the choice. Use a recipe ratio that suits your ingredients."},{"q":"What should I check before using Ganache Ratio Calculator?","a":"Check Total ganache ingredients, Chocolate parts and Cream parts. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_syrup","name":"Sugar Syrup Ratio Calculator","description":"Plan sugar and water masses for an entered sugar fraction.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/syrup-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_syrup/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_syrup.md","page_id":110,"shortcode":"whatson_sugar_syrup_ratio_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Final composition target","label":"Target total mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Final composition target","label":"Sugar fraction by mass","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"This is a sugar and water mass balance before any unmeasured cooking loss. It does not predict solubility, boiling temperature, storage life or a measured Brix reading.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Sugar syrup planning starts with the masses of sugar and water before any unmeasured cooking loss.","Enter the batch size and intended sugar fraction, then compare the two starting quantities. Keep a measured concentration separate from this ingredient balance."],"steps":["Enter target total mass and sugar fraction by mass.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The mass basis makes it easier to resize a starting syrup mixture without confusing a weight fraction with a volume ratio.","check":"This is a sugar and water mass balance before any unmeasured cooking loss. It does not predict solubility, boiling temperature, storage life or a measured Brix reading.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a measured Brix reading?","a":"No. It is a sugar and water mass calculation. Cooking loss and measurement conditions can change the finished concentration."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sugar Syrup Ratio Calculator?","a":"Check Target total mass and Sugar fraction by mass. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_cost","name":"Recipe Cost Calculator","description":"Cost ingredient usage and distinguish it from buying whole packs.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/cost-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_cost/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_cost.md","page_id":111,"shortcode":"whatson_recipe_cost_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Batch portions","label":"Finished portions","type":"number","unit":"portions","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Other batch costs","label":"Labour","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other batch costs","label":"Energy","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other batch costs","label":"Other batch costs","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient usage and pack quotes","label":"Ingredient","type":"text"},{"group":"Ingredient usage and pack quotes","label":"Used amount","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient usage and pack quotes","label":"Used unit","type":"select","choices":{"g":"Grams","kg":"Kilograms","oz":"Ounces by weight","lb":"Pounds by weight","ml":"Millilitres","litre":"Litres","piece":"Pieces"}},{"group":"Ingredient usage and pack quotes","label":"Pack amount","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredient usage and pack quotes","label":"Pack unit","type":"select","choices":{"g":"Grams","kg":"Kilograms","oz":"Ounces by weight","lb":"Pounds by weight","ml":"Millilitres","litre":"Litres","piece":"Pieces"}},{"group":"Ingredient usage and pack quotes","label":"Pack price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Usage cost allocates a fraction of each pack. Buying whole packs is shown separately and assumes no stock on hand. Mass and volume units cannot be mixed on one line.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A recipe uses part of a pack, but the shop may require you to buy the whole pack. Those costs answer different questions.","Enter pack prices and ingredient usage on matching units. Compare the allocated recipe cost with the separate whole pack purchase requirement."],"steps":["Enter finished portions.","Enter labour, energy and other batch costs.","Add the entries in ingredient usage and pack quotes as separate rows. Include ingredient, used amount, used unit, pack amount, pack unit and pack price for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Showing both figures helps distinguish batch costing from the cash needed for a fresh shopping trip.","check":"Usage cost allocates a fraction of each pack. Buying whole packs is shown separately and assumes no stock on hand. Mass and volume units cannot be mixed on one line.","faq":[{"q":"Can I mix grams and millilitres on one row?","a":"Not without an appropriate ingredient conversion. Keep usage and pack quantities on the same mass or volume basis."},{"q":"What should I check before using Recipe Cost Calculator?","a":"Check Finished portions, Labour, Energy and Other batch costs. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_pricing","name":"Bakery Pricing Calculator","description":"Calculate a price from entered batch costs, saleable yield and margin.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/pricing-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_pricing/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_pricing.md","page_id":112,"shortcode":"whatson_bakery_pricing_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Batch costs","label":"Production batch cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Batch costs","label":"Produced units","type":"number","unit":"units","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Batch costs","label":"Unsaleable units","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99,"integer":false},{"group":"Batch costs","label":"Extra batch overhead","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Batch costs","label":"Packaging per saleable unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Selling model","label":"Target contribution margin on price","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":95,"integer":false},{"group":"Selling model","label":"Selling fee on price","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":95,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Margin is a share of selling price, not markup. Unsaleable units round up. Costs already in the batch figure must not be entered again as overhead. Rates are your inputs, not financial advice.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A bakery selling price needs saleable portions, not just the number originally planned. Spoilage and included overhead affect the cost per unit.","Enter the batch cost, expected saleable yield and target margin. Keep costs already included in the batch out of the additional overhead."],"steps":["Enter production batch cost, produced units, unsaleable units, extra batch overhead and packaging per saleable unit.","Enter target contribution margin on price and selling fee on price.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation links the selling price to usable output and keeps margin separate from markup.","check":"Margin is a share of selling price, not markup. Unsaleable units round up. Costs already in the batch figure must not be entered again as overhead. Rates are your inputs, not financial advice.","faq":[{"q":"Is margin the same as markup?","a":"No. Margin is profit as a share of selling price. Markup is measured against cost."},{"q":"What should I check before using Bakery Pricing Calculator?","a":"Check Production batch cost, Produced units, Unsaleable units and Extra batch overhead. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_yield","name":"Cooking Yield Calculator","description":"Compare measured raw and cooked masses and scale a target cooked amount.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/yield-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_yield/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_yield.md","page_id":113,"shortcode":"whatson_cooking_yield_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Measured batch","label":"Raw input mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured batch","label":"Cooked output mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Next batch target","label":"Desired cooked mass","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use the same ingredient and measurement basis. This extrapolates your measured yield; it does not predict every future batch.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Measured cooking yield records what happened to a particular batch. It is more useful than assuming every ingredient loses the same weight.","Enter matching raw and cooked measurements, then use the observed ratio for your target. Review the method before applying it to a different batch."],"steps":["Enter raw input mass and cooked output mass.","Enter desired cooked mass.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The measured basis helps you plan quantities from your own cooking records instead of an unexplained yield percentage.","check":"Use the same ingredient and measurement basis. This extrapolates your measured yield; it does not predict every future batch.","faq":[{"q":"Will the same yield occur every time?","a":"Not necessarily. Ingredient condition and cooking method can change it. Recheck the ratio when the process changes."},{"q":"What should I check before using Cooking Yield Calculator?","a":"Check Raw input mass, Cooked output mass and Desired cooked mass. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_shopping","name":"Recipe Shopping List Planner","description":"Subtract pantry stock and round the remaining purchase to whole packs.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/shopping-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_shopping/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_shopping.md","page_id":114,"shortcode":"whatson_recipe_shopping_list_planner","inputs":[{"group":"Recipe batches","label":"Batches to prepare","type":"number","unit":"batches","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredients and pantry stock","label":"Ingredient","type":"text"},{"group":"Ingredients and pantry stock","label":"One shared unit","type":"text"},{"group":"Ingredients and pantry stock","label":"Needed per batch","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredients and pantry stock","label":"Stock on hand","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredients and pantry stock","label":"Pack size","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Ingredients and pantry stock","label":"Price per pack","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"Optional. Use your own quote; no live prices are supplied.","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Every quantity in a row must share the written unit. Ingredients in different rows are not automatically merged.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["A recipe shopping list should start with what is already in the pantry. Pack rounding belongs after that stock deduction.","Enter required amounts, available stock and pack sizes using one written unit per row. Review the remaining quantities before buying."],"steps":["Enter batches to prepare.","Add the entries in ingredients and pantry stock as separate rows. Include ingredient, one shared unit, needed per batch, stock on hand, pack size and price per pack for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Whole pack quantities turn a recipe requirement into a practical purchase list while keeping unused stock visible.","check":"Every quantity in a row must share the written unit. Ingredients in different rows are not automatically merged.","faq":[{"q":"Are repeated ingredient rows merged automatically?","a":"No. Review duplicate rows yourself. Otherwise the same pantry stock could be deducted against several entries."},{"q":"What should I check before using Recipe Shopping List Planner?","a":"Check Batches to prepare, Ingredient, One shared unit and Needed per batch. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"cooking_cupcake","name":"Muffin and Cupcake Batch Calculator","description":"Work out full portions, tray rounds and leftover weighed batter.","category":"Cooking & Baking","category_id":"cooking","url":"https://whatson.pk/cupcake-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_cupcake/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/cooking_cupcake.md","page_id":115,"shortcode":"whatson_muffin_cupcake_batch_calculator","inputs":[{"group":"Available batter","label":"Total batter","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Available batter","label":"Handling loss","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99,"integer":false},{"group":"Portions and equipment","label":"Batter per cavity","type":"number","unit":"g","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Portions and equipment","label":"Cavities per tray","type":"number","unit":"cavities","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Portions and equipment","label":"Trays available per round","type":"number","unit":"trays","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Portions use weighed batter, not cavity volume. The chosen mass must suit your pan and recipe. No bake time, rise or doneness is predicted.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T16:12:30+00:00","intro":["Muffin and cupcake batches are easier to divide when the batter portions are weighed consistently.","Enter total batter, portion mass and tray capacity. Compare complete portions, tray rounds and the batter remaining at the end."],"steps":["Enter total batter and handling loss.","Enter batter per cavity, cavities per tray and trays available per round.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The portion count connects a weighed batch to the available pans without pretending every cavity has the same fill capacity.","check":"Portions use weighed batter, not cavity volume. The chosen mass must suit your pan and recipe. No bake time, rise or doneness is predicted.","faq":[{"q":"Does it predict rise or baking time?","a":"No. Portion weight must suit the pan and recipe. Check rise and doneness through the actual baking method."},{"q":"What should I check before using Muffin and Cupcake Batch Calculator?","a":"Check Total batter, Handling loss, Batter per cavity and Cavities per tray. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_margin","name":"Profit Margin Calculator","description":"Separate the share of sales kept as profit from the markup on entered cost.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/margin-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_margin/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_margin.md","page_id":150,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_margin","inputs":[{"group":"Sales and included cost","label":"Selling price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Sales and included cost","label":"Included cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Profit here is selling price minus the cost you entered. Unentered shipping, fees, tax or overhead are not included.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A profitable sale and a high margin are not the same description. Margin measures how much of the selling price remains after included cost.","Enter the price and all costs you want compared. Read margin alongside markup before using either percentage in a pricing discussion."],"steps":["Enter selling price and included cost.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Both percentages use the same sale figures, making the difference between their denominators easy to see.","check":"Profit here is selling price minus the cost you entered. Unentered shipping, fees, tax or overhead are not included.","faq":[{"q":"Are unentered delivery charges included?","a":"No. Add delivery, platform charges or other expenses to the included cost if you want them reflected in this comparison."},{"q":"What should I check before using Profit Margin Calculator?","a":"Check Selling price and Included cost. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_markup","name":"Markup Calculator","description":"Build a price from cost and markup, then read the resulting margin.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/markup-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_markup/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_markup.md","page_id":151,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_markup","inputs":[{"group":"Cost based pricing","label":"Included unit cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Cost based pricing","label":"Markup on cost","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":10000}],"limitations":"Markup uses cost as its denominator; margin uses selling price. Add all relevant costs before interpreting profit.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Markup starts from cost and adds a chosen percentage to produce a selling price.","Use a cost figure that matches the sale scope. The resulting margin can differ noticeably from the markup you entered."],"steps":["Enter included unit cost and markup on cost.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The price and resulting margin stay together, useful when comparing a supplier cost with a retail pricing target.","check":"Markup uses cost as its denominator; margin uses selling price. Add all relevant costs before interpreting profit.","faq":[{"q":"Will a 25% markup give a 25% margin?","a":"No. Markup divides by cost, while margin divides by selling price. The percentages use different bases."},{"q":"What should I check before using Markup Calculator?","a":"Check Included unit cost and Markup on cost. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_price","name":"Target Selling Price Calculator","description":"Solve a price after per order costs, sales based fees and a target margin.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/price-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_price/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_price.md","page_id":152,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_price","inputs":[{"group":"Unit and order costs","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Unit and order costs","label":"Packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Unit and order costs","label":"Seller shipping expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Unit and order costs","label":"Ad allocation","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Unit and order costs","label":"Other included cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Targets and deductions","label":"Fee on selling price","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Targets and deductions","label":"Fixed selling fee","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Targets and deductions","label":"Target margin","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":99.99}],"limitations":"The target margin is before unentered costs and tax. All percentage fees use the solved selling price; no separate shipping receipt is assumed.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A target price needs room for costs and charges that rise with the sale amount.","Enter order costs, percentage fees and the margin you want to retain. Review the solved price against your actual selling arrangement."],"steps":["Enter product cost, packaging, seller shipping expense, ad allocation and other included cost.","Enter fee on selling price, fixed selling fee and target margin.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Revenue based fees are included in the price equation instead of being subtracted only after a price is guessed.","check":"The target margin is before unentered costs and tax. All percentage fees use the solved selling price; no separate shipping receipt is assumed.","faq":[{"q":"Does it assume a separate shipping receipt?","a":"No. The calculation uses the stated sale basis. Include costs and fees on that basis rather than adding an unstated receipt."},{"q":"What should I check before using Target Selling Price Calculator?","a":"Check Product cost, Packaging, Seller shipping expense and Ad allocation. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_discount","name":"Discount Price & Profit Calculator","description":"Compare the original price with a percent or fixed coupon after entered costs.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/discount-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_discount/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_discount.md","page_id":153,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_discount","inputs":[{"group":"Offer","label":"Original selling price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Offer","label":"Discount format","type":"select","choices":{"percent":"Percentage off","fixed":"Fixed PKR off"}},{"group":"Offer","label":"Percentage off","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Offer","label":"Amount off","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Included deductions","label":"Total included cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Included deductions","label":"Fee on discounted price","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"Discount cannot exceed the original price. Costs outside the entered total are excluded; a loss is shown without being hidden.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A coupon can reduce the selling price faster than it reduces the seller's costs.","Compare the original price with a fixed or percentage discount, then inspect the profit left after entered costs."],"steps":["Choose discount format. Enter original selling price, percentage off and amount off.","Enter total included cost and fee on discounted price.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The comparison exposes the cost of the promotion and keeps a loss visible instead of hiding it behind the discount percentage.","check":"Discount cannot exceed the original price. Costs outside the entered total are excluded; a loss is shown without being hidden.","faq":[{"q":"Can the discount exceed the original price?","a":"No. A price reduction cannot create a valid negative sale amount in this worksheet."},{"q":"What should I check before using Discount Price & Profit Calculator?","a":"Check Original selling price, Discount format, Percentage off and Amount off. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_fees","name":"Marketplace Fee Calculator","description":"Build a fee schedule with different receipt bases and fixed amounts.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/fees-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_fees/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_fees.md","page_id":154,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_fees","inputs":[{"group":"Receipts","label":"Item revenue after discounts","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Receipts","label":"Shipping collected","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered deduction lines","label":"Fee name","type":"text"},{"group":"Entered deduction lines","label":"Percentage base","type":"select","choices":{"items":"Item revenue","order":"Items plus shipping"}},{"group":"Entered deduction lines","label":"Percentage rate","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Entered deduction lines","label":"Fixed fee","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered deduction lines","label":"Tax on this fee","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"Fee tax is applied to each entered fee, not to the order revenue. Rates and base choices must match your own statement.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Marketplace deductions can use different receipt bases. One flat percentage may miss charges on delivery or other collected amounts.","Build the fee schedule from your statement, including fixed fees and any tax on those fees. Check the base used for every row."],"steps":["Enter item revenue after discounts and shipping collected.","Add the entries in entered deduction lines as separate rows. Include fee name, percentage base, percentage rate, fixed fee and tax on this fee for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate fee rows let you compare the arithmetic with the actual settlement statement.","check":"Fee tax is applied to each entered fee, not to the order revenue. Rates and base choices must match your own statement.","faq":[{"q":"Is fee tax applied to all order revenue?","a":"No. It is applied to each entered fee. Confirm the treatment against the statement you are modelling."},{"q":"What should I check before using Marketplace Fee Calculator?","a":"Check Item revenue after discounts, Shipping collected, Fee name and Percentage base. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_daraz","name":"Daraz Order Profit Calculator","description":"Model entered Daraz fees, credited receipts and the difference between profit and cash settlement.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/daraz-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_daraz/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_daraz.md","page_id":155,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_daraz","inputs":[{"group":"Order receipts","label":"Listed item price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Order receipts","label":"Seller funded item discount","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Order receipts","label":"Shipping credited to seller","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Order receipts","label":"Other platform credit actually received","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Seller costs","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Seller costs","label":"Packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Seller costs","label":"Seller shipping expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Seller costs","label":"Ad allocation","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Seller costs","label":"Other expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Percentage fee base","type":"select","choices":{"listed":"Listed item price","items":"Item price after seller discount","order":"Net item plus credited shipping"}},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Commission","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Other service rate","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Payment rate","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Fixed fees","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Tax on entered fees","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Withholding on credited receipts","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Your statement rates","label":"Courier expense paid","type":"select","choices":{"separate":"Separately outside this payout","deducted":"Deducted from the payout"}}],"limitations":"This configurable statement model is not the Daraz fee schedule. Courier deduction changes payout, not its one-time profit expense. Withholding is separate; its final or adjustable treatment is not inferred.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["The amount settled for a Daraz order can differ from its profit. Some deductions affect cash timing or payout presentation.","Use the fees and credited receipts from your own statement. Keep courier expense, withholding and cash deductions on their proper lines."],"steps":["Enter listed item price, seller funded item discount, shipping credited to seller and other platform credit actually received.","Enter product cost, packaging, seller shipping expense, ad allocation and other expense.","Choose percentage fee base and courier expense paid. Enter commission, other service rate, payment rate, fixed fees, tax on entered fees and withholding on credited receipts.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A separate payout view makes it easier to reconcile cash without charging the same courier expense twice.","check":"This configurable statement model is not the Daraz fee schedule. Courier deduction changes payout, not its one-time profit expense. Withholding is separate; its final or adjustable treatment is not inferred.","faq":[{"q":"Are Daraz commission rates supplied automatically?","a":"No. This is an editable statement model. Enter the rates and bases applicable to your order."},{"q":"What should I check before using Daraz Order Profit Calculator?","a":"Check Listed item price, Seller funded item discount, Shipping credited to seller and Other platform credit actually received. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_cod","name":"COD Order Profit Calculator","description":"Check a delivered cash on delivery order, collection charges and the payout deduction.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/cod-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_cod/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_cod.md","page_id":156,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_cod","inputs":[{"group":"Delivered order receipts","label":"Item amount collected","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Delivered order receipts","label":"Delivery charge collected","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Product and fulfillment","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Product and fulfillment","label":"Packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Product and fulfillment","label":"Outward courier cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Product and fulfillment","label":"Ad allocation","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Product and fulfillment","label":"Other expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Collection deductions","label":"COD rate on total collected","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Collection deductions","label":"Fixed collection charge","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Collection deductions","label":"Withholding on collected amount","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Collection deductions","label":"Courier expense paid","type":"select","choices":{"separate":"Separately outside this payout","deducted":"Deducted from the payout"}}],"limitations":"Only a delivered order is modelled. Payout subtracts collection charges and withholding, plus courier cost when selected as deducted. Profit subtracts seller costs once. Failed dispatches belong in the RTO tool.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A delivered COD order has both seller profit and a courier payout to check.","Enter the collected amount and seller costs, then mark deductions as they appear in the payout. Review the two totals separately."],"steps":["Enter item amount collected and delivery charge collected.","Enter product cost, packaging, outward courier cost, ad allocation and other expense.","Choose courier expense paid. Enter COD rate on total collected, fixed collection charge and withholding on collected amount.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation keeps collection charges and courier deductions visible without treating the payout as the seller's full profit.","check":"Only a delivered order is modelled. Payout subtracts collection charges and withholding, plus courier cost when selected as deducted. Profit subtracts seller costs once. Failed dispatches belong in the RTO tool.","faq":[{"q":"Can it model a failed delivery?","a":"This worksheet covers a delivered order. Use the RTO calculation for expected losses on unsuccessful dispatches."},{"q":"What should I check before using COD Order Profit Calculator?","a":"Check Item amount collected, Delivery charge collected, Product cost and Packaging. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_payment","name":"Payment Gateway Fee Calculator","description":"Calculate fee deductions from a charge or solve the charge needed for a target payout.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/payment-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_payment/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_payment.md","page_id":157,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_payment","inputs":[{"group":"Charge direction","label":"Known amount","type":"select","choices":{"gross":"Customer charge is known","net":"Required net receipt is known"}},{"group":"Charge direction","label":"Known charge or required net","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered gateway schedule","label":"Transaction rate","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Entered gateway schedule","label":"Fixed transaction fee","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered gateway schedule","label":"Tax on gateway fee","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"Tax is applied to the entered gateway fee. The solved amount can be negative net for a small charge; it is not a guarantee that a provider accepts that charge.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Gateway fees reduce the received amount, and a fixed charge can matter greatly on a small payment.","Choose whether you want the net payout from a charge or the charge needed for a target payout. Use your provider's actual fee terms."],"steps":["Choose known amount. Enter known charge or required net.","Enter transaction rate, fixed transaction fee and tax on gateway fee.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The two directions help compare a customer charge with the cash you intend to receive.","check":"Tax is applied to the entered gateway fee. The solved amount can be negative net for a small charge; it is not a guarantee that a provider accepts that charge.","faq":[{"q":"Does fee tax apply directly to the payment?","a":"The entered tax applies to the gateway fee in this model. Match the inputs to your provider statement."},{"q":"What should I check before using Payment Gateway Fee Calculator?","a":"Check Known amount, Known charge or required net, Transaction rate and Fixed transaction fee. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_courier","name":"Courier Volumetric Weight & Quote Calculator","description":"Compare actual and volumetric weight, then apply your entered billing steps and surcharges.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/courier-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_courier/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_courier.md","page_id":158,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_courier","inputs":[{"group":"Measured parcel","label":"Length","type":"number","unit":"cm","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Measured parcel","label":"Width","type":"number","unit":"cm","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Measured parcel","label":"Height","type":"number","unit":"cm","min":0.01,"max":1000},{"group":"Measured parcel","label":"Actual weight","type":"number","unit":"kg","min":0.001,"max":10000},{"group":"Measured parcel","label":"Volumetric divisor","type":"number","unit":"cm³/kg","min":1,"max":10000000},{"group":"Your quote structure","label":"Weight covered by base","type":"number","unit":"kg","min":0.001,"max":10000},{"group":"Your quote structure","label":"Base quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Your quote structure","label":"Additional billing step","type":"number","unit":"kg","min":0.001,"max":10000},{"group":"Your quote structure","label":"Quote per extra step","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Your quote structure","label":"Fuel surcharge on base plus steps","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Your quote structure","label":"Tax after fuel surcharge","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"The 5000 divisor and billing steps are editable examples, not a carrier tariff. Rounding applies only beyond the base weight. Remote area, COD and other charges require separate accounting.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A light parcel can be billed by its size rather than its scale weight. That makes the package dimensions part of the quote.","Enter actual weight, dimensions and the carrier's divisor and billing steps. Add only the surcharges covered by the quotation."],"steps":["Enter length, width, height, actual weight and volumetric divisor.","Enter weight covered by base, base quote, additional billing step, quote per extra step, fuel surcharge on base plus steps and tax after fuel surcharge.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Actual and volumetric weights are shown on the same basis before the quoted billing rules are applied.","check":"The 5000 divisor and billing steps are editable examples, not a carrier tariff. Rounding applies only beyond the base weight. Remote area, COD and other charges require separate accounting.","faq":[{"q":"Is the example divisor a carrier tariff?","a":"No. Replace it and the billing steps with the figures in your courier agreement or current quote."},{"q":"What should I check before using Courier Volumetric Weight & Quote Calculator?","a":"Check Length, Width, Height and Actual weight. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_shipping","name":"Shipping Charge & Subsidy Calculator","description":"See what delivery collections cover after fees and solve a charge that covers the courier quote.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/shipping-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_shipping/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_shipping.md","page_id":159,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_shipping","inputs":[{"group":"Delivery charge economics","label":"Actual seller delivery cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Delivery charge economics","label":"Delivery charged to customer","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Delivery charge economics","label":"Fee on collected delivery charge","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":99.99}],"limitations":"This isolates delivery revenue and cost. Product profit, platform rules, tax and the commercial decision to offer free shipping are outside this calculation.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Charging the same amount as the courier quote may still leave a gap when fees apply to delivery collections.","Compare a proposed shipping charge with its net receipt after the entered fees. Inspect the subsidy before choosing a customer facing amount."],"steps":["Enter actual seller delivery cost, delivery charged to customer and fee on collected delivery charge.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Delivery revenue and delivery cost remain separate from product profit, making the funding gap easier to understand.","check":"This isolates delivery revenue and cost. Product profit, platform rules, tax and the commercial decision to offer free shipping are outside this calculation.","faq":[{"q":"Does a zero subsidy guarantee a profitable order?","a":"No. Product cost, advertising and other order expenses are outside this delivery only comparison."},{"q":"What should I check before using Shipping Charge & Subsidy Calculator?","a":"Check Actual seller delivery cost, Delivery charged to customer and Fee on collected delivery charge. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_rto","name":"COD RTO Expected Profit Calculator","description":"Combine a delivered order profit with the loss on failed dispatches.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/rto-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_rto/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_rto.md","page_id":160,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_rto","inputs":[{"group":"Dispatch forecast","label":"Orders dispatched","type":"number","unit":"orders","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Dispatch forecast","label":"Failed delivery / RTO share","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Dispatch forecast","label":"Profit per delivered order","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":-1000000000,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Outward courier cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Return courier cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Unrecovered packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Ad cost per failed dispatch","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Product acquisition cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Unrecoverable inventory share","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Loss on each failed dispatch","label":"Other failed dispatch cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Expected order counts may be fractional. A returned reusable product is not automatically treated as a full inventory loss. Delivered profit must already include its own ad and fulfillment costs.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Failed COD dispatches can consume the profit from delivered orders. A reusable returned item is not automatically a complete stock loss.","Enter delivered profit and the separate failed dispatch loss, then choose a delivery success assumption. Compare the expected batch contribution."],"steps":["Enter orders dispatched, failed delivery / RTO share and profit per delivered order.","Enter outward courier cost, return courier cost, unrecovered packaging, ad cost per failed dispatch, product acquisition cost, unrecoverable inventory share and other failed dispatch cost.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Different delivered and failed outcomes are kept separate instead of treating every dispatched parcel as a sale.","check":"Expected order counts may be fractional. A returned reusable product is not automatically treated as a full inventory loss. Delivered profit must already include its own ad and fulfillment costs.","faq":[{"q":"Can expected order counts be fractional?","a":"Yes. They represent an average scenario across the batch, not a promise about the exact number of future deliveries."},{"q":"What should I check before using COD RTO Expected Profit Calculator?","a":"Check Orders dispatched, Failed delivery / RTO share, Profit per delivered order and Outward courier cost. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_returns","name":"Refund & Return Loss Calculator","description":"Account for retained receipts, refunded fees and recovered stock without losing the return costs.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/returns-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_returns/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_returns.md","page_id":161,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_returns","inputs":[{"group":"Original receipts and refund","label":"Original item receipt","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Original receipts and refund","label":"Original delivery receipt","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Original receipts and refund","label":"Cash refund to customer","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Inventory cost recovered","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Original outward shipping","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Return shipping","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Packaging lost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Ad cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Original selling fees","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Fee refund received","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs and credits","label":"Other return expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Recovered inventory is a cost value credit, not cash received. Enter actual refund and fee credit amounts; the calculator does not decide a marketplace return policy.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A returned order can include a refund, fee credits and recovered inventory. Those pieces should not be collapsed into one cash figure.","Enter the actual amounts and return expenses. Value recovered stock at the relevant cost basis rather than as cash received."],"steps":["Enter original item receipt, original delivery receipt and cash refund to customer.","Enter product cost, inventory cost recovered, original outward shipping, return shipping, packaging lost, ad cost, original selling fees, fee refund received and other return expense.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The worksheet shows how retained receipts and inventory recovery offset some costs without erasing the return expense.","check":"Recovered inventory is a cost value credit, not cash received. Enter actual refund and fee credit amounts; the calculator does not decide a marketplace return policy.","faq":[{"q":"Is recovered inventory treated as a payout?","a":"No. It is a cost value credit. Receiving the product back does not mean the same value arrived in cash."},{"q":"What should I check before using Refund & Return Loss Calculator?","a":"Check Original item receipt, Original delivery receipt, Cash refund to customer and Product cost. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_roas","name":"ROAS & Ad Contribution Calculator","description":"Read ad revenue, included non ad costs and the spend available before contribution reaches zero.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/roas-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_roas/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_roas.md","page_id":162,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_roas","inputs":[{"group":"Campaign totals","label":"Attributed revenue","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Campaign totals","label":"Ad spend","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Campaign totals","label":"Attributed orders","type":"number","unit":"orders","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Campaign totals","label":"All included non ad costs","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Attribution is supplied by you. ROAS is revenue divided by spend; it is not profit or proof of incremental sales. Non ad costs must include the relevant fees and fulfillment.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["ROAS compares attributed revenue with ad spend. It does not say how much profit the campaign left.","Enter revenue, ad spend and relevant non ad costs. Compare the ratio with contribution before drawing conclusions about the campaign."],"steps":["Enter attributed revenue, ad spend, attributed orders and all included non ad costs.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The cost view helps explain why a revenue ratio can look attractive while the contribution is small.","check":"Attribution is supplied by you. ROAS is revenue divided by spend; it is not profit or proof of incremental sales. Non ad costs must include the relevant fees and fulfillment.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool prove the ads caused the sales?","a":"No. Attribution is your input. The arithmetic does not establish incremental sales or campaign causation."},{"q":"What should I check before using ROAS & Ad Contribution Calculator?","a":"Check Attributed revenue, Ad spend, Attributed orders and All included non ad costs. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_cpa","name":"Maximum CPA Calculator","description":"Find the ad cost headroom per sale after included costs and your target contribution.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/cpa-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_cpa/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_cpa.md","page_id":163,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_cpa","inputs":[{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Order revenue","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Net seller shipping expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Fee on order revenue","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Other non ad cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per order economics","label":"Target profit after ads","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Negative headroom means the chosen profit target is not met even before ads. This is a per order arithmetic ceiling, not a campaign performance forecast.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["An advertising allowance should start with what remains after the sale's other costs and your profit target.","Enter order economics and the contribution you want to protect. Compare the available ad headroom with your measured acquisition cost."],"steps":["Enter order revenue, product cost, packaging, net seller shipping expense, fee on order revenue, other non ad cost and target profit after ads.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A per sale ceiling makes the pricing constraint visible before an advertising budget is committed.","check":"Negative headroom means the chosen profit target is not met even before ads. This is a per order arithmetic ceiling, not a campaign performance forecast.","faq":[{"q":"What does negative headroom mean?","a":"The chosen contribution target is already missed before advertising. A zero ad spend would not repair that baseline."},{"q":"What should I check before using Maximum CPA Calculator?","a":"Check Order revenue, Product cost, Packaging and Net seller shipping expense. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_breakeven","name":"Break Even Sales Calculator","description":"Cover an entered fixed cost using contribution after per unit cost and percentage fees.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/breakeven-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_breakeven/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_breakeven.md","page_id":164,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_breakeven","inputs":[{"group":"Unit economics","label":"Unit selling price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Unit economics","label":"Included variable cost per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Unit economics","label":"Percentage fee on sales","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Period cost","label":"Fixed cost for the period","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Variable cost should include fulfillment and other per unit costs; do not count them again in fixed cost. A nonpositive contribution cannot provide a finite break even volume.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Fixed costs are covered by contribution from each sale, not by its full revenue.","Enter price, variable costs and percentage fees, then compare the contribution with your period's fixed expense."],"steps":["Enter unit selling price, included variable cost per unit and percentage fee on sales.","Enter fixed cost for the period.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation ties break even volume to the actual amount available per unit to cover fixed costs.","check":"Variable cost should include fulfillment and other per unit costs; do not count them again in fixed cost. A nonpositive contribution cannot provide a finite break even volume.","faq":[{"q":"Why might there be no finite break even quantity?","a":"If contribution is zero or negative, additional units cannot cover the fixed cost under the entered assumptions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Break Even Sales Calculator?","a":"Check Unit selling price, Included variable cost per unit, Percentage fee on sales and Fixed cost for the period. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_targetunits","name":"Target Profit Sales Calculator","description":"Solve complete sale units needed to cover fixed costs and reach a chosen period profit.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/targetunits-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_targetunits/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_targetunits.md","page_id":165,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_targetunits","inputs":[{"group":"Per unit contribution","label":"Selling price per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per unit contribution","label":"Included variable cost per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Per unit contribution","label":"Fee on sales","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Period target","label":"Period fixed cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Period target","label":"Profit target","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Units are rounded up. The projected profit only includes the costs entered, and assumes every counted unit sells at the stated price.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A period profit target needs enough sales to cover fixed costs before producing the extra amount you want.","Enter the unit economics and target profit, then review the rounded complete unit requirement."],"steps":["Enter selling price per unit, included variable cost per unit and fee on sales.","Enter period fixed cost and profit target.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Whole unit rounding turns the target into an actionable sales count without treating a fraction of an item as sold.","check":"Units are rounded up. The projected profit only includes the costs entered, and assumes every counted unit sells at the stated price.","faq":[{"q":"Is the result a demand forecast?","a":"No. It is the quantity required under the entered price and costs. It does not predict whether those units will sell."},{"q":"What should I check before using Target Profit Sales Calculator?","a":"Check Selling price per unit, Included variable cost per unit, Fee on sales and Period fixed cost. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_landed","name":"Landed Cost per Usable Unit Calculator","description":"Allocate purchase, exchange conversion and batch charges across usable units.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/landed-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_landed/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_landed.md","page_id":166,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_landed","inputs":[{"group":"Purchase and conversion","label":"Supplier invoice amount","type":"number","unit":"source currency","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Purchase and conversion","label":"Source currency label","type":"text"},{"group":"Purchase and conversion","label":"PKR per source currency unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR/unit","min":1.0e-6,"max":1000000},{"group":"Purchase and conversion","label":"Purchased units","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Purchase and conversion","label":"Unusable unit allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Entered batch charges in PKR","label":"Freight","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered batch charges in PKR","label":"Insurance","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered batch charges in PKR","label":"Entered duty and tax charges","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered batch charges in PKR","label":"Handling","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered batch charges in PKR","label":"Other landed expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Entered batch charges in PKR","label":"Salvage credit actually accounted for","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"This does not calculate statutory customs or tax rates. Invoice conversion uses your entered exchange quote; unusable whole units round up and credits must not exceed total cost.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["The useful cost per item depends on usable units after purchase charges and losses.","Enter invoice conversion and batch charges from your records, then deduct valid credits and account for unusable items."],"steps":["Enter supplier invoice amount, source currency label, PKR per source currency unit, purchased units and unusable unit allowance.","Enter freight, insurance, entered duty and tax charges, handling, other landed expense and salvage credit actually accounted for.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Spreading total cost across usable inventory avoids making damaged units disappear from the cost calculation.","check":"This does not calculate statutory customs or tax rates. Invoice conversion uses your entered exchange quote; unusable whole units round up and credits must not exceed total cost.","faq":[{"q":"Are customs duties or exchange rates looked up?","a":"No. Enter your own quoted amounts and rates. The tool does not select statutory charges."},{"q":"What should I check before using Landed Cost per Usable Unit Calculator?","a":"Check Supplier invoice amount, Source currency label, PKR per source currency unit and Purchased units. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_bulk","name":"Bulk Purchase Discount Calculator","description":"Compare a quoted unit discount with total cash purchase and cost per usable unit.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/bulk-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_bulk/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_bulk.md","page_id":167,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_bulk","inputs":[{"group":"Supplier offer","label":"Purchased units","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Supplier offer","label":"Original unit quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Supplier offer","label":"Supplier discount","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Supplier offer","label":"Batch shipping","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Supplier offer","label":"Other batch charges","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Supplier offer","label":"Unusable unit allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"The discount applies to the quoted product amount only. Shipping and other charges are added afterwards; unusable whole units are rounded up.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A supplier discount can look smaller after shipping and unusable stock are counted.","Compare the quoted product reduction with the full cash purchase, then inspect cost per usable unit."],"steps":["Enter purchased units, original unit quote, supplier discount, batch shipping, other batch charges and unusable unit allowance.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The discount and later charges remain separate, useful when comparing bulk offers with different delivery terms.","check":"The discount applies to the quoted product amount only. Shipping and other charges are added afterwards; unusable whole units are rounded up.","faq":[{"q":"Does the discount reduce shipping automatically?","a":"No. It applies to the quoted product amount. Shipping and other entered charges are added afterwards."},{"q":"What should I check before using Bulk Purchase Discount Calculator?","a":"Check Purchased units, Original unit quote, Supplier discount and Batch shipping. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_wholesale","name":"Wholesale Quote Calculator","description":"Spread fixed order costs across quantity while checking MOQ and a target margin.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/wholesale-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_wholesale/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_wholesale.md","page_id":168,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_wholesale","inputs":[{"group":"Order quantities","label":"Quote quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Order quantities","label":"Minimum order quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Cost and target","label":"Product cost per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Cost and target","label":"Handling per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Cost and target","label":"Fixed expense for this order","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Cost and target","label":"Target margin","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":99.99},{"group":"Cost and target","label":"Fee on quoted revenue","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"Quantity must meet the entered MOQ. Quoted prices use included costs and revenue based fees; minimum order quantity is your business assumption, not a supplier lookup.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Wholesale quantity spreads fixed order costs, but the quote still needs to cover unit costs and sales fees.","Enter a quantity meeting your chosen minimum order, then inspect the price needed for the target margin."],"steps":["Enter quote quantity and minimum order quantity.","Enter product cost per unit, handling per unit, fixed expense for this order, target margin and fee on quoted revenue.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"MOQ and cost allocation stay visible, helping you compare order sizes without silently changing the quote basis.","check":"Quantity must meet the entered MOQ. Quoted prices use included costs and revenue based fees; minimum order quantity is your business assumption, not a supplier lookup.","faq":[{"q":"Is the minimum order quantity fetched from a supplier?","a":"No. MOQ is your input. Use the terms agreed for the product and order."},{"q":"What should I check before using Wholesale Quote Calculator?","a":"Check Quote quantity, Minimum order quantity, Product cost per unit and Handling per unit. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_bundle","name":"Bundle Price & Profit Calculator","description":"Compare a bundle discount with the combined cost of all included products.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/bundle-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_bundle/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_bundle.md","page_id":169,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_bundle","inputs":[{"group":"Bundle offer","label":"Discount from combined reference prices","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Bundle offer","label":"Bundle packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Bundle offer","label":"Seller shipping expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Bundle offer","label":"Fee on bundle revenue","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Products inside one bundle","label":"Product","type":"text"},{"group":"Products inside one bundle","label":"Units inside bundle","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Products inside one bundle","label":"Reference unit price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Products inside one bundle","label":"Unit acquisition cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Reference prices are your entered prices, not verified savings claims. Quantities apply within one bundle; all percentages use bundle revenue.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Every product inside a bundle has a cost even when the offer presents one combined selling price.","List the quantities in one bundle and enter the reference prices and fees. Compare the offered discount with the remaining profit."],"steps":["Enter discount from combined reference prices, bundle packaging, seller shipping expense and fee on bundle revenue.","Add the entries in products inside one bundle as separate rows. Include product, units inside bundle, reference unit price and unit acquisition cost for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The item schedule prevents a multi item offer from being costed as though it contains only one unit.","check":"Reference prices are your entered prices, not verified savings claims. Quantities apply within one bundle; all percentages use bundle revenue.","faq":[{"q":"Are the displayed savings verified market savings?","a":"No. Reference prices are entered by you. Use defensible comparisons before making a public savings claim."},{"q":"What should I check before using Bundle Price & Profit Calculator?","a":"Check Discount from combined reference prices, Bundle packaging, Seller shipping expense and Fee on bundle revenue. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_bogo","name":"BOGO & Multi Buy Profit Calculator","description":"Count every supplied unit while only charging for the paid units in an offer group.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/bogo-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_bogo/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_bogo.md","page_id":170,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_bogo","inputs":[{"group":"Offer group","label":"Paid units per group","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Offer group","label":"Free units per group","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Offer group","label":"Offer groups","type":"number","unit":"groups","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Offer group","label":"Price per paid unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Offer group","label":"Cost per supplied unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs per group","label":"Packaging per group","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs per group","label":"Shipping per group","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Costs per group","label":"Fee on paid revenue","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"Every free unit still carries acquisition cost. Group packaging and shipping are multiplied by group count; this does not predict demand or count tax.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A free item still needs purchasing and fulfilling. The promotion must account for every unit handed to the customer.","Enter paid and free units per group, then include group packaging and shipping costs. Review contribution for the full offer."],"steps":["Enter paid units per group, free units per group, offer groups, price per paid unit and cost per supplied unit.","Enter packaging per group, shipping per group and fee on paid revenue.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Counting supplied units separately from charged units exposes the cost of the free part of the deal.","check":"Every free unit still carries acquisition cost. Group packaging and shipping are multiplied by group count; this does not predict demand or count tax.","faq":[{"q":"Does the calculation predict extra customer demand?","a":"No. It compares the entered offer economics only. Demand changes require evidence from actual sales."},{"q":"What should I check before using BOGO & Multi Buy Profit Calculator?","a":"Check Paid units per group, Free units per group, Offer groups and Price per paid unit. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_coupon","name":"Maximum Coupon Calculator","description":"Find the discount room remaining after costs, sales fees and a target profit.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/coupon-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_coupon/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_coupon.md","page_id":171,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_coupon","inputs":[{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Before coupon selling price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0.01,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Net shipping expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Other cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Fee on discounted price","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":99.99},{"group":"Baseline offer","label":"Minimum profit to retain","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"A zero maximum with negative headroom means the baseline already misses the target. The coupon applies to item price only and cannot repair an unprofitable baseline.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["The maximum coupon comes from the room left after costs, fees and the profit you want to retain.","Check the original price and target first, then compare the available discount with the promotion you are considering."],"steps":["Enter before coupon selling price, product cost, packaging, net shipping expense, other cost, fee on discounted price and minimum profit to retain.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The headroom view helps you recognise an already weak baseline before adding another price reduction.","check":"A zero maximum with negative headroom means the baseline already misses the target. The coupon applies to item price only and cannot repair an unprofitable baseline.","faq":[{"q":"Why can the maximum coupon be zero?","a":"There may be no discount room, or the baseline may already miss the target. Read the headroom alongside the coupon amount."},{"q":"What should I check before using Maximum Coupon Calculator?","a":"Check Before coupon selling price, Product cost, Packaging and Net shipping expense. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_tax","name":"Entered Tax Price Split Calculator","description":"Split an inclusive amount or add an entered percentage to an exclusive amount.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/tax-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_tax/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_tax.md","page_id":172,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_tax","inputs":[{"group":"Amount and your rate","label":"Amount basis","type":"select","choices":{"exclusive":"Before entered tax","inclusive":"Including entered tax"}},{"group":"Amount and your rate","label":"Amount","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Amount and your rate","label":"Entered tax percentage","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"This is generic inclusive/exclusive arithmetic. It does not select a Pakistan tax rate, decide registration or product liability, calculate input credits, or prepare a filing.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Inclusive and exclusive amounts need different arithmetic, even when they use the same tax percentage.","Enter the rate applicable to your example and select whether tax is already included. Review the base amount and tax portion separately."],"steps":["Choose amount basis. Enter amount and entered tax percentage.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Both directions keep the total and its components clear when checking a price or invoice figure.","check":"This is generic inclusive/exclusive arithmetic. It does not select a Pakistan tax rate, decide registration or product liability, calculate input credits, or prepare a filing.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool decide my Pakistan tax rate?","a":"No. It uses the rate you enter and does not determine registration, product liability or filing treatment."},{"q":"What should I check before using Entered Tax Price Split Calculator?","a":"Check Amount basis, Amount and Entered tax percentage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_settlement","name":"Seller Settlement Reconciliation Calculator","description":"Separate selling deductions, withholding and reserves while comparing an actual payout.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/settlement-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_settlement/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_settlement.md","page_id":173,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_settlement","inputs":[{"group":"Statement totals","label":"Gross credited receipts","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Statement totals","label":"Refund deductions","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Statement totals","label":"Product costs","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Statement totals","label":"Other operating costs","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Statement totals","label":"Actual cash payout","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Statement deduction lines","label":"Deduction name","type":"text"},{"group":"Statement deduction lines","label":"Classification","type":"select","choices":{"expense":"Selling expense","withheld":"Withholding deduction","reserve":"Held reserve"}},{"group":"Statement deduction lines","label":"Statement amount","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Withholding and reserves are separate from entered selling expense. Their accounting or tax treatment is not inferred. Seller product and operating costs affect contribution, not platform payout.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A settlement statement can contain selling deductions, withholding and reserves that serve different purposes.","Enter the listed receipts and deductions, then compare the expected settlement with the actual payout. Keep product costs in the contribution view."],"steps":["Enter gross credited receipts, refund deductions, product costs, other operating costs and actual cash payout.","Add the entries in statement deduction lines as separate rows. Include deduction name, classification and statement amount for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The separation helps reconcile a payout without calling every withheld amount a selling expense.","check":"Withholding and reserves are separate from entered selling expense. Their accounting or tax treatment is not inferred. Seller product and operating costs affect contribution, not platform payout.","faq":[{"q":"Does it decide the accounting treatment of withholding?","a":"No. It keeps the amount separate for review. Final accounting and tax treatment need the appropriate records and rules."},{"q":"What should I check before using Seller Settlement Reconciliation Calculator?","a":"Check Gross credited receipts, Refund deductions, Product costs and Other operating costs. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_inventory","name":"Inventory Turnover & Days Calculator","description":"Relate period cost of goods sold to average inventory at cost.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/inventory-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_inventory/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_inventory.md","page_id":174,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_inventory","inputs":[{"group":"One matching period","label":"Opening inventory value at cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"One matching period","label":"Closing inventory value at cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"One matching period","label":"Cost of goods sold in period","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"One matching period","label":"Period length","type":"number","unit":"days","min":1,"max":3660}],"limitations":"Use inventory and COGS on a consistent cost basis. Days are based on this period, not automatically annualised. Zero COGS gives no finite inventory days result.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Inventory turnover needs cost of goods sold and inventory valued on a consistent cost basis.","Choose the period and enter average stock at cost. Compare turnover and inventory days against that same period."],"steps":["Enter opening inventory value at cost, closing inventory value at cost, cost of goods sold in period and period length.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The period basis stays explicit, so a short sales period is not silently presented as an annual result.","check":"Use inventory and COGS on a consistent cost basis. Days are based on this period, not automatically annualised. Zero COGS gives no finite inventory days result.","faq":[{"q":"What happens when cost of goods sold is zero?","a":"A finite inventory days result is not available from zero sales cost. Review the selected period and underlying figures."},{"q":"What should I check before using Inventory Turnover & Days Calculator?","a":"Check Opening inventory value at cost, Closing inventory value at cost, Cost of goods sold in period and Period length. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_reorder","name":"Reorder Point & Quantity Calculator","description":"Use lead time demand, safety stock and stock already on order in a constant demand plan.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/reorder-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_reorder/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_reorder.md","page_id":175,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_reorder","inputs":[{"group":"Demand assumptions","label":"Average units sold per day","type":"number","unit":"units/day","min":0,"max":1000000},{"group":"Demand assumptions","label":"Supplier lead time","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660},{"group":"Demand assumptions","label":"Safety stock","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Demand assumptions","label":"Coverage after arrival","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660},{"group":"Inventory position","label":"On hand units","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Inventory position","label":"Units already on order","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Inventory position","label":"Reserved units","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Order up to target is average demand × (lead time + after arrival coverage) plus safety stock. This constant demand model does not optimise MOQ, forecast seasonality or guarantee availability.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A reorder trigger and the size of the next order are related but different questions.","Enter daily demand, supplier lead time and safety stock. Include stock already on order when comparing inventory position with the refill target."],"steps":["Enter average units sold per day, supplier lead time, safety stock and coverage after arrival.","Enter on hand units, units already on order and reserved units.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separating trigger and replenishment quantity helps avoid ordering the target stock amount on top of inventory already committed.","check":"Order up to target is average demand × (lead time + after arrival coverage) plus safety stock. This constant demand model does not optimise MOQ, forecast seasonality or guarantee availability.","faq":[{"q":"Does this forecast seasonal demand?","a":"No. It uses constant entered demand. Change the assumptions when expected sales or supplier delays change."},{"q":"What should I check before using Reorder Point & Quantity Calculator?","a":"Check Average units sold per day, Supplier lead time, Safety stock and Coverage after arrival. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_stock","name":"Stock Runway Calculator","description":"Measure unreserved stock against average daily demand and a supplier wait.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/stock-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_stock/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_stock.md","page_id":176,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_stock","inputs":[{"group":"Usable stock now","label":"On hand stock","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Usable stock now","label":"Reserved stock","type":"number","unit":"units","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Usable stock now","label":"Expected daily demand","type":"number","unit":"units/day","min":0,"max":1000000},{"group":"Usable stock now","label":"Days until next receipt","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660}],"limitations":"Incoming stock is not included before receipt. Daily demand is an entered average; zero demand leaves runway undefined rather than promising permanent stock availability.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Reserved units are not freely available for new orders. A runway estimate should begin with unreserved inventory.","Enter current stock, reservations and average daily demand. Compare the available days with the supplier waiting time."],"steps":["Enter on hand stock, reserved stock, expected daily demand and days until next receipt.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The available stock basis helps distinguish inventory physically present from units already promised.","check":"Incoming stock is not included before receipt. Daily demand is an entered average; zero demand leaves runway undefined rather than promising permanent stock availability.","faq":[{"q":"Does incoming stock extend today's runway?","a":"Not before it is received in this model. Review incoming deliveries separately from currently available stock."},{"q":"What should I check before using Stock Runway Calculator?","a":"Check On hand stock, Reserved stock, Expected daily demand and Days until next receipt. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_cashgap","name":"Inventory Cash Gap Calculator","description":"Map purchase lead time, stock holding, settlement delay and supplier credit to a funding estimate.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/cashgap-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_cashgap/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_cashgap.md","page_id":177,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_cashgap","inputs":[{"group":"Cycle durations","label":"Procurement lead time","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660},{"group":"Cycle durations","label":"Average stock holding","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660},{"group":"Cycle durations","label":"Cash settlement delay","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660},{"group":"Cycle durations","label":"Supplier credit from purchase","type":"number","unit":"days","min":0,"max":3660},{"group":"Daily cash assumptions","label":"Average units per day","type":"number","unit":"units/day","min":0,"max":1000000},{"group":"Daily cash assumptions","label":"Inventory cash cost per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Daily cash assumptions","label":"Other daily cash requirement","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Funding days = max(0, lead + holding + settlement − supplier credit). This steady flow estimate assumes purchase commitment at the start; it does not model dated cash flows or lending terms.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Inventory can need funding before the seller receives customer settlement. Supplier credit may shorten that gap.","Enter lead time, holding time and settlement delay on the stated purchase basis. Compare the funding days and cost estimate."],"steps":["Enter procurement lead time, average stock holding, cash settlement delay and supplier credit from purchase.","Enter average units per day, inventory cash cost per unit and other daily cash requirement.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The timeline makes each delay visible rather than hiding the cash requirement inside the product margin.","check":"Funding days = max(0, lead + holding + settlement − supplier credit). This steady flow estimate assumes purchase commitment at the start; it does not model dated cash flows or lending terms.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a dated cashflow or loan calculation?","a":"No. It is a steady flow estimate. Individual payment dates, financing charges and lending terms are not modelled."},{"q":"What should I check before using Inventory Cash Gap Calculator?","a":"Check Procurement lead time, Average stock holding, Cash settlement delay and Supplier credit from purchase. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_comparison","name":"Sales Channel Profit Comparison","description":"Compare entered prices and charges while keeping product and packaging costs common.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/comparison-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_comparison/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_comparison.md","page_id":178,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_comparison","inputs":[{"group":"Common costs per order","label":"Product cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Common costs per order","label":"Packaging","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Channel scenarios","label":"Channel","type":"text"},{"group":"Channel scenarios","label":"Item revenue","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Channel scenarios","label":"Fee on item revenue","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Channel scenarios","label":"Fixed selling charge","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Channel scenarios","label":"Net seller shipping expense","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Channel scenarios","label":"Ad allocation","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Channels use one item per order and their own entered receipts and expenses. The table compares arithmetic, not verified tariffs or a recommendation to use a platform.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Two channels can produce different profits from the same item because receipts and deductions differ.","Keep product and packaging costs common, then enter each channel's price and charges. Compare the contribution on a matching order basis."],"steps":["Enter product cost and packaging.","Add the entries in channel scenarios as separate rows. Include channel, item revenue, fee on item revenue, fixed selling charge, net seller shipping expense and ad allocation for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"One comparison table makes the effect of channel costs visible without suggesting that their tariffs are automatically verified.","check":"Channels use one item per order and their own entered receipts and expenses. The table compares arithmetic, not verified tariffs or a recommendation to use a platform.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool recommend the best platform?","a":"No. It compares entered arithmetic. Reach, reliability and operational requirements need separate judgement."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sales Channel Profit Comparison?","a":"Check Product cost, Packaging, Channel and Item revenue. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_catalog","name":"SKU Profit Batch Calculator","description":"Add SKU profits using quantities and revenue weights rather than averaging margin percentages.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/catalog-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_catalog/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_catalog.md","page_id":179,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_catalog","inputs":[{"group":"Period expense","label":"Shared fixed cost for period","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"SKU","type":"text"},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"Units sold","type":"number","unit":"units","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"Unit selling price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"Unit discount","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"Unit acquisition cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"Fee on discounted sales","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"SKU rows","label":"Other cost per unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Each row uses per unit costs and deductions; discount is per unit. Delivery and ads belong in the per unit other cost where applicable. Shared fixed cost is deducted once.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["A catalogue's margin cannot be found reliably by averaging the percentages of its SKUs.","Enter quantities and per unit economics for each row. Review combined revenue and profit, then deduct shared fixed costs once."],"steps":["Enter shared fixed cost for period.","Add the entries in SKU rows as separate rows. Include SKU, units sold, unit selling price, unit discount, unit acquisition cost, fee on discounted sales and other cost per unit for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Revenue weighted totals reflect the actual mix of items rather than giving a small SKU the same influence as a large seller.","check":"Each row uses per unit costs and deductions; discount is per unit. Delivery and ads belong in the per unit other cost where applicable. Shared fixed cost is deducted once.","faq":[{"q":"Where should delivery and ads be entered?","a":"Include them on a consistent per unit cost basis where applicable. Avoid repeating a shared cost across several rows."},{"q":"What should I check before using SKU Profit Batch Calculator?","a":"Check Shared fixed cost for period, SKU, Units sold and Unit selling price. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_forecast","name":"Sales & Profit Scenario Planner","description":"Turn traffic and three conversion assumptions into order revenue and contribution forecasts.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/forecast-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_forecast/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_forecast.md","page_id":180,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_forecast","inputs":[{"group":"Traffic and conversion","label":"Visitors in period","type":"number","unit":"visitors","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Traffic and conversion","label":"Low conversion","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Traffic and conversion","label":"Base conversion","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Traffic and conversion","label":"High conversion","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Order and period economics","label":"Average order revenue","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Order and period economics","label":"Non ad variable cost per order","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Order and period economics","label":"Fee on order revenue","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Order and period economics","label":"Period ad budget","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Order and period economics","label":"Period fixed cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"Low ≤ base ≤ high must hold. Expected orders can be fractional. Do not count the same ads in variable cost and period spend. Assumed conversion is not a prediction of demand.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["Traffic becomes orders only under a conversion assumption. Several scenarios make that uncertainty easier to see.","Enter low, base and high conversion rates in order, then compare revenue and contribution with the same order costs."],"steps":["Enter visitors in period, low conversion, base conversion and high conversion.","Enter average order revenue, non ad variable cost per order, fee on order revenue, period ad budget and period fixed cost.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The three cases show how a change in conversion affects the plan without presenting one assumed rate as a prediction.","check":"Low ≤ base ≤ high must hold. Expected orders can be fractional. Do not count the same ads in variable cost and period spend. Assumed conversion is not a prediction of demand.","faq":[{"q":"Can expected orders include decimals?","a":"Yes. They describe an average scenario. Actual completed order counts will be whole numbers."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sales & Profit Scenario Planner?","a":"Check Visitors in period, Low conversion, Base conversion and High conversion. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"seller_fx","name":"Currency Quote Cost Calculator","description":"Convert a source amount with an entered PKR quote and percentage or fixed exchange charges.","category":"Seller Pricing & Profit","category_id":"seller","url":"https://whatson.pk/fx-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_fx/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/seller_fx.md","page_id":181,"shortcode":"whatson_seller_fx","inputs":[{"group":"Your exchange quote","label":"Source currency","type":"text"},{"group":"Your exchange quote","label":"Source amount","type":"number","unit":"source currency","min":1.0e-6,"max":1000000000},{"group":"Your exchange quote","label":"PKR per source unit","type":"number","unit":"PKR/unit","min":1.0e-6,"max":1000000},{"group":"Your exchange quote","label":"Cash direction","type":"select","choices":{"pay":"PKR required to buy/pay source amount","receive":"PKR received after conversion"}},{"group":"Conversion charges","label":"Charge on converted PKR amount","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Conversion charges","label":"Fixed PKR charge","type":"number","unit":"PKR","min":0,"max":1000000000}],"limitations":"The rate starts at an illustrative 1 and must be replaced with your actual quote. No live exchange rate or statutory withholding is supplied; receiving charges may exceed the converted amount.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:05:21+00:00","intro":["An exchange quote is not the final received amount when percentage or fixed charges apply.","Enter the source amount and your actual PKR quote, then add the stated exchange charges. Review the conversion and deductions separately."],"steps":["Choose cash direction. Enter source currency, source amount and PKR per source unit.","Enter charge on converted PKR amount and fixed PKR charge.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The charge breakdown helps compare offers that share a similar headline rate but produce different net amounts.","check":"The rate starts at an illustrative 1 and must be replaced with your actual quote. No live exchange rate or statutory withholding is supplied; receiving charges may exceed the converted amount.","faq":[{"q":"Are live currency rates supplied?","a":"No. Replace the illustrative rate with your provider's quote. The result follows your entered rate and charges."},{"q":"What should I check before using Currency Quote Cost Calculator?","a":"Check Source currency, Source amount, PKR per source unit and Cash direction. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_load","name":"Home Energy Load Planner","description":"Build an appliance schedule and separate daily energy from connected running power.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/load-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_load/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_load.md","page_id":217,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_load","inputs":[{"group":"Appliance schedule","label":"Appliance","type":"text"},{"group":"Appliance schedule","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Appliance schedule","label":"Running power per unit","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Appliance schedule","label":"Daily operating time","type":"number","unit":"hours","help":"","min":0,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Appliance schedule","label":"Duty factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Duty factor scales energy, not connected power. This schedule does not predict simultaneous demand or motor starting power.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Daily electricity use and connected appliance power answer different planning questions. A fan running for several hours uses energy over time.","Build a schedule using quantities, running watts and operating hours. Use duty factors for appliances that cycle rather than treating them as continuously active."],"steps":["Add the entries in appliance schedule as separate rows. Include appliance, quantity, running power per unit, daily operating time and duty factor for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The schedule keeps watts and daily energy separate, useful when checking a household's solar and backup requirements.","check":"Duty factor scales energy, not connected power. This schedule does not predict simultaneous demand or motor starting power.","faq":[{"q":"Does connected power predict simultaneous demand?","a":"No. It is the sum of listed running loads. Actual overlap and motor starting demand need separate assessment."},{"q":"What should I check before using Home Energy Load Planner?","a":"Check Appliance, Quantity, Running power per unit and Daily operating time. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_backup_load","name":"Essential Backup Load Planner","description":"Choose outage hours for essential appliances and calculate an AC energy budget.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/backup-load-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_backup_load/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_backup_load.md","page_id":218,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_backup_load","inputs":[{"group":"Backup allowance","label":"Extra energy allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Essential loads during the outage","label":"Appliance","type":"text"},{"group":"Essential loads during the outage","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Essential loads during the outage","label":"Running power per unit","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Essential loads during the outage","label":"Daily operating time","type":"number","unit":"hours","help":"","min":0,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Essential loads during the outage","label":"Duty factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Hours refer to the outage, not necessarily a full day. Connected power is not an inverter surge rating.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Backup planning is often about a few essential appliances during an outage, rather than the whole home's daily energy.","Enter only the loads you intend to support and their outage operating hours. Compare the energy budget before choosing storage capacity."],"steps":["Enter extra energy allowance.","Add the entries in essential loads during the outage as separate rows. Include appliance, quantity, running power per unit, daily operating time and duty factor for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A dedicated outage schedule helps keep optional daytime consumption out of the essential backup calculation.","check":"Hours refer to the outage, not necessarily a full day. Connected power is not an inverter surge rating.","faq":[{"q":"Are the hours a full day assumption?","a":"Not necessarily. They refer to the outage period you enter. Use the expected running hours within that period."},{"q":"What should I check before using Essential Backup Load Planner?","a":"Check Extra energy allowance, Appliance, Quantity and Running power per unit. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_solar_size","name":"Solar Array Size Calculator","description":"Estimate DC capacity from a daily AC energy target and entered sun hours.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/solar-size-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_solar_size/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_solar_size.md","page_id":219,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_solar_size","inputs":[{"group":"Energy target","label":"Daily AC energy needed","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Energy target","label":"Capacity allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Resource and conversion","label":"Peak sun hours","type":"number","unit":"hours/day","help":"Enter a site and season estimate, not daylight duration.","min":0.01,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Resource and conversion","label":"Overall AC yield factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Yield factor includes the losses you intend to model. This is a simple energy balance, not an hourly weather simulation or outage guarantee.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["A daily energy target can provide a first estimate of solar DC capacity when the assumed sun hours and losses are explicit.","Enter the AC energy target and a suitable yield factor. Compare alternatives rather than treating the first capacity figure as a finished system design."],"steps":["Enter daily AC energy needed and capacity allowance.","Enter peak sun hours and overall AC yield factor.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The editable assumptions show why the same daily demand can lead to different array sizes.","check":"Yield factor includes the losses you intend to model. This is a simple energy balance, not an hourly weather simulation or outage guarantee.","faq":[{"q":"Does this guarantee output during outages?","a":"No. It is a simple energy balance. Weather, hourly use, storage and equipment operation need a detailed design."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Array Size Calculator?","a":"Check Daily AC energy needed, Capacity allowance, Peak sun hours and Overall AC yield factor. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_panel_count","name":"Solar Panel Quantity Calculator","description":"Round a target array up to whole panels and inspect the resulting DC capacity.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/panel-count-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_panel_count/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_panel_count.md","page_id":220,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_panel_count","inputs":[{"group":"Target and module","label":"Target DC array","type":"number","unit":"kW","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Target and module","label":"Module nameplate","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module footprint","label":"Module length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":20,"integer":false},{"group":"Module footprint","label":"Module width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":20,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Module area excludes aisles, setbacks, tilt spacing and structures. A whole panel count does not establish an electrically compatible string.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["A target array size rarely divides into an exact number of available panels. Whole module rounding changes the installed DC capacity.","Enter the intended target and module rating. Review the resulting capacity and module area before arranging a roof layout."],"steps":["Enter target DC array and module nameplate.","Enter module length and module width.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The comparison keeps target watts distinct from the actual watts produced by a whole panel count.","check":"Module area excludes aisles, setbacks, tilt spacing and structures. A whole panel count does not establish an electrically compatible string.","faq":[{"q":"Does the count establish a valid electrical string?","a":"No. Voltage, current and inverter limits need separate checks before connecting the modules."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Panel Quantity Calculator?","a":"Check Target DC array, Module nameplate, Module length and Module width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_generation","name":"Solar Generation Estimator","description":"Estimate AC energy after separate DC losses and inverter efficiency.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/generation-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_generation/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_generation.md","page_id":221,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_generation","inputs":[{"group":"Array and resource","label":"DC array capacity","type":"number","unit":"kW","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Array and resource","label":"Peak sun hours","type":"number","unit":"hours/day","help":"","min":0.01,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Array and resource","label":"Period length","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":366,"integer":true},{"group":"Loss model","label":"DC side loss allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99.9,"integer":false},{"group":"Loss model","label":"Inverter conversion efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"DC losses and inverter efficiency are multiplied separately. Do not enter a combined AC loss here and deduct inverter losses twice. No weather or city data is fetched.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Solar nameplate capacity becomes usable AC energy only after the entered production and loss assumptions are applied.","Set sun hours, DC losses and inverter efficiency separately. Check whether an existing yield factor already includes one of those losses."],"steps":["Enter DC array capacity, peak sun hours and period length.","Enter DC side loss allowance and inverter conversion efficiency.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate stages make the estimated output easier to trace and reduce accidental double deductions.","check":"DC losses and inverter efficiency are multiplied separately. Do not enter a combined AC loss here and deduct inverter losses twice. No weather or city data is fetched.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool fetch city weather?","a":"No. Sun hours are entered by you. Use a suitable source or measured record for the planning location and period."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Generation Estimator?","a":"Check DC array capacity, Peak sun hours, Period length and DC side loss allowance. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_monthly","name":"Monthly Solar Yield Planner","description":"Supply your own monthly sun hours and day counts for a seasonal production worksheet.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/monthly-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_monthly/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_monthly.md","page_id":222,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_monthly","inputs":[{"group":"System model","label":"DC array capacity","type":"number","unit":"kW","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"System model","label":"Overall AC yield factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Seasonal resource entries","label":"Period","type":"text"},{"group":"Seasonal resource entries","label":"Days in period","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":366,"integer":true},{"group":"Seasonal resource entries","label":"Peak sun hours","type":"number","unit":"hours/day","help":"","min":0.01,"max":24,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Starting sun hours are placeholders, not observed Pakistan weather. Enter 29 days for February in a leap year. Total covers only the entered rows.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Solar production changes across months. A single annual average can hide a period with less energy available.","Enter monthly sun hours and actual day counts, then compare the seasonal worksheet. Replace all illustrative values before relying on the totals."],"steps":["Enter DC array capacity and overall AC yield factor.","Add the entries in seasonal resource entries as separate rows. Include period, days in period and peak sun hours for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Month rows let you review seasonal assumptions individually instead of folding them into one unexplained annual yield.","check":"Starting sun hours are placeholders, not observed Pakistan weather. Enter 29 days for February in a leap year. Total covers only the entered rows.","faq":[{"q":"How should February be entered in a leap year?","a":"Use 29 days. Check the selected year's calendar and enter the day count for every listed month."},{"q":"What should I check before using Monthly Solar Yield Planner?","a":"Check DC array capacity, Overall AC yield factor, Period and Days in period. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_runtime","name":"Battery Backup Runtime Calculator","description":"Estimate steady AC backup hours from battery energy and an entered load.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/runtime-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_runtime/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_runtime.md","page_id":223,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_runtime","inputs":[{"group":"Stored capacity","label":"Bank nominal voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Stored capacity","label":"Bank capacity","type":"number","unit":"Ah","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Stored capacity","label":"Usable depth of discharge","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Conversion and load","label":"Inverter efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Conversion and load","label":"Steady AC load","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Conversion and load","label":"Inverter DC idle draw","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Constant power estimate. Battery age, temperature, discharge rate, BMS cutoffs and inverter idle behaviour can change actual runtime. DoD is an input, not a chemistry recommendation.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Battery energy and the AC load together set a rough steady backup duration. Nominal capacity alone does not tell you the usable hours.","Enter discharge, health and efficiency assumptions alongside the load. Compare the result with observed runtime as the battery and operating conditions change."],"steps":["Enter bank nominal voltage, bank capacity and usable depth of discharge.","Enter inverter efficiency, steady AC load and inverter DC idle draw.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The energy reductions stay visible, helping explain why nominal watt hours are greater than usable AC output.","check":"Constant power estimate. Battery age, temperature, discharge rate, BMS cutoffs and inverter idle behaviour can change actual runtime. DoD is an input, not a chemistry recommendation.","faq":[{"q":"Is the duration a guarantee?","a":"No. Temperature, discharge rate, battery age, cutoffs and inverter behaviour can change actual runtime."},{"q":"What should I check before using Battery Backup Runtime Calculator?","a":"Check Bank nominal voltage, Bank capacity, Usable depth of discharge and Inverter efficiency. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_battery_size","name":"Required Battery Capacity Calculator","description":"Work backwards from a backup load and duration to nominal battery capacity.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/battery-size-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_battery_size/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_battery_size.md","page_id":224,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_battery_size","inputs":[{"group":"Backup request","label":"Steady AC load","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Backup request","label":"Backup duration","type":"number","unit":"hours","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Backup request","label":"Energy allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery and inverter","label":"Bank nominal voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery and inverter","label":"Usable depth of discharge","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery and inverter","label":"Inverter efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery and inverter","label":"DC idle consumption","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Required nominal energy includes the entered allowance and idle draw. Use manufacturer limits to choose usable DoD and discharge capability.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Working backwards from a load and backup duration gives a nominal storage target rather than just a guessed battery count.","Include the intended energy allowance and inverter idle draw, then choose usable discharge within the manufacturer's limits."],"steps":["Enter steady AC load, backup duration and energy allowance.","Enter bank nominal voltage, usable depth of discharge, inverter efficiency and DC idle consumption.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation connects the storage target directly to the hours and load you want to cover.","check":"Required nominal energy includes the entered allowance and idle draw. Use manufacturer limits to choose usable DoD and discharge capability.","faq":[{"q":"Does capacity alone prove the battery can supply the load?","a":"No. Discharge current, BMS limits and equipment compatibility need a separate check."},{"q":"What should I check before using Required Battery Capacity Calculator?","a":"Check Steady AC load, Backup duration, Energy allowance and Bank nominal voltage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_bank","name":"Battery Bank Series and Parallel Calculator","description":"Inspect ideal bank voltage, amp hours and energy from identical battery modules.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/bank-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_bank/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_bank.md","page_id":225,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_bank","inputs":[{"group":"Identical module","label":"Module nominal voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Identical module","label":"Module capacity","type":"number","unit":"Ah","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Bank topology","label":"Modules per series string","type":"number","unit":"modules","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Bank topology","label":"Parallel strings","type":"number","unit":"strings","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Arithmetic assumes identical compatible modules. BMS, permitted series or parallel arrangements, protection and balancing require manufacturer and installer review. This is not wiring approval.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Series and parallel connections change battery bank voltage and amp hours in different ways.","Enter identical module ratings and the proposed arrangement. Compare the ideal bank values before checking the manufacturer's permitted configurations."],"steps":["Enter module nominal voltage and module capacity.","Enter modules per series string and parallel strings.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The arithmetic view helps distinguish added voltage from added parallel capacity.","check":"Arithmetic assumes identical compatible modules. BMS, permitted series or parallel arrangements, protection and balancing require manufacturer and installer review. This is not wiring approval.","faq":[{"q":"Is the arrangement approved for wiring?","a":"No. Module compatibility, protection, balancing and manufacturer limits require qualified review before installation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Battery Bank Series and Parallel Calculator?","a":"Check Module nominal voltage, Module capacity, Modules per series string and Parallel strings. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_usable","name":"Usable Battery Energy Calculator","description":"Separate nominal stored energy, usable DC energy and estimated AC output.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/usable-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_usable/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_usable.md","page_id":226,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_usable","inputs":[{"group":"Capacity entry","label":"Capacity format","type":"select","choices":{"kwh":"Nominal kWh","ah":"Voltage and amp hours"}},{"group":"Capacity entry","label":"Nominal capacity","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Capacity entry","label":"Bank voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Capacity entry","label":"Bank capacity","type":"number","unit":"Ah","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Usability assumptions","label":"Usable depth of discharge","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Usability assumptions","label":"Retained capacity / state of health","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Usability assumptions","label":"DC to AC efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"State of health scales nominal capacity before DoD. AC output excludes inverter idle draw. Enter rated nominal energy rather than already reduced usable energy.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["Stored energy, usable DC energy and estimated AC output are different stages of the battery calculation.","Begin with rated nominal capacity and apply health, discharge and conversion factors only once. Review each reduction before comparing storage options."],"steps":["Choose capacity format. Enter nominal capacity, bank voltage and bank capacity.","Enter usable depth of discharge, retained capacity / state of health and DC to AC efficiency.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The staged result makes it easier to see which assumption removes capacity at each point.","check":"State of health scales nominal capacity before DoD. AC output excludes inverter idle draw. Enter rated nominal energy rather than already reduced usable energy.","faq":[{"q":"Should I enter an already reduced usable capacity?","a":"No. Enter nominal energy on the stated basis. Otherwise the later reductions can be applied twice."},{"q":"What should I check before using Usable Battery Energy Calculator?","a":"Check Capacity format, Nominal capacity, Bank voltage and Bank capacity. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_charge_time","name":"Battery Charging Time Estimator","description":"Estimate ideal bulk equivalent charging time from a state of charge change.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/charge-time-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_charge_time/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_charge_time.md","page_id":227,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_charge_time","inputs":[{"group":"Battery charge window","label":"Bank capacity","type":"number","unit":"Ah","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery charge window","label":"Starting state of charge","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery charge window","label":"Target state of charge","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Charging current","label":"Current available to the bank","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Charging current","label":"Charge acceptance factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Bulk equivalent estimate with a constant entered current. Absorption, tapering, balancing, temperature and loads can extend time. It is not a charger setting recommendation.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["A charging estimate based on constant current represents an ideal bulk equivalent, not the full behaviour of a real charging cycle.","Enter the capacity, starting and target charge levels and current. Compare the estimate with the charger's actual operating stages."],"steps":["Enter bank capacity, starting state of charge and target state of charge.","Enter current available to the bank and charge acceptance factor.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The stated current basis makes the rough duration easier to interpret than an unexplained full charge time.","check":"Bulk equivalent estimate with a constant entered current. Absorption, tapering, balancing, temperature and loads can extend time. It is not a charger setting recommendation.","faq":[{"q":"Why might actual charging take longer?","a":"Absorption, tapering, balancing, temperature and concurrent loads can extend the charging process."},{"q":"What should I check before using Battery Charging Time Estimator?","a":"Check Bank capacity, Starting state of charge, Target state of charge and Current available to the bank. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_charge_current","name":"Charge Current and C Rate Calculator","description":"Compare entered charge current with capacity and a manufacturer supplied current limit.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/charge-current-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_charge_current/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_charge_current.md","page_id":228,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_charge_current","inputs":[{"group":"Battery and charger","label":"Bank capacity","type":"number","unit":"Ah","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery and charger","label":"Charging current","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery and charger","label":"Charging voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Entered manufacturer limit","label":"Permitted charge current","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"C rate is current divided by Ah capacity. Power uses charging voltage, not nominal voltage. Matching this one current limit does not confirm full charger compatibility.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:35+00:00","intro":["C rate compares current with battery amp hour capacity. Charging power uses the actual charging voltage.","Enter the proposed current and a manufacturer supplied current limit. Review both the ratio and power before checking the rest of the charging requirements."],"steps":["Enter bank capacity, charging current and charging voltage.","Enter permitted charge current.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Current, C rate and power remain distinct, useful when reading different ratings on a charger and battery.","check":"C rate is current divided by Ah capacity. Power uses charging voltage, not nominal voltage. Matching this one current limit does not confirm full charger compatibility.","faq":[{"q":"Does passing the current limit prove full compatibility?","a":"No. Voltage settings, chemistry, temperature and other manufacturer requirements still need checking."},{"q":"What should I check before using Charge Current and C Rate Calculator?","a":"Check Bank capacity, Charging current, Charging voltage and Permitted charge current. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_inverter","name":"Inverter Running Load Sizing Worksheet","description":"Compare simultaneous running loads with an entered headroom allowance.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/inverter-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_inverter/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_inverter.md","page_id":229,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_inverter","inputs":[{"group":"Sizing allowance","label":"Running power allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Simultaneous running loads","label":"Appliance","type":"text"},{"group":"Simultaneous running loads","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Simultaneous running loads","label":"Running power","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Simultaneous running loads","label":"Power factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Assumes all entered loads run together. VA totals are conservative scalar sums. Check actual inverter W, VA, surge duration, temperature derating and manufacturer requirements separately.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["An inverter needs to handle the loads running together, with separate attention to starting demand and equipment ratings.","List the simultaneous running appliances and choose a headroom allowance. Read watts and VA without assuming one replaces the other."],"steps":["Enter running power allowance.","Add the entries in simultaneous running loads as separate rows. Include appliance, quantity, running power and power factor for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A visible load schedule provides a clearer sizing discussion than relying on a single appliance name or battery capacity.","check":"Assumes all entered loads run together. VA totals are conservative scalar sums. Check actual inverter W, VA, surge duration, temperature derating and manufacturer requirements separately.","faq":[{"q":"Does the worksheet approve an inverter model?","a":"No. Check running ratings, surge duration, temperature derating and manufacturer requirements independently."},{"q":"What should I check before using Inverter Running Load Sizing Worksheet?","a":"Check Running power allowance, Appliance, Quantity and Running power. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_va","name":"Watts, VA and Power Factor Converter","description":"Convert real and apparent single phase power using the entered power factor.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/va-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_va/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_va.md","page_id":230,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_va","inputs":[{"group":"Conversion direction","label":"Known power","type":"select","choices":{"w":"Watts to VA","va":"VA to watts"}},{"group":"Conversion direction","label":"Known power amount","type":"number","unit":"W or VA","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Conversion direction","label":"Power factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"AC voltage","label":"Single phase RMS voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Current is VA divided by RMS voltage for this single phase model. It does not model harmonics, three phase wiring or a surge rating.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Watts describe real power, while VA describe apparent power. Power factor connects the two in this single phase model.","Enter a valid power factor and RMS voltage, then compare the converted values. Keep three phase and starting conditions outside this worksheet."],"steps":["Choose known power. Enter known power amount and power factor.","Enter single phase RMS voltage.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The converter helps make a load rating and an equipment rating comparable on an explicit electrical basis.","check":"Current is VA divided by RMS voltage for this single phase model. It does not model harmonics, three phase wiring or a surge rating.","faq":[{"q":"Does the current include motor starting surge?","a":"No. It is calculated from the entered steady apparent power and voltage."},{"q":"What should I check before using Watts, VA and Power Factor Converter?","a":"Check Known power, Known power amount, Power factor and Single phase RMS voltage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_surge","name":"Motor Starting Load Worksheet","description":"Combine one starting appliance with other loads already running.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/surge-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_surge/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_surge.md","page_id":231,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_surge","inputs":[{"group":"Starting appliance","label":"Starting appliance running power","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Starting appliance","label":"Starting power multiplier","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"","min":1,"max":20,"integer":false},{"group":"Starting appliance","label":"Starting power factor assumption","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Other simultaneous load","label":"Other running power","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other simultaneous load","label":"Other load power factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Other simultaneous load","label":"Surge allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Multiplier is an entered assumption, not a motor specification. Check measured starting demand and inverter surge duration. The result is not proof an appliance will start.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Starting one motor while other loads run can demand more power than the normal running total.","Enter the starting appliance and your measured or specified multiplier, then add the other active loads. Review the total against an inverter's actual surge specification."],"steps":["Enter starting appliance running power, starting power multiplier and starting power factor assumption.","Enter other running power, other load power factor and surge allowance.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separating one start from the already running schedule avoids treating every appliance as starting at once.","check":"Multiplier is an entered assumption, not a motor specification. Check measured starting demand and inverter surge duration. The result is not proof an appliance will start.","faq":[{"q":"Does a matching surge figure guarantee the motor will start?","a":"No. Surge duration and actual motor behaviour matter. Confirm the requirement using equipment specifications and appropriate measurements."},{"q":"What should I check before using Motor Starting Load Worksheet?","a":"Check Starting appliance running power, Starting power multiplier, Starting power factor assumption and Other running power. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_controller","name":"MPPT Output Current Worksheet","description":"Estimate battery side controller current from an array power allowance.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/controller-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_controller/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_controller.md","page_id":232,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_controller","inputs":[{"group":"PV and conversion","label":"Array rated power","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"PV and conversion","label":"Conversion efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"PV and conversion","label":"Current allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery side and controller","label":"Battery charging voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery side and controller","label":"Controller output current rating","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"This compares output current only. Independently verify PV Voc in cold conditions, input Isc, MPPT range, allowed array power and battery limits. Passing output current is not approval.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["MPPT output current is a battery side check. It is different from the PV input voltage and current limits.","Enter the array power allowance and charging voltage, then compare the estimated output current with the controller rating."],"steps":["Enter array rated power, conversion efficiency and current allowance.","Enter battery charging voltage and controller output current rating.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The separate output check helps identify which controller specification is being compared.","check":"This compares output current only. Independently verify PV Voc in cold conditions, input Isc, MPPT range, allowed array power and battery limits. Passing output current is not approval.","faq":[{"q":"Does passing output current approve the PV array?","a":"No. Cold Voc, input Isc, MPPT range, permitted array power and battery limits still require review."},{"q":"What should I check before using MPPT Output Current Worksheet?","a":"Check Array rated power, Conversion efficiency, Current allowance and Battery charging voltage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_string","name":"PV String Limit Checker","description":"Compare a proposed series string against entered cold Voc and hot Vmp limits.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/string-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_string/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_string.md","page_id":233,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_string","inputs":[{"group":"Module and series count","label":"Panels in series","type":"number","unit":"panels","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Module and series count","label":"Module Voc at reference","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module and series count","label":"Module Vmp at reference","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Temperature correction","label":"Cold Voc multiplier","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"","min":1,"max":3,"integer":false},{"group":"Temperature correction","label":"Cold Vmp multiplier","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"Use the Vmp coefficient, independently of Voc.","min":1,"max":3},{"group":"Temperature correction","label":"Hot Vmp multiplier","type":"number","unit":"×","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1,"integer":false},{"group":"Inverter voltage limits","label":"Absolute PV voltage limit","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Inverter voltage limits","label":"Minimum operating MPPT voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Inverter voltage limits","label":"Maximum operating MPPT voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Corrections must come from module coefficients and site temperatures. Equality with the absolute Voc limit is flagged with zero headroom. Current, startup voltage, string fusing and all equipment limits still need review.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Cold conditions can raise a panel string's open circuit voltage, while hot cells can reduce operating voltage.","Enter module coefficients and site temperature assumptions, then compare corrected string values with the entered inverter limits."],"steps":["Enter panels in series, module Voc at reference and module Vmp at reference.","Enter cold Voc multiplier, cold Vmp multiplier and hot Vmp multiplier.","Enter absolute PV voltage limit, minimum operating MPPT voltage and maximum operating MPPT voltage.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Cold and hot checks stay separate so a comfortable operating voltage does not hide excessive maximum voltage.","check":"Corrections must come from module coefficients and site temperatures. Equality with the absolute Voc limit is flagged with zero headroom. Current, startup voltage, string fusing and all equipment limits still need review.","faq":[{"q":"Is equality with maximum Voc enough headroom?","a":"No. Equality leaves zero headroom and is flagged. Appropriate equipment margins need design review."},{"q":"What should I check before using PV String Limit Checker?","a":"Check Panels in series, Module Voc at reference, Module Vmp at reference and Cold Voc multiplier. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_array","name":"PV Series and Parallel Array Calculator","description":"Calculate ideal voltage, current and nameplate power for identical modules.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/array-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_array/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_array.md","page_id":234,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_array","inputs":[{"group":"Module data","label":"Module nameplate power","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module data","label":"Open circuit voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module data","label":"Maximum power voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module data","label":"Short circuit current","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module data","label":"Maximum power current","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Topology","label":"Panels per string","type":"number","unit":"panels","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true},{"group":"Topology","label":"Parallel strings","type":"number","unit":"strings","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Voltage adds in series; current adds in parallel. Power uses entered module W, while Vmp × Imp is shown separately for datasheet rounding checks. Temperatures and equipment ratings are not automatically applied.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Series connections add module voltage, while parallel strings add current. Nameplate watts give another figure to compare.","Enter identical module ratings and counts in both directions. Inspect the ideal totals before applying temperature and equipment checks."],"steps":["Enter module nameplate power, open circuit voltage, maximum power voltage, short circuit current and maximum power current.","Enter panels per string and parallel strings.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Voltage, current and power remain visible together, helping expose inconsistent module data or connection counts.","check":"Voltage adds in series; current adds in parallel. Power uses entered module W, while Vmp × Imp is shown separately for datasheet rounding checks. Temperatures and equipment ratings are not automatically applied.","faq":[{"q":"Why can Vmp multiplied by Imp differ from nameplate watts?","a":"Datasheet rounding can produce a small difference. Review the entered specifications rather than silently changing one rating."},{"q":"What should I check before using PV Series and Parallel Array Calculator?","a":"Check Module nameplate power, Open circuit voltage, Maximum power voltage and Short circuit current. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_cold_voc","name":"Cold Temperature Voc Calculator","description":"Apply a signed module voltage coefficient to a colder module temperature.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/cold-voc-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_cold_voc/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_cold_voc.md","page_id":235,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_cold_voc","inputs":[{"group":"Module datasheet","label":"Reference open circuit voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module datasheet","label":"Voc temperature coefficient","type":"number","unit":"%/°C","help":"","min":-2,"max":0,"integer":false},{"group":"Module datasheet","label":"Reference cell temperature","type":"number","unit":"°C","help":"","min":-80,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Cold condition","label":"Minimum module temperature","type":"number","unit":"°C","help":"","min":-80,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Cold condition","label":"Panels in series","type":"number","unit":"panels","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Uses a linear coefficient from the datasheet and an entered module temperature. A site minimum and equipment margin require design review. This does not select a permitted string length.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["A module's open circuit voltage can increase as its temperature drops. The datasheet coefficient provides the calculation basis.","Enter the signed Voc coefficient and a suitable cold module temperature. Compare the corrected voltage with the reference condition."],"steps":["Enter reference open circuit voltage, voc temperature coefficient and reference cell temperature.","Enter minimum module temperature and panels in series.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Showing the coefficient and temperature makes the correction traceable during a string voltage review.","check":"Uses a linear coefficient from the datasheet and an entered module temperature. A site minimum and equipment margin require design review. This does not select a permitted string length.","faq":[{"q":"Does this select the permitted series count?","a":"No. Equipment voltage limits, site minimum temperatures and design margins need a separate string check."},{"q":"What should I check before using Cold Temperature Voc Calculator?","a":"Check Reference open circuit voltage, Voc temperature coefficient, Reference cell temperature and Minimum module temperature. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_hot_vmp","name":"Hot Temperature Vmp Calculator","description":"Inspect the operating voltage reduction under an entered hot cell condition.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/hot-vmp-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_hot_vmp/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_hot_vmp.md","page_id":236,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_hot_vmp","inputs":[{"group":"Reference module","label":"Reference maximum power voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Reference module","label":"Vmp temperature coefficient","type":"number","unit":"%/°C","help":"","min":-2,"max":0,"integer":false},{"group":"Reference module","label":"Reference cell temperature","type":"number","unit":"°C","help":"","min":-80,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Operating condition","label":"Hot cell temperature","type":"number","unit":"°C","help":"","min":-80,"max":150,"integer":false},{"group":"Operating condition","label":"Panels in series","type":"number","unit":"panels","help":"","min":1,"max":1000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Cell temperature is not necessarily ambient air temperature. Use the Vmp coefficient, not the power coefficient. This linear estimate alone cannot establish startup or MPPT compatibility.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Hot cell conditions can lower a panel's operating voltage even when ambient air temperature looks moderate.","Use the Vmp coefficient and an entered cell temperature. Compare the corrected operating value before assessing the proposed MPPT window."],"steps":["Enter reference maximum power voltage, vmp temperature coefficient and reference cell temperature.","Enter hot cell temperature and panels in series.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation keeps cell temperature distinct from ambient conditions and uses the relevant voltage coefficient.","check":"Cell temperature is not necessarily ambient air temperature. Use the Vmp coefficient, not the power coefficient. This linear estimate alone cannot establish startup or MPPT compatibility.","faq":[{"q":"Can I use the panel's power coefficient instead?","a":"No. This correction needs the Vmp voltage coefficient. A power coefficient describes a different rating."},{"q":"What should I check before using Hot Temperature Vmp Calculator?","a":"Check Reference maximum power voltage, Vmp temperature coefficient, Reference cell temperature and Hot cell temperature. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_voltage_drop","name":"DC Cable Voltage Drop Calculator","description":"Estimate resistive DC drop in a two conductor circuit from an entered conductor area.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/voltage-drop-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_voltage_drop/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_voltage_drop.md","page_id":237,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_voltage_drop","inputs":[{"group":"Circuit","label":"DC source voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Circuit","label":"Current","type":"number","unit":"A","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Circuit","label":"One way cable length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Conductor","label":"Conductor cross section","type":"number","unit":"mm²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Conductor","label":"Resistivity at entered condition","type":"number","unit":"Ω mm²/m","help":"Default is an illustrative copper approximation; adjust for material and temperature.","min":1.0e-5,"max":1,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Loop length is twice the one way distance. This is resistance arithmetic only, not cable ampacity, breaker selection or an installation recommendation. Connections and circuit topology can add losses.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["DC voltage drop depends on conductor resistance across the full outgoing and return path.","Enter current, conductor area and one way distance. Compare the estimated drop and loss before seeking the separate cable and protection checks."],"steps":["Enter DC source voltage, current and one way cable length.","Enter conductor cross section and resistivity at entered condition.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The loop length basis helps avoid calculating resistance for only half of a two conductor circuit.","check":"Loop length is twice the one way distance. This is resistance arithmetic only, not cable ampacity, breaker selection or an installation recommendation. Connections and circuit topology can add losses.","faq":[{"q":"Does this choose a safe cable size?","a":"No. Ampacity, installation conditions, connections and protection requirements need separate assessment."},{"q":"What should I check before using DC Cable Voltage Drop Calculator?","a":"Check DC source voltage, Current, One way cable length and Conductor cross section. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_efficiency","name":"Solar Loss Chain Calculator","description":"Multiply successive loss factors and see how each stage changes energy.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/efficiency-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_efficiency/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_efficiency.md","page_id":238,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_efficiency","inputs":[{"group":"Starting energy","label":"Energy before losses","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Sequential loss stages","label":"Stage","type":"text"},{"group":"Sequential loss stages","label":"Loss at this stage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Percent losses act on the remaining energy at each stage. Include a battery stage only for energy routed through the battery; direct solar energy should not incur it.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Successive losses act on the energy remaining after the previous stage. Adding every loss percentage can misstate the result.","List the energy path and enter each stage once. Include battery losses only for energy actually routed through storage."],"steps":["Enter energy before losses.","Add the entries in sequential loss stages as separate rows. Include stage and loss at this stage for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The stage by stage view explains how an initial energy amount changes along the chosen path.","check":"Percent losses act on the remaining energy at each stage. Include a battery stage only for energy routed through the battery; direct solar energy should not incur it.","faq":[{"q":"Should direct solar energy include battery losses?","a":"Not if it bypasses the battery. Model the path the energy actually follows."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Loss Chain Calculator?","a":"Check Energy before losses, Stage and Loss at this stage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_roof","name":"Roof Panel Footprint Planner","description":"Fit modules into an entered rectangular usable area in two orientations.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/roof-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_roof/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_roof.md","page_id":239,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_roof","inputs":[{"group":"Usable rectangle","label":"Usable roof length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Usable rectangle","label":"Usable roof width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Module and gaps","label":"Module length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":20,"integer":false},{"group":"Module and gaps","label":"Module width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":20,"integer":false},{"group":"Module and gaps","label":"Clear gap between modules","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Module and gaps","label":"Module power","type":"number","unit":"W","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Flat rectangular footprint only. Define usable area after setbacks and access. Tilt rows, shadows, structure, fire access and wind loads need a site design. The larger fit is not structural approval.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["A roof panel count needs a usable rectangle after access and setbacks, rather than the building's full footprint.","Enter module dimensions and the measured available area. Compare both orientations before planning tilt rows, shadows and structural requirements."],"steps":["Enter usable roof length and usable roof width.","Enter module length, module width, clear gap between modules and module power.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The orientation comparison gives a clear footprint check without implying that the larger fit is the approved layout.","check":"Flat rectangular footprint only. Define usable area after setbacks and access. Tilt rows, shadows, structure, fire access and wind loads need a site design. The larger fit is not structural approval.","faq":[{"q":"Does the fit prove the roof can support the panels?","a":"No. Structure, wind loads, fire access and installation details require a site design."},{"q":"What should I check before using Roof Panel Footprint Planner?","a":"Check Usable roof length, Usable roof width, Module length and Module width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_row_spacing","name":"Tilted Panel Row Spacing Calculator","description":"Calculate simple geometric shadow clearance for an entered solar elevation angle.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/row-spacing-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_row_spacing/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_row_spacing.md","page_id":240,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_row_spacing","inputs":[{"group":"Geometry","label":"Panel slope length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Geometry","label":"Panel tilt","type":"number","unit":"degrees","help":"","min":0,"max":89,"integer":false},{"group":"Geometry","label":"Design solar elevation","type":"number","unit":"degrees","help":"","min":0.01,"max":89.99,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Ideal level ground with sun normal to the row direction. Elevation must come from a site and time calculation; this tool does not derive it from a city. Terrain, azimuth and multiple structures alter shading.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Tilted rows can cast shadows into the space behind them. The relevant solar angle needs a site and time basis.","Enter panel geometry, tilt and a suitable elevation angle. Review the ideal clearance before adding terrain and orientation considerations."],"steps":["Enter panel slope length, panel tilt and design solar elevation.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The geometric view helps explain why tilt and sun elevation change the spacing requirement.","check":"Ideal level ground with sun normal to the row direction. Elevation must come from a site and time calculation; this tool does not derive it from a city. Terrain, azimuth and multiple structures alter shading.","faq":[{"q":"Is solar elevation calculated from a city name?","a":"No. Supply it from a suitable site and time calculation. The tool does not derive local sun angles."},{"q":"What should I check before using Tilted Panel Row Spacing Calculator?","a":"Check Panel slope length, Panel tilt and Design solar elevation. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_energy_convert","name":"Battery Energy Unit Converter","description":"Convert between voltage and Ah, Wh, kWh and electricity units.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/energy-convert-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_energy_convert/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_energy_convert.md","page_id":241,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_energy_convert","inputs":[{"group":"Direction","label":"Known energy","type":"select","choices":{"ah":"Voltage and Ah to energy","kwh":"kWh to required Ah"}},{"group":"Direction","label":"Amp hours","type":"number","unit":"Ah","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Direction","label":"Energy","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Direction","label":"Nominal voltage","type":"number","unit":"V","help":"","min":0.01,"max":2000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"One electricity unit means one kWh. Conversion is nominal energy only and excludes DoD, health, inverter losses and idle draw.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Amp hours become an energy quantity only when a voltage is supplied. Electricity units use kilowatt hours.","Enter the nominal battery values and select the conversion basis. Apply usable capacity and inverter losses in their own worksheets."],"steps":["Choose known energy. Enter amp hours, energy and nominal voltage.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The converter provides a common nominal energy unit for comparing differently labelled capacities.","check":"One electricity unit means one kWh. Conversion is nominal energy only and excludes DoD, health, inverter losses and idle draw.","faq":[{"q":"Does one electricity unit equal one kWh?","a":"Yes. This conversion uses one unit as one kilowatt hour, without deducting battery or inverter losses."},{"q":"What should I check before using Battery Energy Unit Converter?","a":"Check Known energy, Amp hours, Energy and Nominal voltage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_battery_compare","name":"Battery Option Comparison Worksheet","description":"Compare entered purchase costs per usable cycle and throughput energy.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/battery-compare-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_battery_compare/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_battery_compare.md","page_id":242,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_battery_compare","inputs":[{"group":"Battery options","label":"Option","type":"text"},{"group":"Battery options","label":"Purchase quote","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery options","label":"Nominal capacity","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery options","label":"Usable DoD","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Battery options","label":"Assumed equivalent cycles","type":"number","unit":"cycles","help":"","min":1,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Battery options","label":"Delivery efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Entered cycle ratings are assumptions, not verified life expectancy. Constant usable capacity ignores degradation, calendar aging, finance and replacement labour. This compares arithmetic, not chemistry suitability.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Battery purchase price can be compared with usable cycle energy, provided the cycle assumptions remain visible.","Enter rated energy, discharge assumptions and quoted cost for each option. Review throughput cost alongside the conditions behind the cycle rating."],"steps":["Add the entries in battery options as separate rows. Include option, purchase quote, nominal capacity, usable DoD, assumed equivalent cycles and delivery efficiency for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The side by side worksheet helps expose whether a price comparison relies on very different life assumptions.","check":"Entered cycle ratings are assumptions, not verified life expectancy. Constant usable capacity ignores degradation, calendar aging, finance and replacement labour. This compares arithmetic, not chemistry suitability.","faq":[{"q":"Are cycle ratings verified life predictions?","a":"No. They are entered assumptions. Degradation, calendar aging and operating conditions can change real service life."},{"q":"What should I check before using Battery Option Comparison Worksheet?","a":"Check Option, Purchase quote, Nominal capacity and Usable DoD. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_quote","name":"Solar Installation Quote Builder","description":"Total a manually priced bill of materials in PKR without fetching market rates.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/quote-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_quote/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_quote.md","page_id":243,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_quote","inputs":[{"group":"Whole quote additions","label":"Installation labour","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Whole quote additions","label":"Other included cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Whole quote additions","label":"Contingency on subtotal","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Bill of materials","label":"Item","type":"text"},{"group":"Bill of materials","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Bill of materials","label":"Quoted unit cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Quotes are placeholders, not current Pakistan prices. Include applicable taxes and charges explicitly in the quoted amounts or other costs. This tool does not assess a tax rate.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["A solar quote is easier to check when panels, equipment and other charges are listed separately.","Build the bill of materials using your actual quoted prices. Include applicable charges explicitly rather than treating example values as market rates."],"steps":["Enter installation labour, other included cost and contingency on subtotal.","Add the entries in bill of materials as separate rows. Include item, quantity and quoted unit cost for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Item quantities and rates keep the PKR total traceable when comparing installation offers.","check":"Quotes are placeholders, not current Pakistan prices. Include applicable taxes and charges explicitly in the quoted amounts or other costs. This tool does not assess a tax rate.","faq":[{"q":"Are current Pakistan prices fetched?","a":"No. All pricing comes from your inputs. Obtain quotes matching the intended equipment and installation scope."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Installation Quote Builder?","a":"Check Installation labour, Other included cost, Contingency on subtotal and Item. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_savings","name":"Solar Self Consumption and Export Savings Calculator","description":"Value entered solar use and exports without assuming a current utility tariff.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/savings-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_savings/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_savings.md","page_id":244,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_savings","inputs":[{"group":"Period energy balance","label":"Solar AC generation","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Period energy balance","label":"Site electricity consumption","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Period energy balance","label":"Share of solar used on site","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Entered values","label":"Avoided marginal import value","type":"number","unit":"PKR/kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Entered values","label":"Export compensation assumption","type":"number","unit":"PKR/kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Entered values","label":"Period extra operating cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"No utility rates or net metering rules are assumed. Self use cannot exceed site load. Export value may not be available under your connection agreement. Fixed charges and slab taxes are not modelled as a bill.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Solar value depends on how much energy is used on site and whether exported energy has a payable value.","Enter your consumption and export assumptions with the applicable rates. Compare the components without treating the result as a complete utility bill."],"steps":["Enter solar AC generation, site electricity consumption and share of solar used on site.","Enter avoided marginal import value, export compensation assumption and period extra operating cost.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Self use and export stay separate, making the rate basis easier to review.","check":"No utility rates or net metering rules are assumed. Self use cannot exceed site load. Export value may not be available under your connection agreement. Fixed charges and slab taxes are not modelled as a bill.","faq":[{"q":"Does it assume current net metering rules?","a":"No. Enter only export value available under your own connection agreement. Fixed charges and slab taxes are not automatically modelled."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Self Consumption and Export Savings Calculator?","a":"Check Solar AC generation, Site electricity consumption, Share of solar used on site and Avoided marginal import value. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_payback","name":"Solar Simple Payback Calculator","description":"Compare an entered capital outlay with annual net savings.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/payback-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_payback/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_payback.md","page_id":245,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_payback","inputs":[{"group":"Capital and annual benefit","label":"Total upfront cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Capital and annual benefit","label":"Annual gross savings","type":"number","unit":"PKR/year","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Capital and annual benefit","label":"Annual extra cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR/year","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Simple undiscounted payback assumes constant annual savings and costs. It ignores financing, degradation, replacement timing and tariff changes. Nonpositive net savings has no finite payback.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Simple payback compares the initial outlay with a constant yearly net saving. It is a first recovery measure rather than a full investment model.","Enter installation cost, annual value and yearly expenses. Read the period only when net savings are positive."],"steps":["Enter total upfront cost, annual gross savings and annual extra cost.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The explicit net saving helps you see how maintenance or other annual costs change the basic recovery estimate.","check":"Simple undiscounted payback assumes constant annual savings and costs. It ignores financing, degradation, replacement timing and tariff changes. Nonpositive net savings has no finite payback.","faq":[{"q":"Does payback include financing or degradation?","a":"No. Those require a more detailed cashflow model rather than this constant annual calculation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Simple Payback Calculator?","a":"Check Total upfront cost, Annual gross savings and Annual extra cost. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_lifecycle","name":"Solar Lifetime Cashflow Worksheet","description":"Model annual savings, degradation, maintenance and a one time replacement.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/lifecycle-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_lifecycle/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_lifecycle.md","page_id":246,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_lifecycle","inputs":[{"group":"Investment and horizon","label":"Initial cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Investment and horizon","label":"Study horizon","type":"number","unit":"years","help":"","min":1,"max":50,"integer":true},{"group":"Investment and horizon","label":"Annual discount rate","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":50,"integer":false},{"group":"Benefit and costs","label":"First year gross savings","type":"number","unit":"PKR/year","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Benefit and costs","label":"Annual savings degradation","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99,"integer":false},{"group":"Benefit and costs","label":"Fixed annual cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR/year","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Benefit and costs","label":"One time replacement cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Benefit and costs","label":"Replacement year (0 means none)","type":"number","unit":"year","help":"","min":0,"max":50,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Discounted cashflow from user assumptions, not a financial recommendation. Savings degrade from year two; no tariff escalation or salvage is assumed. Replacement must fall within the horizon or be disabled.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Solar savings and expenses can change across the system's lifetime. A yearly worksheet makes later costs visible.","Choose the horizon and enter degradation, maintenance, discounting and replacement timing. Compare annual and cumulative figures under those assumptions."],"steps":["Enter initial cost, study horizon and annual discount rate.","Enter first year gross savings, annual savings degradation, fixed annual cost, one time replacement cost and replacement year (0 means none).","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A replacement cost appears in its chosen year instead of being hidden inside a constant annual payback figure.","check":"Discounted cashflow from user assumptions, not a financial recommendation. Savings degrade from year two; no tariff escalation or salvage is assumed. Replacement must fall within the horizon or be disabled.","faq":[{"q":"Is the cashflow a guaranteed return?","a":"No. It depends on entered assumptions. Tariff changes, financing and unmodelled costs can alter actual results."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Lifetime Cashflow Worksheet?","a":"Check Initial cost, Study horizon, Annual discount rate and First year gross savings. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_degradation","name":"Solar Output Degradation Planner","description":"Track an entered first year yield under a constant annual reduction.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/degradation-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_degradation/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_degradation.md","page_id":247,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_degradation","inputs":[{"group":"Yield and duration","label":"First year output","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Yield and duration","label":"Annual output reduction","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99,"integer":false},{"group":"Yield and duration","label":"Study years","type":"number","unit":"years","help":"","min":1,"max":50,"integer":true}],"limitations":"First year output is used unchanged. The reduction compounds from year two. This is not a warranty interpretation or predicted module life; temperature and site performance remain outside the model.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["An annual reduction compounds from the output already reduced in the previous year.","Enter first year energy and a constant degradation rate, then inspect the year by year production. Keep the initial year unchanged on this basis."],"steps":["Enter first year output, annual output reduction and study years.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The production series shows the difference between compounding a reduction and subtracting the same energy amount every year.","check":"First year output is used unchanged. The reduction compounds from year two. This is not a warranty interpretation or predicted module life; temperature and site performance remain outside the model.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a panel warranty interpretation?","a":"No. It is an entered reduction model. Warranty terms and observed site performance need separate review."},{"q":"What should I check before using Solar Output Degradation Planner?","a":"Check First year output, Annual output reduction and Study years. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"solar_offgrid","name":"Off Grid Energy and Storage Balance","description":"Estimate array and nominal storage for a daily AC demand and autonomy allowance.","category":"Solar & Battery","category_id":"solar","url":"https://whatson.pk/offgrid-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_offgrid/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/solar_offgrid.md","page_id":248,"shortcode":"whatson_solar_offgrid","inputs":[{"group":"Demand and autonomy","label":"Daily AC consumption","type":"number","unit":"kWh","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Demand and autonomy","label":"Autonomy days","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Demand and autonomy","label":"Energy allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Solar and storage","label":"Design peak sun hours","type":"number","unit":"hours/day","help":"","min":0.01,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Solar and storage","label":"Solar to AC yield factor","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Solar and storage","label":"Usable battery DoD","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Solar and storage","label":"Battery to AC efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Array covers entered daily demand and allowance; it does not include accelerated recovery after depleted autonomy days. Storage is nominal energy. Weather sequences, dispatch control, startup and equipment compatibility need a detailed design.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-01T18:56:36+00:00","intro":["Off grid planning needs both daily generation and storage for the chosen autonomy period. They serve different parts of the energy budget.","Enter AC demand, sun hours and losses, then compare array and nominal storage requirements. Keep recovery after depleted storage in a separate design."],"steps":["Enter daily AC consumption, autonomy days and energy allowance.","Enter design peak sun hours, solar to AC yield factor, usable battery DoD and battery to AC efficiency.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The energy balance makes demand and autonomy assumptions visible before more detailed system planning.","check":"Array covers entered daily demand and allowance; it does not include accelerated recovery after depleted autonomy days. Storage is nominal energy. Weather sequences, dispatch control, startup and equipment compatibility need a detailed design.","faq":[{"q":"Does the array include accelerated storage recovery?","a":"No. It covers entered daily demand and allowance. Recovery after depleted autonomy days needs additional analysis."},{"q":"What should I check before using Off Grid Energy and Storage Balance?","a":"Check Daily AC consumption, Autonomy days, Energy allowance and Design peak sun hours. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_bed_soil","name":"Raised Bed Soil Calculator","description":"Work out fill litres, whole bags and PKR cost for one or more beds.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-bed-soil-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_bed_soil/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_bed_soil.md","page_id":250,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_bed_soil","inputs":[{"group":"Measured growing area","label":"Inside length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured growing area","label":"Inside width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Fill and purchase","label":"Fill depth","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Fill and purchase","label":"Identical beds","type":"number","unit":"beds","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Fill and purchase","label":"Extra loose material","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Fill and purchase","label":"Bag volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Fill and purchase","label":"Price per bag","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Uses inside dimensions. Extra volume is an allowance, not a measured settlement rate.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["Raised bed soil is bought by volume, so the inside dimensions matter more than the bed's outer footprint.","Measure the fill depth and each matching bed, then compare litres with the bag size available locally."],"steps":["Enter inside length and inside width.","Enter fill depth, identical beds, extra loose material, bag volume and price per bag.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The purchase view links measured fill to whole bags and your entered PKR quote.","check":"Uses inside dimensions. Extra volume is an allowance, not a measured settlement rate.","faq":[{"q":"Is the extra allowance a measured settlement rate?","a":"No. It is your chosen loose material allowance. Revise it for the actual material and filling plan."},{"q":"What should I check before using Raised Bed Soil Calculator?","a":"Check Inside length, Inside width, Fill depth and Identical beds. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_pot_volume","name":"Pot Volume Calculator","description":"Compare cylindrical, tapered round and rectangular containers.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-pot-volume-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_pot_volume/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_pot_volume.md","page_id":251,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_pot_volume","inputs":[{"group":"Container shape","label":"Shape","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"tapered":"Tapered round pot","cylinder":"Round cylinder","box":"Rectangular planter"}},{"group":"Container shape","label":"Top inside diameter","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Container shape","label":"Bottom inside diameter","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Container shape","label":"Inside length","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Container shape","label":"Inside width","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Usable fill","label":"Inside height","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Usable fill","label":"Unfilled space at top","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0,"max":999,"integer":false},{"group":"Usable fill","label":"Containers","type":"number","unit":"pots","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Tapered fill uses the diameter at the actual fill height. Soil displacement by existing roots is excluded.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["Containers with sloping sides hold a different volume from straight cylinders of similar height.","Choose the matching shape and measure the fill level you intend to use, not necessarily the full container height."],"steps":["Choose shape. Enter top inside diameter, bottom inside diameter, inside length and inside width.","Enter inside height, unfilled space at top and containers.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Shape choices keep tapered pots from being treated as straight sided containers.","check":"Tapered fill uses the diameter at the actual fill height. Soil displacement by existing roots is excluded.","faq":[{"q":"Is existing root volume deducted?","a":"No. Established roots and other displaced volume need a separate adjustment to the fill requirement."},{"q":"What should I check before using Pot Volume Calculator?","a":"Check Shape, Top inside diameter, Bottom inside diameter and Inside length. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_pot_mix","name":"Potting Mix Ratio Calculator","description":"Split any volume into your chosen ingredient parts and bag sizes.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-pot-mix-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_pot_mix/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_pot_mix.md","page_id":252,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_pot_mix","inputs":[{"group":"Batch size","label":"Finished mix volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Mix ingredients","label":"Ingredient","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Mix ingredients","label":"Volume parts","type":"number","unit":"parts","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Mix ingredients","label":"Package volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Mix ingredients","label":"Package price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Parts are volume ratios. This worksheet does not recommend a universal growing medium.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["A potting mix ratio divides the final volume among your chosen components.","Enter volume parts and bag sizes for the ingredients you actually intend to use. Review each component before buying."],"steps":["Enter finished mix volume.","Add the entries in mix ingredients as separate rows. Include ingredient, volume parts, package volume and package price for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Visible component volumes make a blend easier to resize without changing its proportions.","check":"Parts are volume ratios. This worksheet does not recommend a universal growing medium.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a recommended mix for every plant?","a":"No. The recipe is your input. Growing medium suitability depends on the plants and conditions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Potting Mix Ratio Calculator?","a":"Check Finished mix volume, Ingredient, Volume parts and Package volume. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_mulch","name":"Mulch Quantity Calculator","description":"Convert uncovered ground and layer depth to loose volume and bags.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-mulch-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_mulch/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_mulch.md","page_id":253,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_mulch","inputs":[{"group":"Coverage","label":"Total bed area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Coverage","label":"Unmulched area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Coverage","label":"Layer depth","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Material order","label":"Extra material","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Material order","label":"Bag volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Material order","label":"Bag price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Leave stems and trunks clear. Layer depth and mulch choice remain your inputs.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["Mulch covers exposed ground, with space left around stems and trunks.","Measure the uncovered area and choose the layer depth. Compare loose volume with the supplied pack size."],"steps":["Enter total bed area, unmulched area and layer depth.","Enter extra material, bag volume and bag price.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The area and depth basis makes the order easier to check than copying another garden's bag count.","check":"Leave stems and trunks clear. Layer depth and mulch choice remain your inputs.","faq":[{"q":"Should trunks be covered in the measured area?","a":"Leave stems and trunks clear as appropriate for the planting. Enter only the area intended for mulch."},{"q":"What should I check before using Mulch Quantity Calculator?","a":"Check Total bed area, Unmulched area, Layer depth and Extra material. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_compost_spread","name":"Compost Top Dressing Calculator","description":"Plan a measured compost layer and delivery weight.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-compost-spread-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_compost_spread/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_compost_spread.md","page_id":254,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_compost_spread","inputs":[{"group":"Spreading plan","label":"Ground area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Spreading plan","label":"Layer depth","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Supplier assumptions","label":"Loose bulk density","type":"number","unit":"kg/m³","help":"","min":1,"max":3000,"integer":false},{"group":"Supplier assumptions","label":"Price per cubic metre","type":"number","unit":"PKR/m³","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Bulk density is entered independently. This does not infer nutrient content from compost volume.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["Top dressing adds a measured compost layer rather than filling an empty bed.","Set the treatment area and depth, then use a delivered bulk density when converting volume to weight."],"steps":["Enter ground area and layer depth.","Enter loose bulk density and price per cubic metre.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate volume and weight figures help compare bagged and bulk delivery offers.","check":"Bulk density is entered independently. This does not infer nutrient content from compost volume.","faq":[{"q":"Does the volume indicate nutrient content?","a":"No. Nutrient analysis depends on the compost material. Volume alone cannot establish its fertilizer value."},{"q":"What should I check before using Compost Top Dressing Calculator?","a":"Check Ground area, Layer depth, Loose bulk density and Price per cubic metre. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_plant_spacing","name":"Plant Spacing Calculator","description":"Count centre points in a rectangle with explicit margins and compare orientations.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-plant-spacing-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_plant_spacing/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_plant_spacing.md","page_id":255,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_plant_spacing","inputs":[{"group":"Measured growing area","label":"Inside length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured growing area","label":"Inside width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Plant centre spacing","label":"Spacing along a row","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Plant centre spacing","label":"Spacing between rows","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Plant centre spacing","label":"Centre setback on every edge","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Rectangular rows only. Spacing is centre to centre; the diagram caps its displayed plants without changing totals.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["Plant count depends on where the centres fit after margins are left around the bed.","Enter centre spacing and edge clearance, then compare the two rectangular orientations."],"steps":["Enter inside length and inside width.","Enter spacing along a row, spacing between rows and centre setback on every edge.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The layout basis helps you mark real plant positions instead of dividing area by an unexplained density.","check":"Rectangular rows only. Spacing is centre to centre; the diagram caps its displayed plants without changing totals.","faq":[{"q":"Does the diagram always show every plant?","a":"Large layouts may cap the displayed points. The reported count still follows the entered dimensions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Plant Spacing Calculator?","a":"Check Inside length, Inside width, Spacing along a row and Spacing between rows. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_bed_layout","name":"Garden Bed Layout Planner","description":"Fit accessible parallel beds and internal paths in a garden rectangle.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-bed-layout-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_bed_layout/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_bed_layout.md","page_id":256,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_bed_layout","inputs":[{"group":"Garden rectangle","label":"Garden length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Garden rectangle","label":"Garden width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Access and bed width","label":"Outside access on all edges","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Access and bed width","label":"Bed width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Access and bed width","label":"Path between beds","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Whole parallel beds are placed across the width. A rotated or mixed arrangement is not optimised.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:11+00:00","intro":["Garden paths use space that cannot also be counted as planted bed area.","Enter the garden rectangle, bed width and path width. Inspect the full parallel beds that fit across it."],"steps":["Enter garden length and garden width.","Enter outside access on all edges, bed width and path between beds.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Keeping paths visible helps compare access space with useful growing area.","check":"Whole parallel beds are placed across the width. A rotated or mixed arrangement is not optimised.","faq":[{"q":"Will it optimise mixed or rotated beds?","a":"No. It fits whole parallel beds in the stated direction. Other arrangements need a separate layout."},{"q":"What should I check before using Garden Bed Layout Planner?","a":"Check Garden length, Garden width, Outside access on all edges and Bed width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_seed_quantity","name":"Seed Quantity Calculator","description":"Allow for expected germination, establishment and spare seeds.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-seed-quantity-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_seed_quantity/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_seed_quantity.md","page_id":257,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_seed_quantity","inputs":[{"group":"Plant target","label":"Final plants required","type":"number","unit":"plants","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Plant target","label":"Expected germination","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Plant target","label":"Survival after germination","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Seed purchase","label":"Extra seeds","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Seed purchase","label":"Seeds per packet","type":"number","unit":"seeds","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Seed purchase","label":"Packet price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Expected averages cannot guarantee the final plant count. Use the seed lot and your own establishment record.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["The target transplant count can be greater than the number of seeds that actually germinate and establish.","Use your seed lot's germination information and a realistic establishment allowance before adding spare seeds."],"steps":["Enter final plants required, expected germination and survival after germination.","Enter extra seeds, seeds per packet and packet price.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate losses show why the sowing quantity is greater than the final plant target.","check":"Expected averages cannot guarantee the final plant count. Use the seed lot and your own establishment record.","faq":[{"q":"Does the seed count guarantee enough plants?","a":"No. The calculation uses expected averages. Real germination and establishment can differ."},{"q":"What should I check before using Seed Quantity Calculator?","a":"Check Final plants required, Expected germination, Survival after germination and Extra seeds. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_seed_trays","name":"Seed Tray Planner","description":"Allocate whole trays, cells and seed starting medium.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-seed-trays-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_seed_trays/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_seed_trays.md","page_id":258,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_seed_trays","inputs":[{"group":"Propagation target","label":"Transplants needed","type":"number","unit":"plants","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Propagation target","label":"Expected usable cell share","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Tray specification","label":"Cells per tray","type":"number","unit":"cells","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Tray specification","label":"Seeds per filled cell","type":"number","unit":"seeds","help":"","min":1,"max":100,"integer":true},{"group":"Tray specification","label":"Medium per cell","type":"number","unit":"mL","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Fills only the cells needed for the expected target, not every purchased tray cell.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Purchased tray capacity and the number of cells you plan to sow are not necessarily equal.","Enter the transplant target, expected losses and tray size. Check medium volume for the cells actually needed."],"steps":["Enter transplants needed and expected usable cell share.","Enter cells per tray, seeds per filled cell and medium per cell.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The split keeps unused purchased cells from inflating the seed starting medium estimate.","check":"Fills only the cells needed for the expected target, not every purchased tray cell.","faq":[{"q":"Are all cells in the final tray filled?","a":"Only the cells needed for the expected target are counted as filled. Spare capacity remains visible."},{"q":"What should I check before using Seed Tray Planner?","a":"Check Transplants needed, Expected usable cell share, Cells per tray and Seeds per filled cell. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_germination","name":"Seed Germination Test Calculator","description":"Measure a seed lot test and convert the observed rate to a planning count.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-germination-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_germination/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_germination.md","page_id":259,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_germination","inputs":[{"group":"Observed sample","label":"Seeds tested","type":"number","unit":"seeds","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Observed sample","label":"Seeds germinated","type":"number","unit":"seeds","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Next sowing","label":"Desired germinated seeds","type":"number","unit":"seedlings","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Sample percentage is an observation, not a confidence interval or a guarantee for future sowings.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A small germination test records the performance of the seeds tested under those conditions.","Enter seeds tested and germinated, then use the observed percentage as a planning reference."],"steps":["Enter seeds tested and seeds germinated.","Enter desired germinated seeds.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The sample result gives a visible basis for adjusting the next sowing quantity.","check":"Sample percentage is an observation, not a confidence interval or a guarantee for future sowings.","faq":[{"q":"Is the percentage a confidence interval?","a":"No. It is an observed sample percentage, not a statistical guarantee for future sowings."},{"q":"What should I check before using Seed Germination Test Calculator?","a":"Check Seeds tested, Seeds germinated and Desired germinated seeds. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_thinning","name":"Seedling Thinning Calculator","description":"Count spaced plants along a row after leaving clear ends.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-thinning-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_thinning/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_thinning.md","page_id":260,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_thinning","inputs":[{"group":"Row measurements","label":"Row length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Row measurements","label":"Setback at each end","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Row measurements","label":"Final plant spacing","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Current population","label":"Existing seedlings","type":"number","unit":"seedlings","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Counts include a plant at each usable interval endpoint when the spacing fits exactly. Avoid uprooting neighbouring roots.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A row's usable length begins after clear spaces are left at both ends.","Enter the desired centre spacing and compare the final positions with the seedlings currently present."],"steps":["Enter row length, setback at each end and final plant spacing.","Enter existing seedlings.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Endpoint handling makes the count easier to check when spacing fits the row exactly.","check":"Counts include a plant at each usable interval endpoint when the spacing fits exactly. Avoid uprooting neighbouring roots.","faq":[{"q":"Should I pull neighbouring roots when thinning?","a":"Avoid disturbing the retained seedlings. Choose a thinning method suited to the crop and root condition."},{"q":"What should I check before using Seedling Thinning Calculator?","a":"Check Row length, Setback at each end, Final plant spacing and Existing seedlings. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_lawn_seed","name":"Lawn Seed Calculator","description":"Use the supplier rate for new lawn or overseeding and price whole packs.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-lawn-seed-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_lawn_seed/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_lawn_seed.md","page_id":261,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_lawn_seed","inputs":[{"group":"Seeding coverage","label":"Lawn area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Seeding coverage","label":"Label seeding rate","type":"number","unit":"g/m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Seeding coverage","label":"Extra seed","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Purchase packs","label":"Pack mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Purchase packs","label":"Pack price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Choose the rate for your grass variety and task from its supplier. No grass suitability claim is made.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["New lawns and overseeding can use different supplier application rates.","Measure the area and enter the rate for your grass variety and task, then compare whole packs."],"steps":["Enter lawn area, label seeding rate and extra seed.","Enter pack mass and pack price.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The editable rate keeps the seed estimate connected to the product being purchased.","check":"Choose the rate for your grass variety and task from its supplier. No grass suitability claim is made.","faq":[{"q":"Does the calculator choose a grass for my location?","a":"No. Grass suitability and sowing timing need local advice and the product's guidance."},{"q":"What should I check before using Lawn Seed Calculator?","a":"Check Lawn area, Label seeding rate, Extra seed and Pack mass. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_sod","name":"Turf Roll Calculator","description":"Plan whole rolls, cutting allowance and installed material cost.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-sod-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_sod/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_sod.md","page_id":262,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_sod","inputs":[{"group":"Lawn coverage","label":"Lawn area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Lawn coverage","label":"Cutting allowance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Roll and price","label":"Roll length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Roll and price","label":"Roll width","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Roll and price","label":"Price per roll","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Area estimate does not create a cutting plan. Delivery, ground preparation and labour are excluded.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Turf rolls cover a stated area, but trimming can increase the whole roll purchase.","Enter the lawn area, roll coverage and cutting allowance before comparing material cost."],"steps":["Enter lawn area and cutting allowance.","Enter roll length, roll width and price per roll.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Whole roll rounding gives a practical order quantity while keeping the measured area visible.","check":"Area estimate does not create a cutting plan. Delivery, ground preparation and labour are excluded.","faq":[{"q":"Are preparation and installation labour included?","a":"No. Add delivery, ground preparation and labour to a separate budget if needed."},{"q":"What should I check before using Turf Roll Calculator?","a":"Check Lawn area, Cutting allowance, Roll length and Roll width. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_water_need","name":"Crop Water Budget Calculator","description":"Convert entered ETo, crop factor, effective rain and irrigation efficiency to litres.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-water-need-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_water_need/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_water_need.md","page_id":263,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_water_need","inputs":[{"group":"Weather and crop inputs","label":"Reference ET per day","type":"number","unit":"mm/day","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Weather and crop inputs","label":"Entered crop coefficient","type":"number","unit":"Kc","help":"","min":0.01,"max":3,"integer":false},{"group":"Weather and crop inputs","label":"Days in period","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":365,"integer":true},{"group":"Weather and crop inputs","label":"Effective rain across period","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Irrigated area","label":"Garden area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Irrigated area","label":"Application efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"ETc equals ETo × Kc. ETo and Kc are entered values, not weather forecasts; effective rain is already net of losses.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Crop water demand starts with entered weather and crop factors, then rain offsets part of the requirement.","Supply ETo, crop factor and effective rainfall on matching units. Apply efficiency to compare irrigation litres."],"steps":["Enter reference ET per day, entered crop coefficient, days in period and effective rain across period.","Enter garden area and application efficiency.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The staged calculation separates crop demand from the larger water amount needed after application losses.","check":"ETc equals ETo × Kc. ETo and Kc are entered values, not weather forecasts; effective rain is already net of losses.","faq":[{"q":"Is rainfall fetched automatically?","a":"No. Enter suitable values for the period and site. Effective rain should already account for its relevant losses."},{"q":"What should I check before using Crop Water Budget Calculator?","a":"Check Reference ET per day, Entered crop coefficient, Days in period and Effective rain across period. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_drip_runtime","name":"Drip Irrigation Runtime Calculator","description":"Match a session volume to emitters, measured flow and application efficiency.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-drip-runtime-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_drip_runtime/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_drip_runtime.md","page_id":264,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_drip_runtime","inputs":[{"group":"Root zone target","label":"Net water required this session","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Root zone target","label":"Application efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Operating zone","label":"Emitters running together","type":"number","unit":"emitters","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Operating zone","label":"Flow per emitter","type":"number","unit":"L/hour","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use delivered flow at operating pressure. Runtime does not prove uniformity or prevent runoff.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A drip session's duration depends on the flow actually delivered by the operating emitters.","Set the session water target, emitter count and measured flow. Review the efficiency allowance before using the time."],"steps":["Enter net water required this session and application efficiency.","Enter emitters running together and flow per emitter.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Flow and water target remain visible, helping explain a longer or shorter watering session.","check":"Use delivered flow at operating pressure. Runtime does not prove uniformity or prevent runoff.","faq":[{"q":"Does runtime prove even watering?","a":"No. Pressure variation, blockage and emitter distribution require separate checks."},{"q":"What should I check before using Drip Irrigation Runtime Calculator?","a":"Check Net water required this session, Application efficiency, Emitters running together and Flow per emitter. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_drip_flow","name":"Drip Zone Flow Calculator","description":"Total operating emitters across several lines and compare a measured supply.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-drip-flow-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_drip_flow/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_drip_flow.md","page_id":265,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_drip_flow","inputs":[{"group":"Supply check","label":"Available flow at operating pressure","type":"number","unit":"L/hour","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Zone lines","label":"Line name","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Zone lines","label":"Emitter count","type":"number","unit":"emitters","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true},{"group":"Zone lines","label":"Each emitter flow","type":"number","unit":"L/hour","help":"","min":0.001,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Lines listed are assumed to run together. A flow check alone does not size a pump or pipe.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Several drip lines running together draw more water than one line on its own.","List the operating emitters across the zone and compare their combined demand with measured supply."],"steps":["Enter available flow at operating pressure.","Add the entries in zone lines as separate rows. Include line name, emitter count and each emitter flow for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The zone schedule avoids comparing a whole system with the flow of only one emitter.","check":"Lines listed are assumed to run together. A flow check alone does not size a pump or pipe.","faq":[{"q":"Does a matching flow size the pump?","a":"No. Pressure, pipe losses and operating conditions also matter. This is a flow comparison."},{"q":"What should I check before using Drip Zone Flow Calculator?","a":"Check Available flow at operating pressure, Line name, Emitter count and Each emitter flow. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_tank_days","name":"Garden Water Tank Calculator","description":"Estimate usable storage, daily consumption and refill interval.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-tank-days-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_tank_days/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_tank_days.md","page_id":266,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_tank_days","inputs":[{"group":"Storage","label":"Tank capacity","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Storage","label":"Unavailable reserve","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99.99,"integer":false},{"group":"Daily use","label":"Garden water use","type":"number","unit":"L/day","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Daily use","label":"Other daily draw","type":"number","unit":"L/day","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Assumes constant daily draw and no incoming water. Stored rainwater and drinking water need separate suitability checks.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A water tank provides storage days only in relation to the garden's daily draw.","Enter usable storage and a constant consumption estimate, then compare the refill interval."],"steps":["Enter tank capacity and unavailable reserve.","Enter garden water use and other daily draw.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The result distinguishes tank capacity from the number of watering days it can support.","check":"Assumes constant daily draw and no incoming water. Stored rainwater and drinking water need separate suitability checks.","faq":[{"q":"Is incoming water included?","a":"No. The model assumes no incoming supply during the counted period."},{"q":"What should I check before using Garden Water Tank Calculator?","a":"Check Tank capacity, Unavailable reserve, Garden water use and Other daily draw. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_rain_harvest","name":"Rainwater Harvest Calculator","description":"Estimate collected rain volume, first flush loss and remaining tank space.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-rain-harvest-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_rain_harvest/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_rain_harvest.md","page_id":267,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_rain_harvest","inputs":[{"group":"Catchment event","label":"Horizontal roof catchment","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Catchment event","label":"Event rain depth","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Catchment event","label":"Runoff collection share","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Catchment event","label":"First flush volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Tank state","label":"Tank capacity","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Tank state","label":"Water already in tank","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Collection arithmetic does not assess water quality. Overflow is water that does not fit after the first flush.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Rain falling on a catchment is not all stored in the tank. Collection losses and first flush reduce the available volume.","Enter rainfall, catchment area and collection assumptions, then compare the remaining tank space."],"steps":["Enter horizontal roof catchment, event rain depth, runoff collection share and first flush volume.","Enter tank capacity and water already in tank.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Collection and overflow are separated, useful when checking whether a larger tank could capture more of the event.","check":"Collection arithmetic does not assess water quality. Overflow is water that does not fit after the first flush.","faq":[{"q":"Does collected volume mean potable water?","a":"No. The calculation does not assess water quality or treatment needs."},{"q":"What should I check before using Rainwater Harvest Calculator?","a":"Check Horizontal roof catchment, Event rain depth, Runoff collection share and First flush volume. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_sprinkler","name":"Sprinkler Catch Can Calculator","description":"Measure application rate and low quarter distribution uniformity.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-sprinkler-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_sprinkler/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_sprinkler.md","page_id":268,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_sprinkler","inputs":[{"group":"Test duration and target","label":"Catch can test duration","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1440,"integer":false},{"group":"Test duration and target","label":"Desired average depth","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured catch depths","label":"Can label","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Measured catch depths","label":"Caught depth","type":"number","unit":"mm","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use equal cans spread across the irrigated area. Low quarter uses the lowest ceil(n/4) cans, stated explicitly.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Catch cans show how much water reaches different parts of an irrigated area.","Use equal cans spread across the area and enter the collection duration. Compare application rate and the low quarter result."],"steps":["Enter catch can test duration and desired average depth.","Add the entries in measured catch depths as separate rows. Include can label and caught depth for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Measured collection gives a practical basis for reviewing distribution rather than assuming each spot receives equal water.","check":"Use equal cans spread across the irrigated area. Low quarter uses the lowest ceil(n/4) cans, stated explicitly.","faq":[{"q":"Which cans form the low quarter?","a":"The calculation uses the lowest rounded up quarter of the can count, with the convention stated in the result."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sprinkler Catch Can Calculator?","a":"Check Catch can test duration, Desired average depth, Can label and Caught depth. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_soil_water","name":"Soil Water Storage Calculator","description":"Estimate root zone available water and refill volume from soil measurements.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-soil-water-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_soil_water/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_soil_water.md","page_id":269,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_soil_water","inputs":[{"group":"Measured soil properties","label":"Field capacity by volume","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured soil properties","label":"Wilting point by volume","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":99.99,"integer":false},{"group":"Measured soil properties","label":"Root depth","type":"number","unit":"cm","help":"","min":0.1,"max":500,"integer":false},{"group":"Irrigation trigger","label":"Allowed depletion share","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Irrigation trigger","label":"Growing area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Irrigation trigger","label":"Application efficiency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Field capacity and wilting point must come from suitable soil measurements. This is not a pH or soil amendment calculator.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["The root zone can store available water only within the soil's measured capacity.","Enter suitable field capacity, wilting point and rooting depth values. Compare available storage with the chosen refill basis."],"steps":["Enter field capacity by volume, wilting point by volume and root depth.","Enter allowed depletion share, growing area and application efficiency.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The soil measurement basis helps separate water storage from a guessed watering interval.","check":"Field capacity and wilting point must come from suitable soil measurements. This is not a pH or soil amendment calculator.","faq":[{"q":"Does this calculate soil pH or amendments?","a":"No. It uses water storage measurements, not acidity or fertilizer recommendations."},{"q":"What should I check before using Soil Water Storage Calculator?","a":"Check Field capacity by volume, Wilting point by volume, Root depth and Allowed depletion share. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_fertilizer","name":"Fertilizer Label Rate Calculator","description":"Scale a label application rate to garden area and whole packages.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-fertilizer-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_fertilizer/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_fertilizer.md","page_id":270,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_fertilizer","inputs":[{"group":"Approved application rate","label":"Treatment area","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Approved application rate","label":"Product mass per square metre","type":"number","unit":"g/m²","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Purchase","label":"Package mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Purchase","label":"Package price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Enter the label or soil test rate for your actual product and crop. No rate is recommended here.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A label application rate becomes a purchase quantity after the treated area is measured.","Enter the actual product rate and package size, then compare the total material and whole packs."],"steps":["Enter treatment area and product mass per square metre.","Enter package mass and package price.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation keeps the product's rate explicit instead of recommending a universal dose.","check":"Enter the label or soil test rate for your actual product and crop. No rate is recommended here.","faq":[{"q":"Can I use the example rate for any crop?","a":"No. Use the label or suitable soil test recommendation for your actual crop and product."},{"q":"What should I check before using Fertilizer Label Rate Calculator?","a":"Check Treatment area, Product mass per square metre, Package mass and Package price. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_npk","name":"NPK Nutrient Content Calculator","description":"Read N, P₂O₅ and K₂O amounts from a fertilizer label.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-npk-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_npk/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_npk.md","page_id":271,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_npk","inputs":[{"group":"Applied product","label":"Product mass","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Guaranteed analysis","label":"Label N","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Guaranteed analysis","label":"Label P₂O₅","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Guaranteed analysis","label":"Label K₂O","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"P₂O₅ and K₂O are label conventions, not elemental P and K. Conversion factors are also shown; this does not check crop sufficiency.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Fertilizer labels commonly state nitrogen alongside phosphorus and potassium oxide conventions.","Enter product mass and the labelled percentages. Read the nutrient amounts and elemental conversions on their stated basis."],"steps":["Enter product mass.","Enter label N, label P₂O₅ and label K₂O.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate label and elemental figures help prevent comparisons between unlike nutrient units.","check":"P₂O₅ and K₂O are label conventions, not elemental P and K. Conversion factors are also shown; this does not check crop sufficiency.","faq":[{"q":"Is P2O5 the same as elemental phosphorus?","a":"No. They use different mass conventions. Use the displayed conversion and keep the nutrient basis consistent."},{"q":"What should I check before using NPK Nutrient Content Calculator?","a":"Check Product mass, Label N, Label P₂O₅ and Label K₂O. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_nutrient_solution","name":"Nutrient Solution PPM Calculator","description":"Calculate soluble product mass for one entered nutrient target.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-nutrient-solution-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_nutrient_solution/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_nutrient_solution.md","page_id":272,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_nutrient_solution","inputs":[{"group":"Final solution","label":"Final solution volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Final solution","label":"Target nutrient concentration","type":"number","unit":"mg/L","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000,"integer":false},{"group":"Final solution","label":"Existing nutrient concentration","type":"number","unit":"mg/L","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":false},{"group":"Soluble product analysis","label":"Product share of this nutrient","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Uses one nutrient and assumes full dissolution. Count the same nutrient basis in the target and analysis; other nutrients, EC and compatibility are not balanced.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A nutrient concentration target needs the product's matching nutrient analysis.","Enter one nutrient target, solution volume and product percentage. Keep the target and label on the same basis."],"steps":["Enter final solution volume, target nutrient concentration and existing nutrient concentration.","Enter product share of this nutrient.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The worksheet makes the product mass calculation visible for one specified nutrient.","check":"Uses one nutrient and assumes full dissolution. Count the same nutrient basis in the target and analysis; other nutrients, EC and compatibility are not balanced.","faq":[{"q":"Does it balance a complete nutrient recipe?","a":"No. Other nutrients, EC, compatibility and solubility need separate assessment."},{"q":"What should I check before using Nutrient Solution PPM Calculator?","a":"Check Final solution volume, Target nutrient concentration, Existing nutrient concentration and Product share of this nutrient. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_dilution","name":"Liquid Feed Dilution Calculator","description":"Scale a product label rate to a final prepared volume.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-dilution-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_dilution/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_dilution.md","page_id":273,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_dilution","inputs":[{"group":"Label instruction","label":"Product per label batch","type":"number","unit":"mL","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Label instruction","label":"Final label batch volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your final batch","label":"Final prepared volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"For soluble liquid garden feed with a label specifying final solution volume. No pesticides, acids or incompatible product mixtures are modelled.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Resizing a liquid feed batch should preserve the product label's application ratio.","Use the rate stated for final prepared volume, then enter the batch you need."],"steps":["Enter product per label batch and final label batch volume.","Enter final prepared volume.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The product quantity scales without quietly strengthening or weakening the prepared feed.","check":"For soluble liquid garden feed with a label specifying final solution volume. No pesticides, acids or incompatible product mixtures are modelled.","faq":[{"q":"Can I use this for pesticides or acids?","a":"No. The model covers the stated soluble garden feed basis, not hazardous or incompatible mixtures."},{"q":"What should I check before using Liquid Feed Dilution Calculator?","a":"Check Product per label batch, Final label batch volume and Final prepared volume. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_fertigation","name":"Fertilizer Injector Stock Calculator","description":"Scale a final nutrient target to stock tank concentration and draw volume.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-fertigation-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_fertigation/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_fertigation.md","page_id":274,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_fertigation","inputs":[{"group":"Final irrigation batch","label":"Final delivered volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Final irrigation batch","label":"Added nutrient concentration","type":"number","unit":"mg/L","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000,"integer":false},{"group":"Injector and product","label":"Final solution per one part stock","type":"number","unit":"ratio","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Injector and product","label":"Soluble product nutrient share","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Injector and product","label":"Stock tank volume","type":"number","unit":"L","help":"","min":0.001,"max":100000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Ratio means final solution volume / stock volume, not water plus stock. Verify actual injector calibration, solubility and product compatibility.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["An injector stock solution must be related to the final delivered concentration and the injector's actual ratio.","Enter the final target and calibrated ratio, then compare stock concentration and draw volume."],"steps":["Enter final delivered volume and added nutrient concentration.","Enter final solution per one part stock, soluble product nutrient share and stock tank volume.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The volume basis keeps stock preparation separate from the final irrigation solution.","check":"Ratio means final solution volume / stock volume, not water plus stock. Verify actual injector calibration, solubility and product compatibility.","faq":[{"q":"What does the injector ratio mean here?","a":"It is final solution volume divided by stock volume. It is not water volume plus an added stock part."},{"q":"What should I check before using Fertilizer Injector Stock Calculator?","a":"Check Final delivered volume, Added nutrient concentration, Final solution per one part stock and Soluble product nutrient share. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_harvest_calendar","name":"Sowing and Harvest Date Planner","description":"Build a date sequence using your seed packet and local growing durations.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-harvest-calendar-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_harvest_calendar/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_harvest_calendar.md","page_id":275,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_harvest_calendar","inputs":[{"group":"Sowing date","label":"Sowing date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Entered crop timings","label":"Planting method","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"transplant":"Raise seedlings and transplant","direct":"Sow directly in the growing bed"}},{"group":"Entered crop timings","label":"Days to germination","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":0,"max":365,"integer":true},{"group":"Entered crop timings","label":"Days from sowing to transplant","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":0,"max":730,"integer":true},{"group":"Entered crop timings","label":"Days to first harvest","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":0,"max":1460,"integer":true},{"group":"Entered crop timings","label":"Harvest days counted from","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"sowing":"Sowing date","transplant":"Transplant date"}},{"group":"Entered crop timings","label":"Harvest window length","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":365,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Dates are arithmetic milestones. No Pakistan wide sowing season is assumed; use a variety, altitude and local weather appropriate starting date.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Seed packets describe growing durations, but the starting date must still suit the local crop and conditions.","Enter a suitable date and the variety's durations to build the milestone sequence."],"steps":["Enter sowing date.","Choose planting method and harvest days counted from. Enter days to germination, days from sowing to transplant, days to first harvest and harvest window length.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The dated plan makes the interval between sowing, transplanting and harvest easier to follow.","check":"Dates are arithmetic milestones. No Pakistan wide sowing season is assumed; use a variety, altitude and local weather appropriate starting date.","faq":[{"q":"Does it supply Pakistan wide sowing seasons?","a":"No. Use a locally appropriate starting date for variety, altitude and weather."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sowing and Harvest Date Planner?","a":"Check Sowing date, Planting method, Days to germination and Days from sowing to transplant. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_succession","name":"Succession Sowing Planner","description":"Schedule repeated batches and identify gaps between entered harvest windows.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-succession-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_succession/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_succession.md","page_id":276,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_succession","inputs":[{"group":"First sowing","label":"First sowing date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"First sowing","label":"Sowing batches","type":"number","unit":"batches","help":"","min":1,"max":50,"integer":true},{"group":"First sowing","label":"Days between batches","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":365,"integer":true},{"group":"Batch harvest assumptions","label":"Days from sowing to harvest","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":0,"max":1460,"integer":true},{"group":"Batch harvest assumptions","label":"Harvest window length","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":365,"integer":true},{"group":"Batch harvest assumptions","label":"Plants per batch","type":"number","unit":"plants","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Intervals create a planning schedule, not continuous yield. Windows use inclusive end dates and actual overlaps may vary.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Repeated sowings can create overlapping harvest windows or leave gaps between them.","Choose the batch interval and your expected harvest durations, then inspect the listed windows."],"steps":["Enter first sowing date, sowing batches and days between batches.","Enter days from sowing to harvest, harvest window length and plants per batch.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The sequence makes potential gaps visible before you commit the whole bed to one sowing date.","check":"Intervals create a planning schedule, not continuous yield. Windows use inclusive end dates and actual overlaps may vary.","faq":[{"q":"Does overlap guarantee continuous harvest?","a":"No. Real crop performance and harvest timing can differ from the entered schedule."},{"q":"What should I check before using Succession Sowing Planner?","a":"Check First sowing date, Sowing batches, Days between batches and Days from sowing to harvest. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_yield","name":"Garden Harvest Yield Calculator","description":"Combine crop areas, entered yield rates and unusable harvest losses.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-yield-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_yield/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_yield.md","page_id":277,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_yield","inputs":[{"group":"Crop harvest assumptions","label":"Crop","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Crop harvest assumptions","label":"Area assigned to crop","type":"number","unit":"m²","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Crop harvest assumptions","label":"Gross period yield","type":"number","unit":"kg/m²","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Crop harvest assumptions","label":"Unusable harvest","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Crop rates are your estimates or observed records, not guaranteed Pakistan averages.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A harvest estimate should distinguish total produce from the part that remains usable.","List crop areas and your observed or expected yield rates, then enter losses on the chosen basis."],"steps":["Add the entries in crop harvest assumptions as separate rows. Include crop, area assigned to crop, gross period yield and unusable harvest for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The combined crop view keeps usable output separate from gross harvest.","check":"Crop rates are your estimates or observed records, not guaranteed Pakistan averages.","faq":[{"q":"Are the starting yields Pakistan averages?","a":"No. They are inputs. Replace examples with records or estimates appropriate to your garden."},{"q":"What should I check before using Garden Harvest Yield Calculator?","a":"Check Crop, Area assigned to crop, Gross period yield and Unusable harvest. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_savings","name":"Kitchen Garden Savings Calculator","description":"Value only the usable produce that replaces your shopping.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-savings-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_savings/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_savings.md","page_id":278,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_savings","inputs":[{"group":"Period expenses","label":"Inputs, water and other costs","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Produce used at home","label":"Produce","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Produce used at home","label":"Usable harvest","type":"number","unit":"kg","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Produce used at home","label":"Replaces purchased share","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Produce used at home","label":"Your buying price","type":"number","unit":"PKR/kg","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Prices and harvest weights are entered examples. Gifted or surplus produce does not replace household purchases.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Garden savings come from usable produce that replaces purchases you would otherwise make.","Enter harvest weights, replacement prices and growing costs. Keep gifts and surplus out of the replaced shopping quantity."],"steps":["Enter inputs, water and other costs.","Add the entries in produce used at home as separate rows. Include produce, usable harvest, replaces purchased share and your buying price for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The household replacement basis avoids calling every harvested kilogram a cash saving.","check":"Prices and harvest weights are entered examples. Gifted or surplus produce does not replace household purchases.","faq":[{"q":"Should gifted produce be counted as shopping avoided?","a":"Not unless it actually replaces your household purchase. Keep that value separate from household savings."},{"q":"What should I check before using Kitchen Garden Savings Calculator?","a":"Check Inputs, water and other costs, Produce, Usable harvest and Replaces purchased share. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_budget","name":"Garden Setup Budget Calculator","description":"Build a PKR bill of materials with labour, delivery and contingency.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-budget-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_budget/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_budget.md","page_id":279,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_budget","inputs":[{"group":"Other project costs","label":"Labour cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other project costs","label":"Delivery cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other project costs","label":"Contingency","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Materials and equipment","label":"Item","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Materials and equipment","label":"Quantity","type":"number","unit":"units","help":"","min":0.001,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Materials and equipment","label":"Unit price","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"All prices are visitor supplied estimates. This is not a current market quotation.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A garden setup budget includes more than seeds and soil. Delivery and labour can change the cash required.","Build the item list from local quotes and add a deliberate contingency."],"steps":["Enter labour cost, delivery cost and contingency.","Add the entries in materials and equipment as separate rows. Include item, quantity and unit price for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Line costs make the PKR total easier to update when a supplier or quantity changes.","check":"All prices are visitor supplied estimates. This is not a current market quotation.","faq":[{"q":"Are example prices current market quotes?","a":"No. Replace them with prices for the intended location, product and delivery scope."},{"q":"What should I check before using Garden Setup Budget Calculator?","a":"Check Labour cost, Delivery cost, Contingency and Item. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_trellis","name":"Trellis Materials Calculator","description":"Count posts, end supports and horizontal wire for a straight row.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-trellis-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_trellis/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_trellis.md","page_id":280,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_trellis","inputs":[{"group":"Straight row","label":"Row length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Straight row","label":"Maximum post spacing","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Straight row","label":"Horizontal wire levels","type":"number","unit":"levels","help":"","min":1,"max":100,"integer":true},{"group":"Wire order","label":"Extra wire per level","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Wire order","label":"Wire roll length","type":"number","unit":"m","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Wire order","label":"Price per roll","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Counts include both end posts. Quantities do not certify strength, wind resistance or anchoring.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["A straight trellis needs end posts as well as intermediate supports and wire levels.","Measure the row and enter maximum post spacing. Compare the counted posts and horizontal wire lengths."],"steps":["Enter row length, maximum post spacing and horizontal wire levels.","Enter extra wire per level, wire roll length and price per roll.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The endpoint rule helps prevent a materials list from missing one end of the row.","check":"Counts include both end posts. Quantities do not certify strength, wind resistance or anchoring.","faq":[{"q":"Does the count certify strength?","a":"No. Wind, loads, anchoring and support specifications need separate design review."},{"q":"What should I check before using Trellis Materials Calculator?","a":"Check Row length, Maximum post spacing, Horizontal wire levels and Extra wire per level. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"gardening_area_convert","name":"Pakistan Garden Area Converter","description":"Convert square metres, square feet, marla and kanal with an explicit local marla definition.","category":"Gardening","category_id":"gardening","url":"https://whatson.pk/gardening-area-convert-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_area_convert/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/gardening_area_convert.md","page_id":281,"shortcode":"whatson_gardening_area_convert","inputs":[{"group":"Starting area","label":"Area value","type":"number","unit":"selected units","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Starting area","label":"Input unit","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"m2":"Square metres","ft2":"Square feet","marla":"Marla","kanal":"Kanal"}},{"group":"Local land unit definition","label":"Square feet per marla","type":"number","unit":"ft²","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Local marla definitions differ. Kanal is taken as 20 of the entered marla; this is not a land boundary survey.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T13:08:12+00:00","intro":["Garden area can appear in square metres, square feet or local land units.","Select the marla definition used in your record before converting it to kanal or metric area."],"steps":["Choose input unit. Enter area value.","Enter square feet per marla.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The explicit local basis keeps useful growing area comparisons consistent.","check":"Local marla definitions differ. Kanal is taken as 20 of the entered marla; this is not a land boundary survey.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a boundary survey?","a":"No. It converts an entered area. Property dimensions and boundaries still need reliable measurements."},{"q":"What should I check before using Pakistan Garden Area Converter?","a":"Check Area value, Input unit and Square feet per marla. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_marks_percentage","name":"Marks Percentage","description":"Turn obtained marks into a percentage and a target gap.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-marks-percentage-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_marks_percentage/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_marks_percentage.md","page_id":316,"shortcode":"whatson_education_marks_percentage","inputs":[{"group":"Your result","label":"Obtained marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your result","label":"Maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your result","label":"Personal target","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Percentage = obtained marks ÷ maximum marks × 100. No board grade or equivalence is assigned.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A marks percentage describes your result against its maximum, not a grade policy shared by every board.","Enter obtained and total marks, then compare them with a personal percentage target."],"steps":["Enter obtained marks, maximum marks and personal target.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The target gap shows the additional marks behind a goal rather than only reporting the percentage.","check":"Percentage = obtained marks ÷ maximum marks × 100. No board grade or equivalence is assigned.","faq":[{"q":"Does it assign an official grade?","a":"No. Board grades and equivalence require the applicable institution's rules."},{"q":"What should I check before using Marks Percentage?","a":"Check Obtained marks, Maximum marks and Personal target. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_subject_total","name":"Subject Marks Total","description":"Combine unequal subject totals without averaging their percentages.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-subject-total-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_subject_total/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_subject_total.md","page_id":317,"shortcode":"whatson_education_subject_total","inputs":[{"group":"Subject result sheet","label":"Subject","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Subject result sheet","label":"Obtained marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Subject result sheet","label":"Maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Subjects are combined by raw marks. A subject pass requirement is not inferred from the combined percentage.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Subjects with different maximum marks should not be combined by simply averaging their percentages.","Enter obtained and maximum marks for each subject. Review the combined raw totals before reading the overall result."],"steps":["Add the entries in subject result sheet as separate rows. Include subject, obtained marks and maximum marks for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The marks weighted basis keeps a small paper from counting as heavily as a larger one.","check":"Subjects are combined by raw marks. A subject pass requirement is not inferred from the combined percentage.","faq":[{"q":"Does the overall percentage prove every subject is passed?","a":"No. Separate subject passing requirements need their own check."},{"q":"What should I check before using Subject Marks Total?","a":"Check Subject, Obtained marks and Maximum marks. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_weighted_grade","name":"Weighted Course Grade","description":"Balance quizzes, assignments, practicals and exams by their actual weights.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-weighted-grade-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_weighted_grade/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_weighted_grade.md","page_id":318,"shortcode":"whatson_education_weighted_grade","inputs":[{"group":"Course assessment weights","label":"Assessment","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Course assessment weights","label":"Score percentage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Course assessment weights","label":"Course weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Weights must total exactly 100%. Scores are percentages, not raw marks.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A quiz and a final exam can contribute different shares of the course result.","Enter component scores as percentages and use their actual course weights. Confirm that the weights total 100%."],"steps":["Add the entries in course assessment weights as separate rows. Include assessment, score percentage and course weight for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The contribution view helps explain which assessment changes the overall grade most.","check":"Weights must total exactly 100%. Scores are percentages, not raw marks.","faq":[{"q":"Should raw marks be entered as component percentages?","a":"Convert each score against its own maximum first. Raw marks are not interchangeable with percentage scores."},{"q":"What should I check before using Weighted Course Grade?","a":"Check Assessment, Score percentage and Course weight. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_final_exam","name":"Final Exam Marks Needed","description":"Find the whole exam mark needed to reach your course target.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-final-exam-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_final_exam/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_final_exam.md","page_id":319,"shortcode":"whatson_education_final_exam","inputs":[{"group":"Before the final","label":"Course percentage points already secured","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Before the final","label":"Final exam weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Before the final","label":"Target course percentage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Final paper","label":"Final exam maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":100000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Earned points are weighted course points already secured. This does not check separate exam passing requirements.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["The final exam target depends on course points already secured and the weight still available.","Enter earned weighted points, exam weight and the course target. Read the whole mark requirement against the exam maximum."],"steps":["Enter course percentage points already secured, final exam weight and target course percentage.","Enter final exam maximum marks.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation turns a course target into an exam mark rather than an unexplained final percentage.","check":"Earned points are weighted course points already secured. This does not check separate exam passing requirements.","faq":[{"q":"Does it check a separate final exam pass rule?","a":"No. Your course may require an exam pass independently of the combined result."},{"q":"What should I check before using Final Exam Marks Needed?","a":"Check Course percentage points already secured, Final exam weight, Target course percentage and Final exam maximum marks. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_semester_gpa","name":"Semester GPA","description":"Enter the grade point and counted credits for each course.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-semester-gpa-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_semester_gpa/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_semester_gpa.md","page_id":320,"shortcode":"whatson_education_semester_gpa","inputs":[{"group":"Transcript scale","label":"Maximum grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Course credit ledger","label":"Course","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Course credit ledger","label":"Counted credit hours","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Course credit ledger","label":"Grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Semester GPA weights each course by its counted credits. Equal averaging can misstate the result.","Use recorded grade points and the credits recognised by your institution, then review total quality points."],"steps":["Enter maximum grade point.","Add the entries in course credit ledger as separate rows. Include course, counted credit hours and grade point for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The course schedule leaves the GPA basis visible when comparing a result with a transcript.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","faq":[{"q":"Are the example grade points official university rules?","a":"No. Replace them with your institution's values and verify its inclusion and rounding policy."},{"q":"What should I check before using Semester GPA?","a":"Check Maximum grade point, Course, Counted credit hours and Grade point. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_cgpa","name":"Cumulative GPA","description":"Combine semesters using their counted credits, not an equal average.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-cgpa-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_cgpa/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_cgpa.md","page_id":321,"shortcode":"whatson_education_cgpa","inputs":[{"group":"Transcript scale","label":"Maximum grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Semester totals","label":"Semester","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Semester totals","label":"Counted credits","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Semester totals","label":"Semester GPA","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A semester carrying more credits contributes more to cumulative GPA than a smaller semester.","Enter counted credits and each semester result on a consistent scale. Check the combined quality points."],"steps":["Enter maximum grade point.","Add the entries in semester totals as separate rows. Include semester, counted credits and semester GPA for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Credit weighting keeps the cumulative result tied to the actual course load.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","faq":[{"q":"Can I average semester GPAs equally?","a":"Only if their counted credits are equal. Otherwise use credit weighted quality points."},{"q":"What should I check before using Cumulative GPA?","a":"Check Maximum grade point, Semester, Counted credits and Semester GPA. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_target_cgpa","name":"Target CGPA Planner","description":"See the average grade point needed across your remaining credits.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-target-cgpa-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_target_cgpa/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_target_cgpa.md","page_id":322,"shortcode":"whatson_education_target_cgpa","inputs":[{"group":"Credits already counted","label":"Current CGPA","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Credits already counted","label":"Completed credits","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your graduation goal","label":"Target CGPA","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Your graduation goal","label":"Remaining counted credits","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your graduation goal","label":"Maximum grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A future CGPA target depends on both the current record and the number of credits still to come.","Enter completed credits and remaining credits, then compare the required average with your grade scale."],"steps":["Enter current CGPA and completed credits.","Enter target CGPA, remaining counted credits and maximum grade point.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The result makes the remaining performance requirement visible before planning course targets.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","faq":[{"q":"Does the required average guarantee the final CGPA?","a":"No. It describes the grade points needed under the entered credit assumptions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Target CGPA Planner?","a":"Check Current CGPA, Completed credits, Target CGPA and Remaining counted credits. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_repeat_course","name":"Repeated Course CGPA","description":"Compare replacement and both attempts counted using a declared policy.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-repeat-course-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_repeat_course/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_repeat_course.md","page_id":323,"shortcode":"whatson_education_repeat_course","inputs":[{"group":"Current transcript including old attempt","label":"Current CGPA","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Current transcript including old attempt","label":"Current counted credits","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false},{"group":"Current transcript including old attempt","label":"Maximum grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0.1,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Repeated course","label":"Course credits","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Repeated course","label":"Old grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Repeated course","label":"New grade point","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10,"integer":false},{"group":"Repeated course","label":"How the transcript counts attempts","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"replace":"Replace old attempt","both":"Count both attempts"}}],"limitations":"Replacement assumes equal course credits and swaps quality points. Both attempts adds the new credits. Verify your university policy.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Repeating a course can change CGPA differently under replacement and both attempts counted policies.","Enter the course credits and both results, then select the rule that matches your university."],"steps":["Enter current CGPA, current counted credits and maximum grade point.","Choose how the transcript counts attempts. Enter course credits, old grade point and new grade point.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The policy comparison shows why the same improved grade can produce different cumulative figures.","check":"Replacement assumes equal course credits and swaps quality points. Both attempts adds the new credits. Verify your university policy.","faq":[{"q":"Can replacement be assumed for every university?","a":"No. Confirm your institution's repeat rules. Replacement here assumes equal credits for the course attempts."},{"q":"What should I check before using Repeated Course CGPA?","a":"Check Current CGPA, Current counted credits, Maximum grade point and Course credits. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_grade_boundary","name":"Custom Grade Boundaries","description":"Match your marks to the grade thresholds you enter.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-grade-boundary-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_grade_boundary/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_grade_boundary.md","page_id":324,"shortcode":"whatson_education_grade_boundary","inputs":[{"group":"Paper result","label":"Obtained marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Paper result","label":"Maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your institution grade bands","label":"Grade label","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Your institution grade bands","label":"Minimum percentage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Thresholds are inclusive and sorted from highest to lowest. These editable example bands are not a Pakistan wide grading policy.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A marks percentage becomes a grade only after a particular grading scale is chosen.","Enter the boundaries used by your course or board and review them in descending order."],"steps":["Enter obtained marks and maximum marks.","Add the entries in your institution grade bands as separate rows. Include grade label and minimum percentage for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Editable thresholds let the same percentage be checked against the correct local policy.","check":"Thresholds are inclusive and sorted from highest to lowest. These editable example bands are not a Pakistan wide grading policy.","faq":[{"q":"Are the example bands Pakistan wide rules?","a":"No. They are editable examples and should be replaced with the relevant grading scheme."},{"q":"What should I check before using Custom Grade Boundaries?","a":"Check Obtained marks, Maximum marks, Grade label and Minimum percentage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_merit_aggregate","name":"Admission Merit Aggregate","description":"Combine SSC, HSSC and test marks with your programme weights.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-merit-aggregate-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_merit_aggregate/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_merit_aggregate.md","page_id":325,"shortcode":"whatson_education_merit_aggregate","inputs":[{"group":"Academic marks","label":"SSC obtained marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Academic marks","label":"SSC maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Academic marks","label":"HSSC obtained marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Academic marks","label":"HSSC maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Entry test","label":"Test obtained marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Entry test","label":"Test maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":1000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Published programme weights","label":"SSC weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Published programme weights","label":"HSSC weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Published programme weights","label":"Test weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision. Enter official IBCC equivalence marks where applicable. No equivalence or closing merit prediction is made.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Admission aggregates depend on the programme's assigned weights, not a single formula for every university.","Enter SSC, HSSC and test marks with the published weights. Use official equivalence marks where required."],"steps":["Enter SSC obtained marks, SSC maximum marks, HSSC obtained marks and HSSC maximum marks.","Enter test obtained marks and test maximum marks.","Enter SSC weight, HSSC weight and test weight.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The component view makes each academic and test contribution traceable.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision. Enter official IBCC equivalence marks where applicable. No equivalence or closing merit prediction is made.","faq":[{"q":"Does the aggregate predict admission or closing merit?","a":"No. It calculates your entered formula and does not establish an admission outcome."},{"q":"What should I check before using Admission Merit Aggregate?","a":"Check SSC obtained marks, SSC maximum marks, HSSC obtained marks and HSSC maximum marks. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_entry_target","name":"Entry Test Target","description":"Work backwards from your chosen aggregate to a whole test mark.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-entry-target-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_entry_target/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_entry_target.md","page_id":326,"shortcode":"whatson_education_entry_target","inputs":[{"group":"Your academic percentages","label":"SSC percentage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your academic percentages","label":"HSSC percentage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme weights and target","label":"SSC weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme weights and target","label":"HSSC weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme weights and target","label":"Test weight","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0.01,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme weights and target","label":"Desired aggregate","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme weights and target","label":"Test maximum marks","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":1,"max":100000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision. The target is your own input, not a predicted closing merit.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A chosen admission aggregate can be worked backwards into a test mark requirement.","Enter academic results, programme weights and your target, then inspect the required whole test marks."],"steps":["Enter SSC percentage and HSSC percentage.","Enter SSC weight, HSSC weight, test weight, desired aggregate and test maximum marks.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The calculation links a personal aggregate goal to the test component still available.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision. The target is your own input, not a predicted closing merit.","faq":[{"q":"Is the target a forecast of closing merit?","a":"No. It is your input. Actual closing merit and eligibility are decided by the institution."},{"q":"What should I check before using Entry Test Target?","a":"Check SSC percentage, HSSC percentage, SSC weight and HSSC weight. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_negative_marking","name":"Negative Marking Score","description":"Calculate net marks, unanswered questions and attempted accuracy.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-negative-marking-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_negative_marking/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_negative_marking.md","page_id":327,"shortcode":"whatson_education_negative_marking","inputs":[{"group":"Answer counts","label":"Total questions","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Answer counts","label":"Correct answers","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Answer counts","label":"Wrong answers","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Paper marking rules","label":"Marks per correct answer","type":"number","unit":"marks","help":"","min":0.0001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Paper marking rules","label":"Deduction per wrong answer","type":"number","unit":"marks","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Unanswered questions score zero. Negative net scores are retained. Enter the paper's actual penalty rules.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Wrong answer penalties can reduce the net score even when many questions were attempted.","Enter the paper's reward and penalty rules alongside correct, wrong and unanswered counts."],"steps":["Enter total questions, correct answers and wrong answers.","Enter marks per correct answer and deduction per wrong answer.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Score and attempted accuracy stay separate, helping you review the effect of errors.","check":"Unanswered questions score zero. Negative net scores are retained. Enter the paper's actual penalty rules.","faq":[{"q":"Are unanswered questions penalised?","a":"In this model they score zero. Use the actual paper instructions before applying the calculation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Negative Marking Score?","a":"Check Total questions, Correct answers, Wrong answers and Marks per correct answer. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_test_attempts","name":"Correct Answers Needed","description":"Find the minimum correct answers within a fixed attempted count.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-test-attempts-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_test_attempts/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_test_attempts.md","page_id":328,"shortcode":"whatson_education_test_attempts","inputs":[{"group":"Your attempt plan","label":"Total questions","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Your attempt plan","label":"Questions to attempt","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Your attempt plan","label":"Target net score","type":"number","unit":"marks","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":false},{"group":"Scoring rules","label":"Marks per correct answer","type":"number","unit":"marks","help":"","min":0.0001,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Scoring rules","label":"Deduction per wrong answer","type":"number","unit":"marks","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Every attempted answer is either correct or wrong. The remaining questions score zero. This is a score target, not a guessing recommendation.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A fixed attempt count needs enough correct answers to offset the wrong answer penalty.","Enter the score target and paper rules, then compare the minimum correct count with the attempted total."],"steps":["Enter total questions, questions to attempt and target net score.","Enter marks per correct answer and deduction per wrong answer.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The result shows the score arithmetic without recommending a guessing strategy.","check":"Every attempted answer is either correct or wrong. The remaining questions score zero. This is a score target, not a guessing recommendation.","faq":[{"q":"What happens to questions outside the attempted count?","a":"They are treated as unanswered and score zero on this basis."},{"q":"What should I check before using Correct Answers Needed?","a":"Check Total questions, Questions to attempt, Target net score and Marks per correct answer. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_exam_pacing","name":"Exam Time Per Question","description":"Reserve review time and allocate the remaining paper time by section.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-exam-pacing-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_exam_pacing/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_exam_pacing.md","page_id":329,"shortcode":"whatson_education_exam_pacing","inputs":[{"group":"Paper duration","label":"Total exam time","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1440,"integer":false},{"group":"Paper duration","label":"Review and reading reserve","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":0,"max":1440,"integer":false},{"group":"Paper sections","label":"Section","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Paper sections","label":"Question count","type":"number","unit":"questions","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Paper sections","label":"Relative time per question","type":"number","unit":"weight","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Time is allocated by question count × effort weight. No exam timer or actual paper date is supplied.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Paper time needs room for review as well as answering. Longer sections may deserve more attention per question.","Set total minutes and review time, then enter section question counts and effort weights."],"steps":["Enter total exam time and review and reading reserve.","Add the entries in paper sections as separate rows. Include section, question count and relative time per question for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Weighted time allocations provide a planning guide for uneven sections.","check":"Time is allocated by question count × effort weight. No exam timer or actual paper date is supplied.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a running exam timer?","a":"No. It creates a time plan. It does not count down or supply an official paper schedule."},{"q":"What should I check before using Exam Time Per Question?","a":"Check Total exam time, Review and reading reserve, Section and Question count. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_attendance","name":"Attendance Percentage","description":"Check attended classes against an editable attendance requirement.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-attendance-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_attendance/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_attendance.md","page_id":330,"shortcode":"whatson_education_attendance","inputs":[{"group":"Classes held","label":"Classes held","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Classes held","label":"Classes attended","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Your course rule","label":"Required attendance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Attendance percentage should use actual classes held and attended, rather than calendar days.","Enter the current record and the requirement used by your institution. Compare the result on that same class basis."],"steps":["Enter classes held and classes attended.","Enter required attendance.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The entered threshold avoids presenting one attendance rule as universal.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","faq":[{"q":"Does the result decide exam eligibility?","a":"No. Other requirements and the institution's counting rules may also apply."},{"q":"What should I check before using Attendance Percentage?","a":"Check Classes held, Classes attended and Required attendance. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_attendance_recovery","name":"Attendance Recovery","description":"Find consecutive classes to attend to recover your attendance.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-attendance-recovery-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_attendance_recovery/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_attendance_recovery.md","page_id":331,"shortcode":"whatson_education_attendance_recovery","inputs":[{"group":"Your attendance now","label":"Classes held","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Your attendance now","label":"Classes attended","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Recovery goal","label":"Required attendance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Assumes you attend every future class used in the recovery calculation. A 100% target cannot recover past absences.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Past absences can require several future attended classes before the percentage reaches a target.","Enter the existing record and chosen threshold, then inspect the consecutive attendance requirement."],"steps":["Enter classes held and classes attended.","Enter required attendance.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The future class count makes recovery planning easier than repeatedly testing one extra class.","check":"Assumes you attend every future class used in the recovery calculation. A 100% target cannot recover past absences.","faq":[{"q":"Can perfect future attendance restore a 100% record?","a":"Not after past absences. A 100% target cannot erase classes already missed."},{"q":"What should I check before using Attendance Recovery?","a":"Check Classes held, Classes attended and Required attendance. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_absence_allowance","name":"Future Absence Allowance","description":"See how many remaining classes can be missed at a chosen final threshold.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-absence-allowance-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_absence_allowance/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_absence_allowance.md","page_id":332,"shortcode":"whatson_education_absence_allowance","inputs":[{"group":"Current and remaining classes","label":"Classes held","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Current and remaining classes","label":"Classes attended","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Current and remaining classes","label":"Classes still to be held","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Final requirement","label":"Required attendance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision. Count actual classes rather than calendar days.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Remaining classes determine how much room is left for future absence at a chosen final threshold.","Use actual classes, current attendance and the scheduled remainder. Review the allowed misses against the requirement."],"steps":["Enter classes held, classes attended and classes still to be held.","Enter required attendance.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The final total basis helps distinguish current percentage from the semester's eventual record.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision. Count actual classes rather than calendar days.","faq":[{"q":"Does the allowance include calendar holidays?","a":"No. Count actual remaining classes. Holidays without classes should not inflate the total."},{"q":"What should I check before using Future Absence Allowance?","a":"Check Classes held, Classes attended, Classes still to be held and Required attendance. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_attendance_forecast","name":"Subject Attendance Forecast","description":"Forecast final attendance separately for each course.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-attendance-forecast-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_attendance_forecast/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_attendance_forecast.md","page_id":333,"shortcode":"whatson_education_attendance_forecast","inputs":[{"group":"Course requirement","label":"Required final attendance","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Attendance register","label":"Course","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Attendance register","label":"Held classes","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Attendance register","label":"Attended classes","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Attendance register","label":"Remaining classes","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Attendance register","label":"Future classes you will attend","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A strong combined attendance figure can hide a weaker record in one course.","Enter each subject separately with held, attended and planned classes. Review the final percentage course by course."],"steps":["Enter required final attendance.","Add the entries in attendance register as separate rows. Include course, held classes, attended classes, remaining classes and future classes you will attend for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate forecasts keep one course from compensating for another where requirements apply individually.","check":"Use your institution's current rules. The entered values are examples, not an official result or eligibility decision.","faq":[{"q":"Are the future attended classes assumed rather than recorded?","a":"Yes. They are a plan. Update the forecast as actual attendance becomes available."},{"q":"What should I check before using Subject Attendance Forecast?","a":"Check Required final attendance, Course, Held classes and Attended classes. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_study_allocation","name":"Weekly Study Allocation","description":"Divide your available study time using subject priority weights.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-study-allocation-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_study_allocation/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_study_allocation.md","page_id":334,"shortcode":"whatson_education_study_allocation","inputs":[{"group":"Weekly time budget","label":"Available focused study time","type":"number","unit":"hours/week","help":"","min":0.01,"max":168,"integer":false},{"group":"Subject priorities","label":"Subject","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Subject priorities","label":"Relative priority","type":"number","unit":"weight","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Priority is a relative weight. Allocation is rounded to whole minutes and preserves the rounded total minute budget.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A study plan needs to fit the time available, even when several subjects feel urgent.","Enter weekly hours and relative subject priorities, then inspect the whole minute allocation."],"steps":["Enter available focused study time.","Add the entries in subject priorities as separate rows. Include subject and relative priority for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The distribution preserves the total time budget while making tradeoffs between subjects visible.","check":"Priority is a relative weight. Allocation is rounded to whole minutes and preserves the rounded total minute budget.","faq":[{"q":"Are priority weights percentages?","a":"No. They are relative weights. The tool converts their shares into the available time."},{"q":"What should I check before using Weekly Study Allocation?","a":"Check Available focused study time, Subject and Relative priority. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_revision_calendar","name":"Revision Calendar","description":"Build dated study sessions with rest days and optional repeat passes.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-revision-calendar-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_revision_calendar/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_revision_calendar.md","page_id":335,"shortcode":"whatson_education_revision_calendar","inputs":[{"group":"Study window","label":"First study date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Study window","label":"Last study date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Study window","label":"Focused minutes per study day","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":1,"max":1440,"integer":true},{"group":"Study window","label":"Weekly rest day","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"none":"No weekly rest day","0":"Sunday","1":"Monday","2":"Tuesday","3":"Wednesday","4":"Thursday","5":"Friday","6":"Saturday"}},{"group":"Study window","label":"Revision passes","type":"number","unit":"passes","help":"","min":1,"max":10,"integer":true},{"group":"Topics in your chosen order","label":"Topic","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Topics in your chosen order","label":"Minutes per pass","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Scheduling fills topics in listed order and uses the same time for each pass. The window is limited to 120 calendar days. Carryover minutes are shown.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Revision tasks need dates and daily capacity before they become a workable schedule.","Enter topic minutes, rest days and optional passes. Check any work left outside the planning window."],"steps":["Choose weekly rest day. Enter first study date, last study date, focused minutes per study day and revision passes.","Add the entries in topics in your chosen order as separate rows. Include topic and minutes per pass for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Carryover remains visible instead of being hidden in an overfilled calendar.","check":"Scheduling fills topics in listed order and uses the same time for each pass. The window is limited to 120 calendar days. Carryover minutes are shown.","faq":[{"q":"Does the schedule prove topics are completed?","a":"No. It assigns planned time in the listed order. Record actual progress separately."},{"q":"What should I check before using Revision Calendar?","a":"Check First study date, Last study date, Focused minutes per study day and Weekly rest day. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_reading_time","name":"Reading Time Planner","description":"Estimate reading time from pages, word density and your measured pace.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-reading-time-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_reading_time/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_reading_time.md","page_id":336,"shortcode":"whatson_education_reading_time","inputs":[{"group":"Reading material","label":"Pages to read","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Reading material","label":"Average words per page","type":"number","unit":"words/page","help":"","min":1,"max":5000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your reading pace","label":"Measured reading speed","type":"number","unit":"words/minute","help":"","min":1,"max":2000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your reading pace","label":"Extra time for notes and rereading","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Your reading pace","label":"Available reading time","type":"number","unit":"minutes/day","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1440,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Reading speed and note allowance are your inputs. This estimates time only and does not measure understanding.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Reading time depends on both the material's length and your measured pace.","Enter page count, approximate words per page and a note allowance. Compare the estimate with your available study block."],"steps":["Enter pages to read and average words per page.","Enter measured reading speed, extra time for notes and rereading and available reading time.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The density and pace inputs make a reading estimate more useful than a fixed minutes per page rule.","check":"Reading speed and note allowance are your inputs. This estimates time only and does not measure understanding.","faq":[{"q":"Does this measure comprehension?","a":"No. It estimates duration. Understanding and recall need separate checks."},{"q":"What should I check before using Reading Time Planner?","a":"Check Pages to read, Average words per page, Measured reading speed and Extra time for notes and rereading. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_pomodoro","name":"Study Session Planner","description":"Plan focus blocks and short or long breaks without a running timer.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-pomodoro-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_pomodoro/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_pomodoro.md","page_id":337,"shortcode":"whatson_education_pomodoro","inputs":[{"group":"Focus sessions","label":"Number of focus blocks","type":"number","unit":"blocks","help":"","min":1,"max":200,"integer":true},{"group":"Focus sessions","label":"Minutes per focus block","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":1,"max":240,"integer":true},{"group":"Break pattern","label":"Short break","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":0,"max":120,"integer":true},{"group":"Break pattern","label":"Long break","type":"number","unit":"minutes","help":"","min":0,"max":180,"integer":true},{"group":"Break pattern","label":"Long break after every","type":"number","unit":"blocks","help":"","min":1,"max":100,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Breaks occur between focus blocks. There is no break after the last block. This planner does not run a timer.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Focus sessions need breaks between blocks, but an extra break after finishing can distort the planned duration.","Choose focus length and short or long break intervals, then compare focused time with total elapsed time."],"steps":["Enter number of focus blocks and minutes per focus block.","Enter short break, long break and long break after every.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Both totals help you reserve a realistic study slot.","check":"Breaks occur between focus blocks. There is no break after the last block. This planner does not run a timer.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool run a live timer?","a":"No. It plans the block sequence and durations without a countdown."},{"q":"What should I check before using Study Session Planner?","a":"Check Number of focus blocks, Minutes per focus block, Short break and Long break. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_exam_countdown","name":"Exam Study Countdown","description":"Count preparation days and study hours before an entered exam date.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-exam-countdown-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_exam_countdown/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_exam_countdown.md","page_id":338,"shortcode":"whatson_education_exam_countdown","inputs":[{"group":"Your dates","label":"Preparation starts","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Your dates","label":"Exam date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Daily preparation","label":"Focused hours per available day","type":"number","unit":"hours/day","help":"","min":0,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Daily preparation","label":"Unavailable preparation days","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Preparation includes the start date and excludes exam day. Dates are date only, not a live countdown or a supplied official timetable.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Preparation days should stop before exam day rather than counting the paper itself as study time.","Enter the start and exam dates and the study hours you can reserve. Review the calendar basis."],"steps":["Enter preparation starts and exam date.","Enter focused hours per available day and unavailable preparation days.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The date rule gives the preparation total a clear meaning.","check":"Preparation includes the start date and excludes exam day. Dates are date only, not a live countdown or a supplied official timetable.","faq":[{"q":"Is an official exam date supplied automatically?","a":"No. Enter the confirmed date yourself. The result is date arithmetic, not a live official timetable."},{"q":"What should I check before using Exam Study Countdown?","a":"Check Preparation starts, Exam date, Focused hours per available day and Unavailable preparation days. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_assignment_plan","name":"Assignment Work Planner","description":"Split an assignment into tasks and see the daily workload before its deadline.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-assignment-plan-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_assignment_plan/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_assignment_plan.md","page_id":339,"shortcode":"whatson_education_assignment_plan","inputs":[{"group":"Work window","label":"First work date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Work window","label":"Deadline date","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Work window","label":"Unavailable days","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Work window","label":"Available work hours per day","type":"number","unit":"hours/day","help":"","min":0.01,"max":24,"integer":false},{"group":"Assignment task list","label":"Task","type":"text","unit":""},{"group":"Assignment task list","label":"Expected task time","type":"number","unit":"hours","help":"","min":0.01,"max":10000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Start and deadline dates are both counted as work days. Unavailable days are removed from that count. Task durations are your estimates.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["An assignment deadline becomes easier to manage when the work is separated into estimated tasks.","Enter task durations and remove unavailable days from the date window. Compare the average daily workload."],"steps":["Enter first work date, deadline date, unavailable days and available work hours per day.","Add the entries in assignment task list as separate rows. Include task and expected task time for each row.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"A task list reveals whether the remaining days can realistically contain the planned work.","check":"Start and deadline dates are both counted as work days. Unavailable days are removed from that count. Task durations are your estimates.","faq":[{"q":"Is the deadline itself counted as a work day?","a":"Yes. Start and deadline are both included before unavailable days are deducted."},{"q":"What should I check before using Assignment Work Planner?","a":"Check First work date, Deadline date, Unavailable days and Available work hours per day. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_semester_fee","name":"Semester Fee Calculator","description":"Combine credit charges and fixed dues, with discounts on tuition only.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-semester-fee-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_semester_fee/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_semester_fee.md","page_id":340,"shortcode":"whatson_education_semester_fee","inputs":[{"group":"Tuition charges","label":"Billable credits","type":"number","unit":"credits","help":"","min":0.01,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Tuition charges","label":"Fee per credit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Tuition charges","label":"Tuition discount","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Other semester dues","label":"Fixed semester charges","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other semester dues","label":"One time admission charges","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Other semester dues","label":"Refundable deposit payable now","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Discount applies only to credit tuition. Deposit is included in payable cash but shown separately. All amounts come from your fee notice.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["Semester dues can include credit tuition, fixed charges and a refundable deposit.","Enter the figures from your fee notice and apply any discount to its eligible tuition basis."],"steps":["Enter billable credits, fee per credit and tuition discount.","Enter fixed semester charges, one time admission charges and refundable deposit payable now.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separating the deposit from spending helps explain why payable cash can exceed the nonrefundable fee cost.","check":"Discount applies only to credit tuition. Deposit is included in payable cash but shown separately. All amounts come from your fee notice.","faq":[{"q":"Does a tuition discount reduce every fixed charge?","a":"No. It applies to credit tuition in this model, not automatically to other dues."},{"q":"What should I check before using Semester Fee Calculator?","a":"Check Billable credits, Fee per credit, Tuition discount and Fixed semester charges. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_scholarship","name":"Scholarship Fee Balance","description":"Apply an award to eligible tuition and show remaining education dues.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-scholarship-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_scholarship/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_scholarship.md","page_id":341,"shortcode":"whatson_education_scholarship","inputs":[{"group":"Fee notice","label":"Eligible tuition","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Fee notice","label":"Other noneligible dues","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Award terms","label":"Award basis","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"percent":"Percentage of eligible tuition","amount":"Fixed PKR award"}},{"group":"Award terms","label":"Tuition coverage","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Award terms","label":"Fixed award amount","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Award terms","label":"Maximum award payable","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Award is capped at eligible tuition and the entered maximum payable amount. This does not determine scholarship eligibility.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:31+00:00","intro":["A scholarship may cover eligible tuition while leaving other education charges unpaid.","Enter the award percentage, eligible amount and any cap. Compare the covered tuition with the remaining dues."],"steps":["Enter eligible tuition and other noneligible dues.","Choose award basis. Enter tuition coverage, fixed award amount and maximum award payable.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The cap and eligibility basis keep an award percentage from being applied to the whole bill without justification.","check":"Award is capped at eligible tuition and the entered maximum payable amount. This does not determine scholarship eligibility.","faq":[{"q":"Does the calculator determine scholarship eligibility?","a":"No. It applies an entered award to entered fees. Eligibility comes from the awarding body."},{"q":"What should I check before using Scholarship Fee Balance?","a":"Check Eligible tuition, Other noneligible dues, Award basis and Tuition coverage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_fee_installments","name":"Fee Installment Split","description":"Distribute a fee balance across whole rupee installments.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-fee-installments-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_fee_installments/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_fee_installments.md","page_id":342,"shortcode":"whatson_education_fee_installments","inputs":[{"group":"Fee balance","label":"Total fee payable","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Fee balance","label":"Already paid","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Fee balance","label":"Additional upfront payment","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Agreed payment schedule","label":"Remaining installment count","type":"number","unit":"installments","help":"","min":1,"max":60,"integer":true},{"group":"Agreed payment schedule","label":"First installment due","type":"date","unit":""},{"group":"Agreed payment schedule","label":"Days between due dates","type":"number","unit":"days","help":"","min":1,"max":366,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Amounts must be whole PKR. Due dates use fixed day intervals, not calendar months. No interest, penalties or financing product is assumed.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:32+00:00","intro":["Splitting a fee needs amounts that still add up after rounding to whole rupees.","Enter the balance, installment count and fixed date interval, then review every payment and the total."],"steps":["Enter total fee payable, already paid and additional upfront payment.","Enter remaining installment count, first installment due and days between due dates.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Whole PKR allocation avoids losing part of the balance through independent rounding.","check":"Amounts must be whole PKR. Due dates use fixed day intervals, not calendar months. No interest, penalties or financing product is assumed.","faq":[{"q":"Are date intervals calendar months?","a":"No. They are fixed numbers of days. Check the resulting dates against the agreed schedule."},{"q":"What should I check before using Fee Installment Split?","a":"Check Total fee payable, Already paid, Additional upfront payment and Remaining installment count. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_degree_cost","name":"Degree Cost Projection","description":"Project semester costs with an editable rise per semester.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-degree-cost-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_degree_cost/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_degree_cost.md","page_id":343,"shortcode":"whatson_education_degree_cost","inputs":[{"group":"First semester base","label":"Tuition per first semester","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"First semester base","label":"Other costs per first semester","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme planning","label":"Semester count","type":"number","unit":"semesters","help":"","min":1,"max":30,"integer":true},{"group":"Programme planning","label":"Cost rise per semester","type":"number","unit":"%","help":"","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"Programme planning","label":"One time programme charges","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"The rise compounds once per semester on tuition and other costs. It is a personal assumption, not an inflation forecast or university quote.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:32+00:00","intro":["A degree cost projection can show how assumed fee increases compound across semesters.","Enter tuition, other costs and a rise per semester. Treat the projection as a personal planning scenario."],"steps":["Enter tuition per first semester and other costs per first semester.","Enter semester count, cost rise per semester and one time programme charges.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Yearly looking totals do not hide the semester by semester assumption.","check":"The rise compounds once per semester on tuition and other costs. It is a personal assumption, not an inflation forecast or university quote.","faq":[{"q":"Is the increase an inflation forecast?","a":"No. It is your entered assumption, not a university quotation or economic prediction."},{"q":"What should I check before using Degree Cost Projection?","a":"Check Tuition per first semester, Other costs per first semester, Semester count and Cost rise per semester. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_hostel_budget","name":"Hostel Student Budget","description":"Add living expenses, moving in costs and refundable cash deposits.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-hostel-budget-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_hostel_budget/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_hostel_budget.md","page_id":344,"shortcode":"whatson_education_hostel_budget","inputs":[{"group":"Stay length","label":"Months staying","type":"number","unit":"months","help":"","min":0.01,"max":120,"integer":false},{"group":"Monthly expenses","label":"Room or hostel rent","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Monthly expenses","label":"Food and mess","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Monthly expenses","label":"Utilities and internet","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Monthly expenses","label":"Personal and laundry","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Moving in","label":"Nonrefundable setup cost","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Moving in","label":"Refundable deposit","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Rates are visitor inputs. Cash required includes the refundable deposit; spending estimate excludes it.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:32+00:00","intro":["Moving into a hostel can require more cash than the living expenses alone.","List recurring costs, moving costs and refundable deposits. Compare total cash needed with estimated spending."],"steps":["Enter months staying.","Enter room or hostel rent, food and mess, utilities and internet and personal and laundry.","Enter nonrefundable setup cost and refundable deposit.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Deposit separation keeps money tied up temporarily from being confused with a permanent expense.","check":"Rates are visitor inputs. Cash required includes the refundable deposit; spending estimate excludes it.","faq":[{"q":"Are local hostel rates supplied?","a":"No. Enter quotes for the hostel, food and other services you intend to use."},{"q":"What should I check before using Hostel Student Budget?","a":"Check Months staying, Room or hostel rent, Food and mess and Utilities and internet. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_commute_cost","name":"Student Commute Cost","description":"Compare public transport with a vehicle using entered fares and fuel prices.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-commute-cost-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_commute_cost/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_commute_cost.md","page_id":345,"shortcode":"whatson_education_commute_cost","inputs":[{"group":"Campus travel","label":"Campus days per month","type":"number","unit":"","help":"","min":0,"max":31,"integer":true},{"group":"Campus travel","label":"One way distance","type":"number","unit":"km","help":"","min":0,"max":1000,"integer":false},{"group":"Campus travel","label":"Public transport one way fare","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Vehicle assumptions","label":"Fuel economy","type":"number","unit":"km/L","help":"","min":0.01,"max":200,"integer":false},{"group":"Vehicle assumptions","label":"Fuel price per litre","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Vehicle assumptions","label":"Parking per campus day","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Vehicle assumptions","label":"Maintenance allowance per km","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Two trips per campus day. Vehicle estimate includes fuel, entered parking and per km allowance, but excludes purchase, insurance and fixed costs.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:32+00:00","intro":["Campus travel costs depend on attendance days and a matching round trip basis.","Enter fares or vehicle costs using the same route and days. Include parking and the chosen distance allowance."],"steps":["Enter campus days per month, one way distance and public transport one way fare.","Enter fuel economy, fuel price per litre, parking per campus day and maintenance allowance per km.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The comparison keeps fuel arithmetic separate from the public transport fare.","check":"Two trips per campus day. Vehicle estimate includes fuel, entered parking and per km allowance, but excludes purchase, insurance and fixed costs.","faq":[{"q":"Does the vehicle total include purchase or insurance?","a":"No. Those fixed ownership costs are excluded unless handled in a separate budget."},{"q":"What should I check before using Student Commute Cost?","a":"Check Campus days per month, One way distance, Public transport one way fare and Fuel economy. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_printing_cost","name":"Printing and Binding Cost","description":"Price printed sheets separately from printed sides and binding.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-printing-cost-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_printing_cost/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_printing_cost.md","page_id":346,"shortcode":"whatson_education_printing_cost","inputs":[{"group":"Document and copies","label":"Document pages","type":"number","unit":"pages","help":"","min":1,"max":100000,"integer":true},{"group":"Document and copies","label":"Copies","type":"number","unit":"copies","help":"","min":1,"max":10000,"integer":true},{"group":"Document and copies","label":"Print sides","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"single":"One side per sheet","duplex":"Two sides per sheet"}},{"group":"Print shop quote","label":"Rate per printed side","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Print shop quote","label":"Extra paper charge per sheet","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Print shop quote","label":"Binding per copy","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Duplex sheet count is rounded separately for each copy. Side rate and extra paper charge are separate quote components.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:32+00:00","intro":["Double sided printing can reduce paper sheets without reducing the number of printed sides.","Enter the quote's side, paper and binding charges separately. Review sheets for each copy before combining totals."],"steps":["Choose print sides. Enter document pages and copies.","Enter rate per printed side, extra paper charge per sheet and binding per copy.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate sheet and side counts help reconcile a print shop's itemised quote.","check":"Duplex sheet count is rounded separately for each copy. Side rate and extra paper charge are separate quote components.","faq":[{"q":"Is duplex rounding done across all copies together?","a":"No. Sheets are rounded separately for each copy so a spare side in one copy does not serve another."},{"q":"What should I check before using Printing and Binding Cost?","a":"Check Document pages, Copies, Print sides and Rate per printed side. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"education_savings_goal","name":"Education Savings Goal","description":"Plan monthly saving for a fee or equipment target without investment returns.","category":"Student & Education","category_id":"education","url":"https://whatson.pk/education-savings-goal-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_savings_goal/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/education_savings_goal.md","page_id":347,"shortcode":"whatson_education_savings_goal","inputs":[{"group":"Your education goal","label":"Goal amount","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your education goal","label":"Already saved","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Your education goal","label":"Months until payment","type":"number","unit":"months","help":"","min":1,"max":120,"integer":true},{"group":"Your current saving plan","label":"Planned monthly saving","type":"number","unit":"PKR","help":"","min":0,"max":100000000,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Uses constant monthly saving with no interest or investment return. Future fee changes and living costs are excluded.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T15:55:32+00:00","intro":["A fee or equipment target becomes a monthly plan after existing savings are deducted.","Enter the target amount and months available. Review the remaining balance before choosing a saving commitment."],"steps":["Enter goal amount, already saved and months until payment.","Enter planned monthly saving.","Select Calculate result. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The constant contribution basis keeps the plan understandable without assumed investment returns.","check":"Uses constant monthly saving with no interest or investment return. Future fee changes and living costs are excluded.","faq":[{"q":"Does it account for future fee increases?","a":"No. Update the target when the expected cost changes. Interest and investment returns are not included."},{"q":"What should I check before using Education Savings Goal?","a":"Check Goal amount, Already saved, Months until payment and Planned monthly saving. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_json_format","name":"JSON Formatter & Validator","description":"Validate, format or compact JSON without rounding its number tokens.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-json-format-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_format/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_format.md","page_id":382,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_json_format","inputs":[{"group":"JSON document","label":"JSON input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Output style","label":"Formatting","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"pretty":"Pretty print","compact":"Compact"}},{"group":"Output style","label":"Indent spaces","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"2":"2 spaces","4":"4 spaces"}},{"group":"Output style","label":"Object keys","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"no":"Keep entered order","yes":"Sort object keys"}}],"limitations":"Duplicate object keys are rejected. Empty objects, empty arrays and numeric spelling are preserved. JSON depth is limited to 40.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Readable JSON is easier to inspect than one long line, but formatting should not change its number tokens.","Paste a document and choose indentation or compact output. Review validation errors before copying the result."],"steps":["Paste or enter JSON input.","Choose formatting, indent spaces and object keys.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Large integer spellings and empty structures stay intact during formatting.","check":"Duplicate object keys are rejected. Empty objects, empty arrays and numeric spelling are preserved. JSON depth is limited to 40.","faq":[{"q":"Are duplicate object keys accepted?","a":"No. Duplicate keys are rejected so one value is not silently substituted for another."},{"q":"What should I check before using JSON Formatter & Validator?","a":"Check JSON input, Formatting, Indent spaces and Object keys. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_json_pointer","name":"JSON Pointer Explorer","description":"Read a nested value using an RFC 6901 pointer and inspect its children.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-json-pointer-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_pointer/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_pointer.md","page_id":383,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_json_pointer","inputs":[{"group":"Document","label":"JSON input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Location","label":"JSON pointer","type":"text","unit":"","help":"Empty pointer selects the root. Use ~1 for slash and ~0 for tilde."}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A nested value needs an exact path when several parts of a JSON document use similar names.","Enter the document and a pointer, then inspect the located value and children."],"steps":["Paste or enter JSON input.","Enter JSON pointer.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Pointer tokens give a precise location rather than relying on a broad text search.","check":"Array indexes start at zero. Escape slashes and tildes using the pointer token conventions.","faq":[{"q":"Do array positions start at one?","a":"No. Array indexes start at zero. Escape slashes and tildes using the pointer token conventions."},{"q":"What should I check before using JSON Pointer Explorer?","a":"Check JSON input and JSON pointer. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_json_diff","name":"JSON Structure Diff","description":"Compare JSON nodes by type, value and path, ignoring object key order.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-json-diff-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_diff/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_diff.md","page_id":384,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_json_diff","inputs":[{"group":"Before","label":"Original JSON","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"After","label":"Changed JSON","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Arrays compare by index. Numeric spellings compare exactly, so 1 and 1.0 differ. Maximum 300 differences.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Whitespace changes can obscure the actual difference between two JSON documents.","Compare their nodes by path, type and value, then read each change in its surrounding structure."],"steps":["Paste or enter original JSON.","Paste or enter changed JSON.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Object key order is ignored, leaving the comparison focused on the data structure.","check":"Arrays compare by index. Numeric spellings compare exactly, so 1 and 1.0 differ. Maximum 300 differences.","faq":[{"q":"Are 1 and 1.0 treated as identical?","a":"No. Numeric spellings compare exactly in this tool. Arrays are compared by index."},{"q":"What should I check before using JSON Structure Diff?","a":"Check Original JSON and Changed JSON. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_json_csv","name":"JSON to CSV","description":"Turn a list of flat JSON objects into a quoted CSV dataset.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-json-csv-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_csv/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_json_csv.md","page_id":385,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_json_csv","inputs":[{"group":"JSON records","label":"Array of objects","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"CSV output","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}},{"group":"CSV output","label":"CSV export values","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Protect spreadsheet formula cells","no":"Preserve raw machine values"}}],"limitations":"Fields use the union of object keys. Missing and null fields become blank cells. Nested objects and arrays become compact JSON in a cell.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A list of object records can become a spreadsheet dataset when their fields are made explicit.","Paste the records and inspect the combined columns before exporting. Review missing values on the same basis."],"steps":["Paste or enter array of objects.","Choose input separator and CSV export values.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The union of field names prevents a column from disappearing because it was absent in the first record.","check":"Fields use the union of object keys. Missing and null fields become blank cells. Nested objects and arrays become compact JSON in a cell.","faq":[{"q":"What happens to nested objects?","a":"They become compact JSON inside a CSV cell. Missing and null values become blank cells."},{"q":"What should I check before using JSON to CSV?","a":"Check Array of objects, Input separator and CSV export values. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_csv_json","name":"CSV to JSON","description":"Convert a header based CSV into JSON while preserving every cell as text.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-csv-json-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_json/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_json.md","page_id":386,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_csv_json","inputs":[{"group":"CSV dataset","label":"CSV input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"CSV parsing","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}}],"limitations":"All cell values stay strings, including leading zero codes and blank cells. Headers must be nonempty and unique.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Codes and identifiers can lose meaning when leading zeros disappear during data conversion.","Use unique nonempty headers and review the JSON output as text values, including blanks."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV input.","Choose input separator.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Preserving cell strings keeps identifiers such as 0012 distinct from the number 12.","check":"All cell values stay strings, including leading zero codes and blank cells. Headers must be nonempty and unique.","faq":[{"q":"Are numeric looking cells converted into numbers?","a":"No. Every cell remains a string. Decide any later numeric conversion explicitly in your application."},{"q":"What should I check before using CSV to JSON?","a":"Check CSV input and Input separator. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_csv_clean","name":"CSV Cleaner & Deduplicator","description":"Trim cells, remove duplicate records and reserialize quoted CSV.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-csv-clean-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_clean/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_clean.md","page_id":387,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_csv_clean","inputs":[{"group":"Dataset","label":"CSV input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Cleaning choices","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}},{"group":"Cleaning choices","label":"Cell whitespace","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Trim cell edges","no":"Keep whitespace"}},{"group":"Cleaning choices","label":"Duplicate rows","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Keep first identical row","no":"Keep every row"}},{"group":"Cleaning choices","label":"CSV export values","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Protect spreadsheet formula cells","no":"Preserve raw machine values"}}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Cleaning a CSV needs record aware handling because commas and line breaks can belong inside quoted cells.","Choose the trim and duplicate rules, then review the reserialized dataset before replacing a source."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV input.","Choose input separator, cell whitespace, duplicate rows and CSV export values.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Matching rules stay explicit instead of treating every similar looking row as identical.","check":"It removes records under the selected row rules and cannot decide business identity.","faq":[{"q":"Does it merge different customers with similar names?","a":"No. It removes records under the selected row rules and cannot decide business identity."},{"q":"What should I check before using CSV Cleaner & Deduplicator?","a":"Check CSV input, Input separator, Cell whitespace and Duplicate rows. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_csv_columns","name":"CSV Column Selector","description":"Select named columns in your chosen order without losing cell values.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-csv-columns-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_columns/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_columns.md","page_id":388,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_csv_columns","inputs":[{"group":"Source","label":"CSV input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Selected headers","label":"One header per line","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Selected headers","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}},{"group":"Selected headers","label":"CSV export values","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Protect spreadsheet formula cells","no":"Preserve raw machine values"}}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A smaller export should contain the columns needed for its next use, in the required order.","Enter exact header names and review the selected dataset before sharing it."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV input.","Choose input separator and CSV export values. Paste or enter one header per line.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Cell values stay attached to their named columns while the output order changes.","check":"Inspect the retained cells and metadata yourself. Sensitive content can remain in otherwise useful fields.","faq":[{"q":"Does column removal guarantee all private data is gone?","a":"No. Inspect the retained cells and metadata yourself. Sensitive content can remain in otherwise useful fields."},{"q":"What should I check before using CSV Column Selector?","a":"Check CSV input, One header per line, Input separator and CSV export values. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_csv_merge","name":"CSV Dataset Merger","description":"Append two CSV datasets with exactly matching header order.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-csv-merge-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_merge/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_merge.md","page_id":389,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_csv_merge","inputs":[{"group":"First dataset","label":"CSV one","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Second dataset","label":"CSV two","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Merge rules","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}},{"group":"Merge rules","label":"Duplicate rows","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"no":"Keep every row","yes":"Keep first identical row"}},{"group":"Merge rules","label":"CSV export values","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Protect spreadsheet formula cells","no":"Preserve raw machine values"}}],"limitations":"This appends records. It does not join by a key or guess mismatched columns.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Appending datasets is appropriate when both files describe the same columns in the same sequence.","Check both headers before combining records, then review the output row count."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV one.","Paste or enter CSV two.","Choose input separator, duplicate rows and CSV export values.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Strict matching avoids guessing which differently ordered fields belong together.","check":"This appends records. It does not join by a key or guess mismatched columns.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a join by customer or product key?","a":"No. It appends rows. Key based joins require a separate operation."},{"q":"What should I check before using CSV Dataset Merger?","a":"Check CSV one, CSV two, Input separator and Duplicate rows. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_csv_stats","name":"CSV Numeric Column Statistics","description":"Summarise an explicitly selected numeric column and report blank values.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-csv-stats-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_stats/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_csv_stats.md","page_id":390,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_csv_stats","inputs":[{"group":"Dataset","label":"CSV input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Numeric field","label":"Numeric header","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Numeric field","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}},{"group":"Numeric field","label":"Standard deviation","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"population":"Population","sample":"Sample"}}],"limitations":"Blank cells are excluded. Nonblank nonnumeric cells are rejected. Numeric magnitude is limited to one trillion. Thousands separators are not guessed.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A numeric summary needs a deliberately selected column and a clear rule for blanks.","Choose the header and inspect accepted values before reading the statistical results."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV input.","Choose input separator and standard deviation. Enter numeric header.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Empty cells are reported separately rather than silently becoming zeros.","check":"Blank cells are excluded. Nonblank nonnumeric cells are rejected. Numeric magnitude is limited to one trillion. Thousands separators are not guessed.","faq":[{"q":"Are nonnumeric cells ignored?","a":"No. Nonblank nonnumeric values are rejected. Correct the input rather than accepting a partial summary."},{"q":"What should I check before using CSV Numeric Column Statistics?","a":"Check CSV input, Numeric header, Input separator and Standard deviation. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_text_diff","name":"Line by Line Text Diff","description":"Compare two texts with an exact line sequence and show additions and removals.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-text-diff-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_diff/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_diff.md","page_id":391,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_text_diff","inputs":[{"group":"Original text","label":"Before","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Changed text","label":"After","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Comparison","label":"Whitespace","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"no":"Compare exactly","yes":"Ignore line edge whitespace"}}],"limitations":"Uses a line based longest common subsequence. Limited to 200 lines per text. The full submitted texts remain unchanged.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Two text versions can differ through inserted lines as well as changed wording.","Paste each version and inspect the additions and removals in line sequence."],"steps":["Paste or enter before.","Paste or enter after.","Choose whitespace.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The original submissions remain unchanged while differences are presented separately.","check":"Uses a line based longest common subsequence. Limited to 200 lines per text. The full submitted texts remain unchanged.","faq":[{"q":"Is every changed line a change in meaning?","a":"No. Spacing and line breaks can affect the comparison. Review the surrounding text before interpreting it."},{"q":"What should I check before using Line by Line Text Diff?","a":"Check Before, After and Whitespace. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_text_dedupe","name":"Duplicate Line Remover","description":"Keep the first occurrence of each line with optional case and whitespace rules.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-text-dedupe-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_dedupe/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_dedupe.md","page_id":392,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_text_dedupe","inputs":[{"group":"Lines","label":"Text lines","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Match rules","label":"Letter case","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"sensitive":"Case sensitive","ignore":"Ignore case"}},{"group":"Match rules","label":"Line edges","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"yes":"Trim edges","no":"Keep edges"}},{"group":"Match rules","label":"Blank lines","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"remove":"Remove blank lines","keep":"Keep first blank line"}}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Repeated lines can be literal duplicates or differ only in spaces and letter case.","Choose the matching rules that fit the list and review which first occurrences remain."],"steps":["Paste or enter text lines.","Choose letter case, line edges and blank lines.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Keeping the first occurrence gives a predictable basis for cleaning repeated entries.","check":"If case matters to the identifier, keep case sensitivity enabled and check the retained list.","faq":[{"q":"Can case insensitive matching remove distinct codes?","a":"Yes. If case matters to the identifier, keep case sensitivity enabled and check the retained list."},{"q":"What should I check before using Duplicate Line Remover?","a":"Check Text lines, Letter case, Line edges and Blank lines. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_text_sort","name":"Text Line Sorter","description":"Sort lines naturally, lexically or by numeric values.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-text-sort-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_sort/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_sort.md","page_id":393,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_text_sort","inputs":[{"group":"Input lines","label":"Text lines","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Sort order","label":"Comparison","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"natural":"Natural text order","lexical":"UTF8 byte lexical","numeric":"Numeric values"}},{"group":"Sort order","label":"Direction","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"asc":"Ascending","desc":"Descending"}}],"limitations":"Natural order uses case sensitive PHP natural comparison. Lexical mode is byte ordering, not a language collation.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Natural order, byte order and numeric order can produce different sequences from the same list.","Choose the mode that matches the entries, then inspect the sorted output before using it."],"steps":["Paste or enter text lines.","Choose comparison and direction.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The mode choice makes the reason for Item 2 and Item 10 ordering visible.","check":"Natural order uses case sensitive PHP natural comparison. Lexical mode is byte ordering, not a language collation.","faq":[{"q":"Is lexical mode a language dictionary order?","a":"No. It uses byte ordering rather than locale specific collation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Text Line Sorter?","a":"Check Text lines, Comparison and Direction. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_text_stats","name":"Unicode Text Counter","description":"Count UTF8 characters, words, lines and whitespace in English or Urdu text.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-text-stats-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_stats/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_stats.md","page_id":394,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_text_stats","inputs":[{"group":"Text sample","label":"Text input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Characters count Unicode code points, not visual graphemes. Words are runs of letters or numbers, allowing internal apostrophes. Empty input has zero lines.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A visible character can contain more than one Unicode code point. That matters when comparing text limits.","Paste English or Urdu text and read the counters according to their stated definitions."],"steps":["Paste or enter text input.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Words, lines and code points stay separate instead of being reduced to one ambiguous character total.","check":"Characters count Unicode code points, not visual graphemes. Words are runs of letters or numbers, allowing internal apostrophes. Empty input has zero lines.","faq":[{"q":"Are visible combined symbols always counted as one character?","a":"No. The character count uses Unicode code points, not visual graphemes."},{"q":"What should I check before using Unicode Text Counter?","a":"Check Text input. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_text_case","name":"Text Case Converter","description":"Apply Unicode case conversion where the installed PHP mbstring supports it.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-text-case-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_case/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_text_case.md","page_id":395,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_text_case","inputs":[{"group":"Text","label":"Text input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Conversion","label":"Letter case","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"upper":"UPPERCASE","lower":"lowercase","title":"Title Case"}}],"limitations":"Requires mbstring. Case operations leave Urdu letters unchanged and do not transliterate names.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Letter case conversion changes text presentation without correcting the wording.","Choose a supported case operation and review names, abbreviations and identifiers afterwards."],"steps":["Paste or enter text input.","Choose letter case.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Unicode handling preserves text while applying the available letter case rules.","check":"Requires mbstring. Case operations leave Urdu letters unchanged and do not transliterate names.","faq":[{"q":"Will it transliterate Urdu names?","a":"No. Urdu letters remain unchanged by case operations, and no transliteration is performed."},{"q":"What should I check before using Text Case Converter?","a":"Check Text input and Letter case. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_base64","name":"Base64 Encoder & Decoder","description":"Encode UTF8 text, decode strict Base64 and inspect binary results as hex.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-base64-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_base64/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_base64.md","page_id":396,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_base64","inputs":[{"group":"Operation","label":"Mode","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"encode":"Encode text","decode":"Decode Base64"}},{"group":"Operation","label":"Alphabet","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"standard":"Standard Base64","url":"Base64url"}},{"group":"Source","label":"Text or encoded data","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Decoded invalid UTF8 or control bytes are shown as hexadecimal. Binary bytes are not rendered as HTML. Canonical padding is checked.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Base64 represents bytes as text. It does not make a message confidential.","Choose encoding or decoding and inspect whether the decoded bytes form readable UTF8."],"steps":["Choose mode and alphabet.","Paste or enter text or encoded data.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Binary results are shown as hexadecimal rather than being executed or displayed as markup.","check":"Decoded invalid UTF8 or control bytes are shown as hexadecimal. Binary bytes are not rendered as HTML. Canonical padding is checked.","faq":[{"q":"Why can a decoded result appear as hex?","a":"Invalid UTF8 or control bytes are not safely readable text. Hex preserves a view of those bytes."},{"q":"What should I check before using Base64 Encoder & Decoder?","a":"Check Mode, Alphabet and Text or encoded data. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_url_codec","name":"URL Component Encoder & Decoder","description":"Encode a URL component or decode percent escapes without fetching a URL.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-url-codec-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_url_codec/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_url_codec.md","page_id":397,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_url_codec","inputs":[{"group":"Operation","label":"Mode","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"encode":"Encode component","decode":"Decode component"}},{"group":"Operation","label":"Encoding convention","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"rfc3986":"RFC 3986, spaces as %20","form":"Form encoding, spaces as +"}},{"group":"Component","label":"Text or encoded component","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Encoding applies to a component, not an entire URL. Malformed percent escapes and decoded invalid UTF8 are rejected.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A URL component needs escaping without changing the separators of the complete address.","Encode the value that belongs in the component, or decode its percent escapes carefully."],"steps":["Choose mode and encoding convention.","Paste or enter text or encoded component.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Component handling keeps spaces and reserved symbols distinct from URL structure.","check":"Encoding applies to a component, not an entire URL. Malformed percent escapes and decoded invalid UTF8 are rejected.","faq":[{"q":"Should I encode the entire URL as one component?","a":"Not when you intend to preserve its address structure. Encode individual values on the required component basis."},{"q":"What should I check before using URL Component Encoder & Decoder?","a":"Check Mode, Encoding convention and Text or encoded component. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_url_parse","name":"URL Component Inspector","description":"Inspect a URL and its ordered query pairs, preserving duplicate keys.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-url-parse-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_url_parse/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_url_parse.md","page_id":398,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_url_parse","inputs":[{"group":"URL","label":"Absolute HTTP or HTTPS URL","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Query convention","label":"Plus sign handling","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"form":"Treat + as space","rfc3986":"Keep literal +"}}],"limitations":"The URL is never requested. Credentials inside the URL are rejected. Query duplicates and their order remain visible.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Inspecting an address can reveal its host, path and query without contacting the destination.","Paste a URL and review each component, including repeated query keys in their original order."],"steps":["Enter absolute HTTP or HTTPS URL.","Choose plus sign handling.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The inspection stays local to the parsing operation and makes duplicate parameters visible.","check":"The URL is never requested. Credentials inside the URL are rejected. Query duplicates and their order remain visible.","faq":[{"q":"Does parsing prove the link is safe?","a":"No. It does not verify the destination, content or reputation, and it does not fetch the URL."},{"q":"What should I check before using URL Component Inspector?","a":"Check Absolute HTTP or HTTPS URL and Plus sign handling. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_query_builder","name":"Query String Builder","description":"Create an encoded query from an ordered CSV of key and value pairs.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-query-builder-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_query_builder/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_query_builder.md","page_id":399,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_query_builder","inputs":[{"group":"Ordered pairs","label":"CSV with key,value headers","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Encoding","label":"Space encoding","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"rfc3986":"%20","form":"+"}}],"limitations":"Duplicate keys are retained in input order. The output is a query component, without an initial question mark.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Query parameters can repeat, and their order may matter to the receiving service.","Enter ordered key and value rows and review the escaped query component."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV with key,value headers.","Choose space encoding.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Duplicate keys remain in sequence rather than collapsing into one value.","check":"Duplicate keys are retained in input order. The output is a query component, without an initial question mark.","faq":[{"q":"Does the output include the initial question mark?","a":"No. Add the query component to the intended URL using the appropriate separator."},{"q":"What should I check before using Query String Builder?","a":"Check CSV with key,value headers and Space encoding. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_html_entities","name":"HTML Entity Encoder & Decoder","description":"Escape HTML characters or decode HTML5 entities into plain displayed text.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-html-entities-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_html_entities/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_html_entities.md","page_id":400,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_html_entities","inputs":[{"group":"Operation","label":"Mode","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"encode":"Escape special HTML characters","decode":"Decode HTML5 entities"}},{"group":"Content","label":"Text or entity source","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Only special characters are escaped. Results are always displayed as plain text and never executed as markup.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["HTML entities and readable symbols are different representations of text.","Choose escaping or decoding and inspect the plain text result before inserting it elsewhere."],"steps":["Choose mode.","Paste or enter text or entity source.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The result is displayed as text, so converted characters are not executed as HTML.","check":"Only special characters are escaped. Results are always displayed as plain text and never executed as markup.","faq":[{"q":"Is this a complete HTML sanitizer?","a":"No. Output safety depends on its destination context. Entity conversion alone is not a universal sanitization step."},{"q":"What should I check before using HTML Entity Encoder & Decoder?","a":"Check Mode and Text or entity source. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_html_text","name":"HTML to Plain Text","description":"Extract text from pasted HTML with block spacing and script content removed.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-html-text-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_html_text/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_html_text.md","page_id":401,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_html_text","inputs":[{"group":"HTML source","label":"HTML input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Removes script, style, template and noscript blocks, then tags. This is text extraction, not a security sanitiser or a browser DOM renderer.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A pasted HTML snippet often contains scripts and layout tags that do not belong in a plain text copy.","Extract the text and review block spacing and omitted content before reusing it."],"steps":["Paste or enter HTML input.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Removing noncontent blocks gives a readable starting point for small snippets.","check":"Removes script, style, template and noscript blocks, then tags. This is text extraction, not a security sanitiser or a browser DOM renderer.","faq":[{"q":"Will it reproduce a browser's rendered article exactly?","a":"No. It is text extraction, not a DOM renderer or a complete article extraction service."},{"q":"What should I check before using HTML to Plain Text?","a":"Check HTML input. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_hash","name":"Text Hash Generator","description":"Calculate checksum digests for the exact UTF8 bytes you enter.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-hash-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_hash/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_hash.md","page_id":402,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_hash","inputs":[{"group":"Exact source bytes","label":"Text input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Checksum","label":"Algorithm","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"sha256":"SHA256","sha512":"SHA512","sha1":"SHA1 legacy checksum","md5":"MD5 legacy checksum"}}],"limitations":"Whitespace and line endings change digests. MD5 and SHA1 are legacy checksums, not password storage methods.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A checksum describes the exact bytes entered, including spaces and line endings.","Choose the digest and compare results using an unchanged input basis."],"steps":["Paste or enter text input.","Choose algorithm.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Exact text handling makes small input differences visible through the resulting digest.","check":"Whitespace and line endings change digests. MD5 and SHA1 are legacy checksums, not password storage methods.","faq":[{"q":"Should MD5 or SHA1 be used to store passwords?","a":"No. They are legacy checksum options here, not password storage methods."},{"q":"What should I check before using Text Hash Generator?","a":"Check Text input and Algorithm. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_hmac","name":"HMAC Signature Generator","description":"Create a keyed SHA256 or SHA512 HMAC from an exact message.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-hmac-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_hmac/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_hmac.md","page_id":403,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_hmac","inputs":[{"group":"Message","label":"Message","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Key and output","label":"Demo secret key","type":"password","unit":"","help":"The key is sent to this WordPress server for PHP processing. Use a demo key, not a live credential."},{"group":"Key and output","label":"Algorithm","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"sha256":"HMAC SHA256","sha512":"HMAC SHA512"}},{"group":"Key and output","label":"Digest representation","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"hex":"Hexadecimal","base64":"Base64"}}],"limitations":"The response and exports redact the key. The plugin does not save inputs; hosting request logging is outside its control.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["An HMAC comparison requires the same message bytes, key and algorithm on both sides.","Use example keys while testing and review the chosen output representation."],"steps":["Paste or enter message.","Choose algorithm and digest representation. Enter demo secret key.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Key redaction keeps the secret out of the displayed result and export.","check":"The response and exports redact the key. The plugin does not save inputs; hosting request logging is outside its control.","faq":[{"q":"Is the key processed only in my browser?","a":"No. Calculation runs on the WordPress server. Hosting request logging is outside the tool's control."},{"q":"What should I check before using HMAC Signature Generator?","a":"Check Message, Demo secret key, Algorithm and Digest representation. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_uuid","name":"UUID Version 4 Generator","description":"Generate independent UUIDs with PHP cryptographic randomness.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-uuid-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_uuid/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_uuid.md","page_id":404,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_uuid","inputs":[{"group":"Identifier batch","label":"Number of UUIDs","type":"number","unit":"identifiers","min":1,"max":100,"integer":true},{"group":"Identifier batch","label":"Output case","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"lower":"Lowercase","upper":"Uppercase"}}],"limitations":"UUIDs use random_bytes, version 4 and RFC variant bits. They are identifiers, not authentication secrets.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["Random record identifiers help separate new entries without relying on a sequential label.","Generate the required UUIDs and check how they will be stored in the receiving system."],"steps":["Choose output case. Enter number of UUIDs.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Version and variant bits follow the UUID v4 format with cryptographic randomness.","check":"UUIDs use random_bytes, version 4 and RFC variant bits. They are identifiers, not authentication secrets.","faq":[{"q":"Can a UUID replace an authentication secret?","a":"No. These are identifiers. Authorization and database uniqueness still need their own controls."},{"q":"What should I check before using UUID Version 4 Generator?","a":"Check Number of UUIDs and Output case. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_timestamp","name":"Unix Timestamp Converter","description":"Convert exact whole seconds or milliseconds and inspect UTC and Pakistan time.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-timestamp-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_timestamp/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_timestamp.md","page_id":405,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_timestamp","inputs":[{"group":"Direction","label":"Input type","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"epoch":"Unix timestamp","date":"Date and time"}},{"group":"Direction","label":"Timestamp unit","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"seconds":"Seconds","milliseconds":"Milliseconds"}},{"group":"Input","label":"Signed whole timestamp","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Input","label":"Date and time","type":"text","unit":"","help":"Format YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS"},{"group":"Date interpretation","label":"Timezone for date input","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"Asia/Karachi":"Pakistan, Asia/Karachi","UTC":"UTC"}}],"limitations":"Dates supported from 1900 through 2200. Milliseconds retain their remainder, including before the epoch. Date mode has second precision.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A Unix value means a different date if milliseconds are mistaken for seconds.","Select the unit explicitly and inspect UTC alongside Pakistan time."],"steps":["Choose input type and timestamp unit.","Enter signed whole timestamp and date and time.","Choose timezone for date input.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Whole timestamp handling preserves the millisecond remainder, including dates before the epoch.","check":"Dates supported from 1900 through 2200. Milliseconds retain their remainder, including before the epoch. Date mode has second precision.","faq":[{"q":"Does date input retain subsecond precision?","a":"Date mode uses second precision. Millisecond input retains its remainder in the timestamp conversion."},{"q":"What should I check before using Unix Timestamp Converter?","a":"Check Input type, Timestamp unit, Signed whole timestamp and Date and time. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_timezone","name":"Timezone Date Converter","description":"Convert an explicitly entered wall clock time and flag DST ambiguity.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-timezone-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_timezone/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_timezone.md","page_id":406,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_timezone","inputs":[{"group":"Wall clock","label":"Date and time","type":"text","unit":"","help":"Format YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS"},{"group":"Zones","label":"Source timezone","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"Asia/Karachi":"Pakistan","UTC":"UTC","Europe/London":"London","America/New_York":"New York","Asia/Dubai":"Dubai"}},{"group":"Zones","label":"Destination timezone","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"UTC":"UTC","Asia/Karachi":"Pakistan","Europe/London":"London","America/New_York":"New York","Asia/Dubai":"Dubai"}}],"limitations":"Uses the host PHP timezone database. Nonexistent or ambiguous source times during clock changes are rejected.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["The same wall clock time can refer to different moments across named time zones.","Enter a specific date and source zone, then review the destination time."],"steps":["Enter date and time.","Choose source timezone and destination timezone.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Date aware conversion avoids relying on one permanent offset for a zone that changes clocks.","check":"Uses the host PHP timezone database. Nonexistent or ambiguous source times during clock changes are rejected.","faq":[{"q":"What happens to ambiguous clock change times?","a":"Ambiguous or nonexistent source wall times are rejected rather than silently selecting one interpretation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Timezone Date Converter?","a":"Check Date and time, Source timezone and Destination timezone. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_number_base","name":"Exact Number Base Converter","description":"Convert signed integer strings across bases 2 to 36 without float rounding.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-number-base-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_number_base/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_number_base.md","page_id":407,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_number_base","inputs":[{"group":"Integer string","label":"Input integer","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Number systems","label":"Input base","type":"number","unit":"base","min":2,"max":36,"integer":true},{"group":"Number systems","label":"Output base","type":"number","unit":"base","min":2,"max":36,"integer":true}],"limitations":"Maximum 128 digits plus an optional sign. Fractions and exponential notation are not supported. Letter digits are case insensitive.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A long integer can lose precision if converted through floating point arithmetic.","Enter a signed whole number string and choose bases from 2 through 36."],"steps":["Enter input integer.","Enter input base and output base.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"String based conversion keeps large integer representations exact on the supported basis.","check":"Maximum 128 digits plus an optional sign. Fractions and exponential notation are not supported. Letter digits are case insensitive.","faq":[{"q":"Are fractions or exponential notation supported?","a":"No. Use whole number digit strings with an optional sign, up to the stated length limit."},{"q":"What should I check before using Exact Number Base Converter?","a":"Check Input integer, Input base and Output base. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_bytes","name":"Data Size Unit Converter","description":"Compare decimal byte units with binary byte units.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-bytes-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_bytes/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_bytes.md","page_id":408,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_bytes","inputs":[{"group":"Size","label":"Input size","type":"number","unit":"","min":0,"max":1000000000000,"integer":false},{"group":"Size","label":"Input unit","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"B":"Bytes","kB":"kB, 1000 bytes","MB":"MB, 1000² bytes","GB":"GB, 1000³ bytes","KiB":"KiB, 1024 bytes","MiB":"MiB, 1024² bytes","GiB":"GiB, 1024³ bytes"}}],"limitations":"This converts bytes, not bits. Results use floating arithmetic and are limited to one quadrillion bytes.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A megabyte and a mebibyte use different multipliers. Their labels should stay visible during conversion.","Choose the exact source byte unit and compare decimal and binary results."],"steps":["Choose input unit. Enter input size.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Separate unit families help explain differences between download size and displayed storage figures.","check":"This converts bytes, not bits. Results use floating arithmetic and are limited to one quadrillion bytes.","faq":[{"q":"Does this convert transfer speeds or bits?","a":"No. It converts byte amounts. Speed needs a time basis and bit conversion is a separate operation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Data Size Unit Converter?","a":"Check Input size and Input unit. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_color","name":"HEX RGB HSL Color Converter","description":"Convert a six or three digit HEX color, RGB channels or HSL values.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-color-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_color/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_color.md","page_id":409,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_color","inputs":[{"group":"Input color model","label":"Color source","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"hex":"HEX color","rgb":"RGB channels","hsl":"HSL values"}},{"group":"HEX","label":"HEX color","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"RGB","label":"Red","type":"number","unit":"","min":0,"max":255,"integer":true},{"group":"RGB","label":"Green","type":"number","unit":"","min":0,"max":255,"integer":true},{"group":"RGB","label":"Blue","type":"number","unit":"","min":0,"max":255,"integer":true},{"group":"HSL","label":"Hue","type":"number","unit":"degrees","min":0,"max":360,"integer":false},{"group":"HSL","label":"Saturation","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false},{"group":"HSL","label":"Lightness","type":"number","unit":"%","min":0,"max":100,"integer":false}],"limitations":"Opaque colors only. HSL conversion rounds RGB channels to whole values. It does not calculate accessibility contrast.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["HEX, RGB and HSL describe colour through different values rather than different pictures.","Enter an opaque colour in one supported form and compare the converted channels."],"steps":["Choose color source.","Enter HEX color.","Enter red, green and blue.","Enter hue, saturation and lightness.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The colour preview gives a visual check alongside the numeric conversion.","check":"Opaque colors only. HSL conversion rounds RGB channels to whole values. It does not calculate accessibility contrast.","faq":[{"q":"Does the result assess accessible contrast?","a":"No. Contrast needs two colours and an appropriate accessibility calculation."},{"q":"What should I check before using HEX RGB HSL Color Converter?","a":"Check Color source, HEX color, Red and Green. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_regex","name":"Regular Expression Tester","description":"Inspect bounded PCRE matches and capture groups on a UTF8 text sample.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-regex-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_regex/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_regex.md","page_id":410,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_regex","inputs":[{"group":"Expression","label":"Pattern body","type":"text","unit":"","help":"Enter the body without delimiters. UTF8 mode is always enabled."},{"group":"Expression","label":"Modifiers","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"u":"Unicode","iu":"Unicode, ignore case","mu":"Unicode, multiline","imu":"Unicode, ignore case and multiline","su":"Unicode, dot matches newline","imsu":"Unicode, all three modifiers"}},{"group":"Sample text","label":"Text to inspect","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""}],"limitations":"Up to 100 matches. Byte offsets are shown. Backtracking and recursion limits bound work; this is PCRE, not JavaScript regex.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:29+00:00","intro":["A pattern needs representative examples before it is used on a real dataset.","Test a small UTF8 sample and inspect matches, groups and byte positions."],"steps":["Choose modifiers. Enter pattern body.","Paste or enter text to inspect.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Bounded PCRE matching keeps the test focused and exposes captured values.","check":"Up to 100 matches. Byte offsets are shown. Backtracking and recursion limits bound work; this is PCRE, not JavaScript regex.","faq":[{"q":"Will the pattern behave identically in JavaScript?","a":"Not necessarily. This tester uses PHP PCRE, whose rules can differ from JavaScript regular expressions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Regular Expression Tester?","a":"Check Pattern body, Modifiers and Text to inspect. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_jwt","name":"JWT Decoder, Unverified","description":"Read JWT header and payload without verifying the signature or trusting claims.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-jwt-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_jwt/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_jwt.md","page_id":411,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_jwt","inputs":[{"group":"Example token","label":"Three part JWT","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":"Use a sample token. This input is sent to the WordPress server."}],"limitations":"UNVERIFIED. Decoding does not establish authenticity, expiry validity or permission. Encrypted five part tokens are not supported.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:30+00:00","intro":["A decoded token reveals its header and claims, but those values may have been altered.","Read the payload for inspection while keeping authentication decisions outside the decoder."],"steps":["Paste or enter three part JWT.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The unverified presentation separates readable content from trusted identity.","check":"UNVERIFIED. Decoding does not establish authenticity, expiry validity or permission. Encrypted five part tokens are not supported.","faq":[{"q":"Does decoding validate the signature or expiry?","a":"No. Neither authenticity nor expiry validity is established by reading the claims."},{"q":"What should I check before using JWT Decoder, Unverified?","a":"Check Three part JWT. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_sql_insert","name":"CSV to SQL INSERT Builder","description":"Generate quoted INSERT statements for review without executing SQL.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-sql-insert-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_sql_insert/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_sql_insert.md","page_id":412,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_sql_insert","inputs":[{"group":"Source rows","label":"CSV input","type":"textarea","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"SQL target","label":"Table identifier","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"SQL target","label":"Input separator","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"comma":"Comma","tab":"Tab","semicolon":"Semicolon","pipe":"Pipe"}},{"group":"SQL target","label":"Dialect","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"sqlite":"SQLite or standard quoted identifiers","mysql":"MySQL with backslash escaping disabled"}},{"group":"SQL target","label":"Empty cells","type":"select","unit":"","choices":{"string":"Keep empty text","null":"Use SQL NULL"}}],"limitations":"Every nonblank cell is quoted as text, preserving leading zeros. Identifiers must be plain ASCII names. SQL is generated only, never executed.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:30+00:00","intro":["A CSV can supply values for an INSERT draft, but the output needs review against the target database.","Check identifiers, quoted cell values and database syntax before executing anything yourself."],"steps":["Paste or enter CSV input.","Choose input separator, dialect and empty cells. Enter table identifier.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"Generated statements preserve nonblank cells as text, including leading zeros.","check":"Every nonblank cell is quoted as text, preserving leading zeros. Identifiers must be plain ASCII names. SQL is generated only, never executed.","faq":[{"q":"Does the tool run the SQL?","a":"No. It only generates text. Review it and use your own controlled database workflow."},{"q":"What should I check before using CSV to SQL INSERT Builder?","a":"Check CSV input, Table identifier, Input separator and Dialect. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"developer_ipv4_subnet","name":"IPv4 CIDR Subnet Calculator","description":"Show network, mask, address range and conventional host capacity.","category":"Developer & Data","category_id":"developer","url":"https://whatson.pk/developer-ipv4-subnet-calculator/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_ipv4_subnet/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/developer_ipv4_subnet.md","page_id":413,"shortcode":"whatson_developer_ipv4_subnet","inputs":[{"group":"Address block","label":"IPv4 address","type":"text","unit":"","help":""},{"group":"Address block","label":"CIDR prefix","type":"number","unit":"bits","min":0,"max":32,"integer":true}],"limitations":"For /31, both addresses are shown as point to point endpoints under RFC 3021. A /32 is one host route. No reachability scan or IP lookup is performed.","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T16:58:30+00:00","intro":["CIDR notation describes a network prefix and address range without discovering devices.","Enter the IPv4 address and prefix, then compare mask, network and host figures."],"steps":["Enter IPv4 address and CIDR prefix.","Select Process input. Read the returned values alongside the assumptions below before copying, exporting or acting on the result."],"why":"The range view helps explain how addresses fit within the same subnet.","check":"For /31, both addresses are shown as point to point endpoints under RFC 3021. A /32 is one host route. No reachability scan or IP lookup is performed.","faq":[{"q":"How are /31 and /32 handled?","a":"A /31 shows point to point endpoints. A /32 represents one host route rather than a conventional shared subnet."},{"q":"What should I check before using IPv4 CIDR Subnet Calculator?","a":"Check IPv4 address and CIDR prefix. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_resize","name":"Image Resizer","description":"Set exact pixel dimensions, or lock the original ratio.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-resize-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_resize/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_resize.md","page_id":415,"shortcode":"whatson_image_resize","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output width (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output height (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Aspect ratio","type":"select","choices":{"yes":"Lock ratio using width","no":"Use both dimensions"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["An upload form may need exact pixel dimensions while the picture still needs to look proportionate.","Choose a width and height deliberately, or lock the original ratio. Review the final dimensions before using the image."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Aspect ratio, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The ratio option separates proportional resizing from an intentional change to both dimensions.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Output format, quality and image detail affect bytes separately from pixel dimensions.","faq":[{"q":"Will resizing guarantee a smaller byte size?","a":"No. Output format, quality and image detail affect bytes separately from pixel dimensions."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Resizer?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Aspect ratio and Download format. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_resize_percent","name":"Percentage Image Resizer","description":"Scale each image by a percentage of its original dimensions.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-resize-percent-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_resize_percent/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_resize_percent.md","page_id":416,"shortcode":"whatson_image_resize_percent","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Scale percentage","type":"number","min":1,"max":300},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Scaling by percentage starts from the original width and height, not from an intended file size.","Choose the percentage and review both output dimensions. Use the original again when comparing another setting."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Scale percentage, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"One percentage keeps the same proportions across each supported image in the batch.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Halving both dimensions gives roughly one quarter of the original pixel area.","faq":[{"q":"Does 50% mean half the pixel count?","a":"No. Halving both dimensions gives roughly one quarter of the original pixel area."},{"q":"What should I check before using Percentage Image Resizer?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Scale percentage, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_fit","name":"Fit Image Inside Box","description":"Keep the whole image within a maximum width and height.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-fit-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_fit/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_fit.md","page_id":417,"shortcode":"whatson_image_fit","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output width (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output height (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Enlarge small images","type":"select","choices":{"no":"Do not enlarge","yes":"Allow enlargement"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Keeping a whole picture inside a box is different from filling every corner of that box.","Enter maximum width and height and inspect the fitted output. The image keeps its shape without a crop."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Enlarge small images, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The complete subject remains visible when dimensions are treated as limits.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. One dimension may be smaller to preserve the image's aspect ratio.","faq":[{"q":"Will the output always equal both box dimensions?","a":"No. One dimension may be smaller to preserve the image's aspect ratio."},{"q":"What should I check before using Fit Image Inside Box?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Enlarge small images and Download format. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_fill","name":"Image Cover Crop","description":"Fill exact dimensions by cropping from the chosen anchor.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-fill-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_fill/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_fill.md","page_id":418,"shortcode":"whatson_image_fill","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output width (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output height (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop anchor","type":"select","choices":{"center":"Centre","top":"Top","bottom":"Bottom","left":"Left","right":"Right"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A cover crop fills an exact canvas by removing part of the picture rather than stretching it.","Choose the dimensions and crop anchor, then check where the subject falls inside the result."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Crop anchor, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The anchor lets you control which part survives when the source and target ratios differ.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Only when the ratios already match. Otherwise some content is cropped to fill the box.","faq":[{"q":"Can all source pixels remain in a cover crop?","a":"Only when the ratios already match. Otherwise some content is cropped to fill the box."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Cover Crop?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Crop anchor and Download format. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_crop","name":"Coordinate Image Cropper","description":"Enter the top left coordinate and the size of the rectangle.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-crop-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_crop/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_crop.md","page_id":419,"shortcode":"whatson_image_crop","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Left coordinate","type":"number","min":0,"max":4095},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Top coordinate","type":"number","min":0,"max":4095},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop width","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop height","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A precise crop begins at a source pixel position and includes a chosen rectangular area.","Enter the top left coordinates and crop dimensions, then inspect the selected region."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Left coordinate, Top coordinate, Crop width, Crop height, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Coordinate control is useful when the required detail lies away from the image centre.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Use the original source pixel grid, starting at the top left, rather than a scaled screen preview.","faq":[{"q":"Are coordinates measured from the resized preview?","a":"Use the original source pixel grid, starting at the top left, rather than a scaled screen preview."},{"q":"What should I check before using Coordinate Image Cropper?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Left coordinate, Top coordinate, Crop width and Crop height. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_aspect_crop","name":"Aspect Ratio Cropper","description":"Keep the largest crop matching the ratio you choose.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-aspect-crop-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_aspect_crop/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_aspect_crop.md","page_id":420,"shortcode":"whatson_image_aspect_crop","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop ratio","type":"select","choices":{"1:1":"Square 1:1","16:9":"Landscape 16:9","9:16":"Portrait 9:16","4:3":"Landscape 4:3","3:2":"Photo 3:2","4:5":"Portrait 4:5"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop anchor","type":"select","choices":{"center":"Centre","top":"Top","bottom":"Bottom","left":"Left","right":"Right"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A required image shape does not always need a fixed output resolution.","Choose an aspect ratio and inspect the largest matching crop from the source."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Crop ratio, Crop anchor, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Ratio cropping changes the composition while keeping the useful matching area as large as possible.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Ratio describes shape. Pixel dimensions follow the available crop unless separately resized.","faq":[{"q":"Does choosing a ratio set a specific width?","a":"No. Ratio describes shape. Pixel dimensions follow the available crop unless separately resized."},{"q":"What should I check before using Aspect Ratio Cropper?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Crop ratio, Crop anchor, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_rotate","name":"Image Rotator","description":"Rotate clockwise, keeping the full expanded canvas.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-rotate-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_rotate/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_rotate.md","page_id":421,"shortcode":"whatson_image_rotate","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Clockwise angle","type":"number","min":-180,"max":180},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Rotation can change the space needed to hold the whole picture.","Choose a clockwise angle and check the expanded canvas before saving."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Clockwise angle, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Keeping the full canvas avoids clipping corners simply because the picture was rotated.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. The dimensions swap. Other angles can require a larger bounding canvas.","faq":[{"q":"Will a 90 degree rotation keep width and height unchanged?","a":"The dimensions swap. Other angles can require a larger bounding canvas."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Rotator?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Clockwise angle, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_flip","name":"Image Flip Tool","description":"Mirror horizontally, vertically or in both directions.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-flip-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_flip/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_flip.md","page_id":422,"shortcode":"whatson_image_flip","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Mirror direction","type":"select","choices":{"horizontal":"Horizontal","vertical":"Vertical","both":"Both axes"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Mirroring changes direction as well as appearance. Text and logos can become reversed.","Choose horizontal, vertical or both directions and inspect recognisable details."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Mirror direction, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Separate directions make the intended mirror operation explicit.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Check the brand artwork requirements. Mirroring can alter text and directional features.","faq":[{"q":"Can a flipped logo still be used as the original branding?","a":"Check the brand artwork requirements. Mirroring can alter text and directional features."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Flip Tool?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Mirror direction, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_pad","name":"Image Canvas Padding","description":"Add equal canvas space around the original image.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-pad-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_pad/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_pad.md","page_id":423,"shortcode":"whatson_image_pad","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Padding on each side","type":"number","min":0,"max":500},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Extra canvas space gives a picture breathing room without removing source content.","Choose the padding and background, then inspect the new dimensions."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Padding on each side, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The original picture stays inside the enlarged canvas instead of being cropped to create space.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It expands the canvas around the source image.","faq":[{"q":"Is padding added inside the original edges?","a":"No. It expands the canvas around the source image."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Canvas Padding?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Padding on each side, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_border","name":"Image Border Tool","description":"Draw a border inside the image without changing dimensions.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-border-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_border/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_border.md","page_id":424,"shortcode":"whatson_image_border","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Border thickness","type":"number","min":1,"max":200},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Border colour","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A frame can sit inside the existing image dimensions rather than creating a larger file canvas.","Select border thickness and colour, then check the edge details it covers."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Border thickness, Border colour, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The unchanged outer size is useful when an upload requires fixed dimensions.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It is drawn inside the canvas, so inspect important details near the edges.","faq":[{"q":"Can a thick border cover part of the photograph?","a":"Yes. It is drawn inside the canvas, so inspect important details near the edges."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Border Tool?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Border thickness, Border colour, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_rounded","name":"Rounded Image Corners","description":"Cut the corners to transparency and download PNG.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-rounded-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_rounded/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_rounded.md","page_id":425,"shortcode":"whatson_image_rounded","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Corner radius","type":"number","min":1,"max":500}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Rounded corners require transparent pixels if the picture must work on different backgrounds.","Set the corner radius and inspect the PNG on a contrasting background."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Corner radius. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Actual transparency makes the corner shape portable beyond a single coloured page.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Use the PNG output to retain the transparent mask.","faq":[{"q":"Will JPEG preserve the transparent corners?","a":"No. Use the PNG output to retain the transparent mask."},{"q":"What should I check before using Rounded Image Corners?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Corner radius. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_circle","name":"Circular Profile Image","description":"Crop the centre square and mask it to a transparent circle.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-circle-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_circle/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_circle.md","page_id":426,"shortcode":"whatson_image_circle","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A circular profile picture starts with a central square crop before the outer pixels are masked.","Choose a source with the subject positioned suitably and review the circle before downloading."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Transparent corners let the circle sit naturally on a profile card or page.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It creates a decorative profile crop, not a compliant document photograph.","faq":[{"q":"Does this approve a photo for an identity document?","a":"No. It creates a decorative profile crop, not a compliant document photograph."},{"q":"Do I need to review the output?","a":"Transparent corners let the circle sit naturally on a profile card or page. Choose a source with the subject positioned suitably and review the circle before downloading."}]},{"id":"image_convert","name":"Image Format Converter","description":"Choose PNG, JPEG or WebP and control the output quality.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-convert-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_convert/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_convert.md","page_id":427,"shortcode":"whatson_image_convert","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Changing format means encoding the image again, not simply renaming its extension.","Choose PNG, JPEG or supported WebP and inspect quality and transparency afterwards."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Download format, Quality and Canvas background. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The format controls let you match the result to the next website or document.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. JPEG needs a flattened background. PNG and supported WebP can preserve alpha.","faq":[{"q":"Can I keep transparency in every format?","a":"No. JPEG needs a flattened background. PNG and supported WebP can preserve alpha."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Format Converter?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Download format, Quality and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_jpeg","name":"Convert Image to JPEG","description":"Reencode a static image as JPEG. Host codec support is checked.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-jpeg-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_jpeg/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_jpeg.md","page_id":428,"shortcode":"whatson_image_jpeg","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["JPEG is often suitable for photographs, but it cannot retain transparent areas.","Choose a background for those areas and a quality setting, then review fine details."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Quality and Canvas background. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Explicit flattening avoids an unexpected background when the source contains transparency.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. JPEG uses lossy compression, and repeated conversions can introduce further changes.","faq":[{"q":"Can JPEG conversion lose detail?","a":"Yes. JPEG uses lossy compression, and repeated conversions can introduce further changes."},{"q":"What should I check before using Convert Image to JPEG?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Quality and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_png","name":"Convert Image to PNG","description":"Reencode a static image as PNG. Host codec support is checked.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-png-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_png/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_png.md","page_id":429,"shortcode":"whatson_image_png","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["PNG is useful when edges or transparent pixels need to remain clear.","Convert the picture and inspect its dimensions, transparency and size before the next upload."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The format preserves the image pixels without JPEG style compression loss.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Photographs can produce much larger PNG files even when dimensions stay the same.","faq":[{"q":"Will PNG always be smaller than JPEG?","a":"No. Photographs can produce much larger PNG files even when dimensions stay the same."},{"q":"Do I need to review the output?","a":"The format preserves the image pixels without JPEG style compression loss. Convert the picture and inspect its dimensions, transparency and size before the next upload."}]},{"id":"image_webp","name":"Convert Image to WebP","description":"Reencode a static image as WebP. Host codec support is checked.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-webp-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_webp/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_webp.md","page_id":430,"shortcode":"whatson_image_webp","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["WebP can combine compressed images with transparency, but the destination must accept it.","Check encoder availability and inspect the converted picture before uploading."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"A separate conversion makes it possible to compare WebP with the source format.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Confirm the receiving site's allowed formats before preparing the final file.","faq":[{"q":"Will every upload form accept WebP?","a":"No. Confirm the receiving site's allowed formats before preparing the final file."},{"q":"What should I check before using Convert Image to WebP?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_avif","name":"Convert Image to AVIF","description":"Reencode a static image as AVIF. Host codec support is checked.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-avif-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_avif/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_avif.md","page_id":431,"shortcode":"whatson_image_avif","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["An AVIF export depends on the server having the required image encoder.","Use a supported source and check the resulting download on a compatible viewer."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The support check avoids presenting an unavailable encoding operation as a successful conversion.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. The supported source uploads are static JPEG, PNG and WebP. AVIF is an output when its encoder is available.","faq":[{"q":"Can AVIF be uploaded as the source here?","a":"The supported source uploads are static JPEG, PNG and WebP. AVIF is an output when its encoder is available."},{"q":"What should I check before using Convert Image to AVIF?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_compress","name":"Image Compressor","description":"Encode JPEG or WebP with a chosen quality level.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-compress-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_compress/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_compress.md","page_id":432,"shortcode":"whatson_image_compress","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Compression codec","type":"select","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","webp":"WebP"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Compression trades some appearance for a chosen encoding size, with results that vary by image.","Choose JPEG or supported WebP quality and compare the output with the original."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Compression codec, Quality and Canvas background. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"A quality control gives you a repeatable setting to evaluate rather than a promised saving percentage.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Reencoding, format choice and the original file's compression can produce a larger result.","faq":[{"q":"Can the compressed file be larger?","a":"Yes. Reencoding, format choice and the original file's compression can produce a larger result."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Compressor?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Compression codec, Quality and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_target_size","name":"Target File Size Compressor","description":"Find a JPEG quality that fits your byte target, without resizing.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-target-size-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_target_size/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_target_size.md","page_id":433,"shortcode":"whatson_image_target_size","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Maximum size (KB, 1000 bytes)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4000},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A byte limit is different from a width or height requirement. Meeting one does not meet the other.","Enter the JPEG target and inspect the achieved file size and quality."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Maximum size (KB, 1000 bytes) and Canvas background. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The search keeps dimensions unchanged while checking available JPEG quality settings.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. The requested limit may be unreachable without another change, such as reducing dimensions in a separate step.","faq":[{"q":"What if no quality setting reaches the target?","a":"The requested limit may be unreachable without another change, such as reducing dimensions in a separate step."},{"q":"What should I check before using Target File Size Compressor?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Maximum size (KB, 1000 bytes) and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_brightness","name":"Image Brightness","description":"Lighten or darken the image.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-brightness-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_brightness/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_brightness.md","page_id":434,"shortcode":"whatson_image_brightness","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Brightness adjustment","type":"number","min":-255,"max":255},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Brightness adjustments can make a picture lighter or darker, but they cannot recreate missing detail.","Change the setting modestly and inspect bright and shadowed regions."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Brightness adjustment, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The adjustment offers a simple tonal comparison without changing the subject's geometry.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Pixels with lost source detail do not gain that detail through a brightness change.","faq":[{"q":"Can it recover clipped highlights?","a":"No. Pixels with lost source detail do not gain that detail through a brightness change."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Brightness?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Brightness adjustment, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_contrast","name":"Image Contrast","description":"Adjust contrast using the PHP GD contrast filter.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-contrast-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_contrast/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_contrast.md","page_id":435,"shortcode":"whatson_image_contrast","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Contrast increase","type":"number","min":-100,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Contrast changes the separation between light and dark tones.","Compare several regions of the picture after adjusting it, especially areas that already have strong shadows."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Contrast increase, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"A direct setting helps you review the tonal change before saving the altered image.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Dark and bright regions can lose useful distinction, so inspect the complete result.","faq":[{"q":"Can more contrast hide detail?","a":"Yes. Dark and bright regions can lose useful distinction, so inspect the complete result."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Contrast?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Contrast increase, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_blur","name":"Gaussian Image Blur","description":"Apply a bounded number of Gaussian blur passes.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-blur-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_blur/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_blur.md","page_id":436,"shortcode":"whatson_image_blur","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Blur passes","type":"number","min":1,"max":10},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Gaussian blur softens details across the image rather than moving or removing them.","Choose the pass count and review the effect at a useful viewing size."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Blur passes, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The bounded pass control makes the strength of the visual effect explicit.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Do not rely on a blur effect to guarantee that sensitive details cannot be inferred.","faq":[{"q":"Is blur secure redaction?","a":"No. Do not rely on a blur effect to guarantee that sensitive details cannot be inferred."},{"q":"What should I check before using Gaussian Image Blur?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Blur passes, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_sharpen","name":"Image Sharpening","description":"Apply a standard sharpening convolution.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-sharpen-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_sharpen/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_sharpen.md","page_id":437,"shortcode":"whatson_image_sharpen","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Sharpening changes edge contrast rather than adding new camera resolution.","Inspect outlines and fine texture after applying the effect, preferably beside the source."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"A direct comparison helps you choose a useful edge treatment without overprocessing the picture.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It does not restore detail absent from the original image.","faq":[{"q":"Can sharpening recreate missing pixels?","a":"No. It does not restore detail absent from the original image."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Sharpening?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_pixelate","name":"Image Pixelation","description":"Turn detail into blocks of averaged colour.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-pixelate-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_pixelate/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_pixelate.md","page_id":438,"shortcode":"whatson_image_pixelate","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Block size","type":"number","min":2,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Pixelation groups details into visible blocks of averaged colour.","Choose the block setting and inspect how the subject reads in the result."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Block size, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The effect provides a deliberate block pattern for creative image treatment.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. A visual block effect is not a dependable guarantee that sensitive information stays hidden.","faq":[{"q":"Can pixelation guarantee privacy?","a":"No. A visual block effect is not a dependable guarantee that sensitive information stays hidden."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Pixelation?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Block size, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_threshold","name":"Black and White Threshold","description":"Turn each pixel into black or white using luminance.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-threshold-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_threshold/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_threshold.md","page_id":439,"shortcode":"whatson_image_threshold","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Luminance cutoff","type":"number","min":0,"max":255},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A threshold image has only black and white pixels, unlike a grayscale photograph.","Adjust the luminance cutoff and inspect thin lines or small text."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Luminance cutoff, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The cutoff makes the choice between dark and light pixels visible.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Their luminance may fall on the white side of the selected cutoff. Review the threshold before accepting the output.","faq":[{"q":"Why do faint strokes disappear?","a":"Their luminance may fall on the white side of the selected cutoff. Review the threshold before accepting the output."},{"q":"What should I check before using Black and White Threshold?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Luminance cutoff, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_opacity","name":"Image Opacity","description":"Reduce existing opacity and preserve PNG transparency.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-opacity-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_opacity/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_opacity.md","page_id":440,"shortcode":"whatson_image_opacity","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Opacity percentage","type":"number","min":0,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Reduced opacity allows the background to show through the image.","Choose the reduction and preview the PNG on more than one background."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Opacity percentage. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Preserved alpha keeps the transparency change available in the downloaded image.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It reduces existing opacity across the picture rather than selectively removing a background.","faq":[{"q":"Does opacity create an invisible background automatically?","a":"No. It reduces existing opacity across the picture rather than selectively removing a background."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Opacity?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Opacity percentage. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_grayscale","name":"Grayscale Image","description":"Remove colour while retaining luminance.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-grayscale-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_grayscale/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_grayscale.md","page_id":441,"shortcode":"whatson_image_grayscale","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Removing colour changes how some labels and subjects can be distinguished.","Inspect tonal separation after conversion, especially where different colours have similar brightness."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The grayscale output keeps shades rather than reducing every pixel to pure black or white.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Grayscale retains intermediate tones. Thresholding uses only black and white.","faq":[{"q":"Is grayscale the same as thresholding?","a":"No. Grayscale retains intermediate tones. Thresholding uses only black and white."},{"q":"What should I check before using Grayscale Image?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_sepia","name":"Sepia Image","description":"Apply a warm sepia colour transform.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-sepia-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_sepia/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_sepia.md","page_id":442,"shortcode":"whatson_image_sepia","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A sepia treatment gives the whole picture a warmer appearance.","Compare skin tones, text and contrast before choosing the transformed version."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The consistent global treatment creates a warm style without selecting individual objects.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. The transform applies across the image rather than targeting a chosen object.","faq":[{"q":"Does it recolour only one part of the photo?","a":"No. The transform applies across the image rather than targeting a chosen object."},{"q":"What should I check before using Sepia Image?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_invert","name":"Invert Image Colours","description":"Reverse red, green and blue channels.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-invert-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_invert/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_invert.md","page_id":443,"shortcode":"whatson_image_invert","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Colour inversion reverses RGB channels and can change the picture dramatically.","Inspect text, backgrounds and recognisable details after the operation."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The effect gives a clear alternate colour treatment while retaining the image arrangement.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It changes channel values and does not recover missing source information.","faq":[{"q":"Will inversion restore a damaged photograph?","a":"No. It changes channel values and does not recover missing source information."},{"q":"What should I check before using Invert Image Colours?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_duotone","name":"Duotone Image","description":"Map luminance between two selected colours.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-duotone-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_duotone/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_duotone.md","page_id":444,"shortcode":"whatson_image_duotone","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Shadow colour","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Highlight colour","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["Two chosen colours can represent the picture's darker and lighter tones.","Select both endpoints and inspect the subject's tonal separation."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Shadow colour, Highlight colour, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The mapping gives a consistent two colour style while keeping the luminance relationship visible.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. They can be, but weak separation may hide detail. Choose endpoints that suit the intended appearance.","faq":[{"q":"Should the two colours be nearly identical?","a":"They can be, but weak separation may hide detail. Choose endpoints that suit the intended appearance."},{"q":"What should I check before using Duotone Image?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Shadow colour, Highlight colour, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_tint","name":"Image Colour Tint","description":"Blend a selected colour over the image.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-tint-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_tint/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_tint.md","page_id":445,"shortcode":"whatson_image_tint","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Tint colour","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Tint strength","type":"number","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A tint blends a chosen colour with the source rather than replacing each object with a flat fill.","Choose the colour and strength, then review contrast and important details."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Tint colour, Tint strength, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The adjustable blend lets you compare subtle and stronger colour treatments.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It blends over the image as a whole, without separating foreground and background.","faq":[{"q":"Does tinting isolate the background?","a":"No. It blends over the image as a whole, without separating foreground and background."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Colour Tint?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Tint colour, Tint strength, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_text_watermark","name":"Text Watermark","description":"Draw a text label with a bundled Unicode font. Urdu shaping is not provided.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-text-watermark-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_text_watermark/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_text_watermark.md","page_id":446,"shortcode":"whatson_image_text_watermark","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Watermark text","type":"text"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Font size (pixels)","type":"number","min":8,"max":160},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Text colour","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Text opacity","type":"number","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Placement","type":"select","choices":{"bottom_right":"Bottom right","bottom_left":"Bottom left","top_left":"Top left","top_right":"Top right","center":"Centre"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:34+00:00","intro":["A text label needs enough room and contrast to remain readable after placement.","Choose wording, size, position and opacity, then inspect the complete label in the result."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Watermark text, Font size (pixels), Text colour, Text opacity, Placement, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Position and opacity controls help mark the picture without covering the main subject unnecessarily.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. The bundled font supports Unicode, but Urdu shaping is not provided. Inspect the actual rendered wording carefully.","faq":[{"q":"Will Urdu text receive proper joining and shaping?","a":"The bundled font supports Unicode, but Urdu shaping is not provided. Inspect the actual rendered wording carefully."},{"q":"What should I check before using Text Watermark?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Watermark text, Font size (pixels), Text colour and Text opacity. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_logo_watermark","name":"Logo Watermark","description":"Overlay the second image as a proportional logo.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-logo-watermark-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_logo_watermark/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_logo_watermark.md","page_id":447,"shortcode":"whatson_image_logo_watermark","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"Images in order","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Source images","label":"Logo image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Logo width as percentage","type":"number","min":1,"max":80},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Logo opacity","type":"number","min":1,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Logo placement","type":"select","choices":{"bottom_right":"Bottom right","bottom_left":"Bottom left","top_left":"Top left","top_right":"Top right","center":"Centre"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A logo overlay should be sized in relation to the base image, not pasted at an arbitrary pixel scale.","Upload the base and logo separately, then inspect placement and opacity."],"steps":["Choose a base image and upload the logo separately. Check that both are the intended source files.","Set Logo width as percentage, Logo opacity, Logo placement, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Proportional sizing makes the logo treatment easier to repeat on differently sized pictures.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Use a suitable logo with alpha and review the final output format. JPEG flattening does not retain overall transparency.","faq":[{"q":"Can transparent logo edges be preserved?","a":"Use a suitable logo with alpha and review the final output format. JPEG flattening does not retain overall transparency."},{"q":"What should I check before using Logo Watermark?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Logo width as percentage, Logo opacity, Logo placement and Download format. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_collage","name":"Image Grid Collage","description":"Combine up to six images into equal cropped grid cells.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-collage-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_collage/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_collage.md","page_id":448,"shortcode":"whatson_image_collage","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"Images in order","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Columns","type":"number","min":1,"max":6},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Square cell size","type":"number","min":40,"max":800},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Cell gap","type":"number","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A grid collage gives several pictures equal cells, which may crop their edges.","Choose up to six images in the intended order and inspect every subject after arranging the grid."],"steps":["Choose the source pictures in the intended order. The layout uses that upload order.","Set Columns, Square cell size, Cell gap, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Consistent cells and spacing make a compact comparison or photo collection.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Not necessarily. The cells use cover cropping, so important details near an edge need review.","faq":[{"q":"Does each cell retain the whole source image?","a":"Not necessarily. The cells use cover cropping, so important details near an edge need review."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Grid Collage?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Columns, Square cell size, Cell gap and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_contact_sheet","name":"Photo Contact Sheet","description":"Fit whole images in labelled preview cells.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-contact-sheet-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_contact_sheet/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_contact_sheet.md","page_id":449,"shortcode":"whatson_image_contact_sheet","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"Images in order","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Columns","type":"number","min":1,"max":6},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Square preview cell size","type":"number","min":60,"max":700},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Cell gap","type":"number","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A contact sheet is for reviewing complete pictures together rather than creating dramatic crops.","Choose the images and preview cell dimensions, then check the fit and labels."],"steps":["Choose the source pictures in the intended order. The layout uses that upload order.","Set Columns, Square preview cell size, Cell gap, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Whole image fitting preserves each source's proportions in the overview.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. The preview labels use the tool's numbering basis. Do not assume they preserve the original filenames.","faq":[{"q":"Are the labels the original upload filenames?","a":"The preview labels use the tool's numbering basis. Do not assume they preserve the original filenames."},{"q":"What should I check before using Photo Contact Sheet?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Columns, Square preview cell size, Cell gap and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_split","name":"Image Grid Splitter","description":"Split a picture into exact covering tiles, including edge pixels.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-split-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_split/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_split.md","page_id":450,"shortcode":"whatson_image_split","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Tile columns","type":"number","min":1,"max":6},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Tile rows","type":"number","min":1,"max":6},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A grid split should cover the original picture even when its dimensions do not divide evenly.","Choose rows and columns, then inspect the downloaded tile sizes and order."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Tile columns, Tile rows, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Remainder pixels stay in the edge tiles rather than being discarded.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Not always. Uneven source dimensions require remainder pixels to be allocated to covering tiles.","faq":[{"q":"Will every tile have exactly equal dimensions?","a":"Not always. Uneven source dimensions require remainder pixels to be allocated to covering tiles."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Grid Splitter?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Tile columns, Tile rows, Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_compare","name":"Image Comparison","description":"Place two complete images side by side on one canvas.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-compare-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_compare/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_compare.md","page_id":451,"shortcode":"whatson_image_compare","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"Images in order","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Shared canvas height","type":"number","min":40,"max":1200},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Space between images","type":"number","min":0,"max":100},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["Two complete pictures on one canvas make a visual review easier to share.","Upload them in the intended order and inspect the viewing scale before judging differences."],"steps":["Choose the source pictures in the intended order. The layout uses that upload order.","Set Shared canvas height, Space between images, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The side by side layout keeps both sources visible without requiring separate windows.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It provides a visual arrangement. Scale, source content and display conditions still affect judgement.","faq":[{"q":"Does the comparison measure image quality objectively?","a":"No. It provides a visual arrangement. Scale, source content and display conditions still affect judgement."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Comparison?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Shared canvas height, Space between images, Canvas background and Download format. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_social","name":"Social Image Preparation","description":"Fit or crop to common publishing dimensions, with editable presets.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-social-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_social/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_social.md","page_id":452,"shortcode":"whatson_image_social","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas preset","type":"select","choices":{"square":"Square 1080 x 1080","portrait":"Portrait 1080 x 1350","story":"Story 1080 x 1920","landscape":"Landscape 1200 x 675"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Composition","type":"select","choices":{"contain":"Whole image with padding","cover":"Fill and crop"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop anchor","type":"select","choices":{"center":"Centre","top":"Top","bottom":"Bottom","left":"Left","right":"Right"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A publishing canvas needs the right shape before captions or overlays are added.","Choose an editable dimension preset and decide whether to keep the whole picture or crop to fill."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Canvas preset, Composition, Crop anchor, Canvas background, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Fit and crop options let you preserve context or prioritise a complete canvas.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Presets are editable starting points. Confirm the current destination requirement before publication.","faq":[{"q":"Are platform dimensions permanent requirements?","a":"No. Presets are editable starting points. Confirm the current destination requirement before publication."},{"q":"What should I check before using Social Image Preparation?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Canvas preset, Composition, Crop anchor and Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_passport","name":"Pakistan Passport Photo Layout","description":"Prepare a 35 x 45 mm photo canvas at your chosen DPI. Crop only, no biometric approval.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-passport-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_passport/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_passport.md","page_id":453,"shortcode":"whatson_image_passport","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Print DPI","type":"number","min":72,"max":600},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Crop anchor","type":"select","choices":{"center":"Centre","top":"Top","bottom":"Bottom","left":"Left","right":"Right"}}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A passport photo layout combines physical dimensions and pixel resolution, but acceptance involves more than size.","Prepare the 35 x 45 mm canvas at your selected DPI and review the crop against the receiving authority's instructions."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Print DPI and Crop anchor. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The size calculation makes the output pixels traceable to the intended physical layout.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Background, pose, facial framing and document rules require separate verification.","faq":[{"q":"Does this guarantee biometric or official approval?","a":"No. Background, pose, facial framing and document rules require separate verification."},{"q":"What should I check before using Pakistan Passport Photo Layout?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Print DPI and Crop anchor. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_signature","name":"Signature Image Preparation","description":"Fit a signature to an application box, with optional near white transparency.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-signature-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_signature/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_signature.md","page_id":454,"shortcode":"whatson_image_signature","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Box width","type":"number","min":1,"max":2000},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Box height","type":"number","min":1,"max":1000},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Near white background","type":"select","choices":{"no":"Keep background","yes":"Make near white transparent"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"White cutoff per channel","type":"number","min":180,"max":255}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A signature upload needs to fit the form's box without losing thin or faint strokes.","Choose the output dimensions and inspect any near white transparency setting before saving."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Box width, Box height, Near white background and White cutoff per channel. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Box fitting keeps the complete signature visible while adjusting it for the application field.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Review the threshold and the finished signature carefully before uploading it.","faq":[{"q":"Can background transparency erase light strokes?","a":"Yes. Review the threshold and the finished signature carefully before uploading it."},{"q":"What should I check before using Signature Image Preparation?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Box width, Box height, Near white background and White cutoff per channel. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_favicon","name":"Favicon Size Pack","description":"Generate PNG icons and a 32 pixel ICO from your image.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-favicon-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_favicon/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_favicon.md","page_id":455,"shortcode":"whatson_image_favicon","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A website icon must remain recognisable at very small sizes.","Generate the pack and inspect the smallest PNGs and ICO before installing them."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Canvas background. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Several output sizes help you evaluate the artwork for different icon uses.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Download it and set the site icon or relevant files through your chosen website setup.","faq":[{"q":"Does the pack install itself in WordPress?","a":"No. Download it and set the site icon or relevant files through your chosen website setup."},{"q":"What should I check before using Favicon Size Pack?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Canvas background. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_thumbnail","name":"Website Thumbnail Maker","description":"Generate three editable width variants at the original aspect ratio.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-thumbnail-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_thumbnail/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_thumbnail.md","page_id":456,"shortcode":"whatson_image_thumbnail","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Small width","type":"number","min":16,"max":2000},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Medium width","type":"number","min":16,"max":2000},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Large width","type":"number","min":16,"max":2000},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["Website layouts can use several image widths while keeping one original aspect ratio.","Set the three width variants and compare their resulting heights."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Small width, Medium width, Large width, Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The variants provide separate size choices from one source without inventing a cover crop.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. They retain the source ratio. Use a crop tool first if the layout requires another shape.","faq":[{"q":"Are these fixed ratio cropped thumbnails?","a":"No. They retain the source ratio. Use a crop tool first if the layout requires another shape."},{"q":"What should I check before using Website Thumbnail Maker?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Small width, Medium width, Large width and Download format. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_print_photo","name":"Print Photo Size Tool","description":"Convert millimetres and DPI to exact output pixels.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-print-photo-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_print_photo/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_print_photo.md","page_id":457,"shortcode":"whatson_image_print_photo","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Width in millimetres","type":"number","min":1,"max":300},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Height in millimetres","type":"number","min":1,"max":300},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Print DPI","type":"number","min":72,"max":600},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Fit behaviour","type":"select","choices":{"cover":"Fill with crop","contain":"Whole image with canvas"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["Print dimensions need a DPI basis before they can be expressed as image pixels.","Enter millimetres and resolution, then review the output against the original detail."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Width in millimetres, Height in millimetres, Print DPI, Fit behaviour and Canvas background. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The conversion connects physical size with a specific pixel target.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Source resolution limits real detail, and printer scaling must also be checked.","faq":[{"q":"Will higher DPI create new photographic detail?","a":"No. Source resolution limits real detail, and printer scaling must also be checked."},{"q":"What should I check before using Print Photo Size Tool?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Width in millimetres, Height in millimetres, Print DPI and Fit behaviour. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_inspect","name":"Image Information Inspector","description":"Read decoded dimensions, file size, format and alpha presence.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-inspect-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_inspect/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_inspect.md","page_id":458,"shortcode":"whatson_image_inspect","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["An image's extension alone does not explain its decoded dimensions or format.","Inspect the source before deciding whether it needs resizing, conversion or compression."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The reported properties give an explicit basis for checking upload requirements.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Read the reported sampling basis. It should not be treated as proof of every pixel's transparency state.","faq":[{"q":"Is alpha information a full scan of every visible pixel?","a":"Read the reported sampling basis. It should not be treated as proof of every pixel's transparency state."},{"q":"Do I need to review the output?","a":"The reported properties give an explicit basis for checking upload requirements. Inspect the source before deciding whether it needs resizing, conversion or compression."}]},{"id":"image_palette","name":"Image Colour Palette","description":"Count quantised visible colours from a bounded sample.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-palette-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_palette/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_palette.md","page_id":459,"shortcode":"whatson_image_palette","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Palette entries","type":"number","min":2,"max":16}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A useful palette can be estimated from a bounded sample rather than enumerating every source colour.","Review the quantised suggestions and compare them with the actual picture."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Palette entries. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Sampled colour groups provide a starting point for design references.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Sampling and colour bins make the result approximate.","faq":[{"q":"Are palette colours exact counts of the entire image?","a":"No. Sampling and colour bins make the result approximate."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Colour Palette?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Palette entries. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_histogram","name":"Image RGB Histogram","description":"Measure 16 bins per channel from a bounded sample.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-histogram-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_histogram/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_histogram.md","page_id":460,"shortcode":"whatson_image_histogram","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A channel histogram describes a distribution of pixel values, not the subject of the photograph.","Compare the sampled RGB bins with the picture before drawing a tonal conclusion."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Separate channel distributions make colour value patterns easier to inspect.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Content, sampling and the intended appearance matter alongside the distribution.","faq":[{"q":"Does the histogram prove correct exposure?","a":"No. Content, sampling and the intended appearance matter alongside the distribution."},{"q":"Do I need to review the output?","a":"Separate channel distributions make colour value patterns easier to inspect. Compare the sampled RGB bins with the picture before drawing a tonal conclusion."}]},{"id":"image_pixel_picker","name":"Image Pixel Colour Picker","description":"Read the RGBA value at an exact source coordinate.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-pixel-picker-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_pixel_picker/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_pixel_picker.md","page_id":461,"shortcode":"whatson_image_pixel_picker","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"X coordinate","type":"number","min":0,"max":4095},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Y coordinate","type":"number","min":0,"max":4095}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A single pixel colour needs an exact position in the original source grid.","Enter the coordinates and inspect RGBA, including alpha, before copying the values."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set X coordinate and Y coordinate. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The coordinate basis keeps the selected source point explicit.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Texture and compression can vary neighbouring pixels. Sample more positions when assessing a region.","faq":[{"q":"Does one pixel describe an entire region's colour?","a":"No. Texture and compression can vary neighbouring pixels. Sample more positions when assessing a region."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Pixel Colour Picker?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check X coordinate and Y coordinate. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_base64","name":"Image to Base64","description":"Generate a data URI for a metadata stripped PNG reencode.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-base64-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_base64/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_base64.md","page_id":462,"shortcode":"whatson_image_base64","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. One source image."}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["An image data URI packages encoded bytes into text for a compatible destination.","Generate the fresh PNG representation and copy its complete prefix and payload."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The output provides a ready data URI rather than just a renamed image file.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. It represents a newly encoded PNG with original metadata removed.","faq":[{"q":"Is the URI the original file's unchanged byte content?","a":"No. It represents a newly encoded PNG with original metadata removed."},{"q":"Do I need to review the output?","a":"The output provides a ready data URI rather than just a renamed image file. Generate the fresh PNG representation and copy its complete prefix and payload."}]},{"id":"image_strip_metadata","name":"Image Metadata Remover","description":"Reencode pixels without original EXIF or embedded comments. Colour profiles are also removed.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-strip-metadata-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_strip_metadata/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_strip_metadata.md","page_id":463,"shortcode":"whatson_image_strip_metadata","inputs":[{"group":"Source images","label":"One image or a batch","type":"file","choices":{"jpeg":"JPEG","png":"PNG","webp":"WebP"},"help":"Static images. Up to 4 MiB per file, 12 MiB total and 4 million pixels per image. At most six source images."},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Download format","type":"select","choices":{"png":"PNG, preserves alpha","jpeg":"JPEG, flattens alpha","webp":"WebP, server support needed"}},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Quality","type":"number","min":1,"max":100}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["Reencoding can remove original EXIF and embedded comments while keeping a fresh representation of the pixels.","Inspect the output appearance, especially if the source relied on a colour profile."],"steps":["Choose a static JPEG, PNG or WebP source. Check the displayed upload limits before processing.","Set Download format and Quality. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"The fresh file avoids carrying the original metadata blocks forward.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Visible picture content can still identify people or places, and colour profiles are also removed.","faq":[{"q":"Does this guarantee complete privacy?","a":"No. Visible picture content can still identify people or places, and colour profiles are also removed."},{"q":"What should I check before using Image Metadata Remover?","a":"Prepare a supported source image and check Download format and Quality. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]},{"id":"image_blank_canvas","name":"Blank Image Canvas","description":"Create an image with a selected colour and dimensions.","category":"Image Preparation","category_id":"image","url":"https://whatson.pk/image-blank-canvas-tool/","profile_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_blank_canvas/","markdown_url":"https://whatson.pk/whatson-ai/tool/image_blank_canvas.md","page_id":464,"shortcode":"whatson_image_blank_canvas","inputs":[{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output width (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Output height (pixels)","type":"number","min":1,"max":4096},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas background","type":"color"},{"group":"Tool inputs","label":"Canvas alpha","type":"select","choices":{"no":"Solid colour","yes":"Transparent"}}],"limitations":"","page_modified_utc":"2026-10-04T18:22:35+00:00","intro":["A blank image can provide an exact sized background or transparent starting canvas.","Choose pixel dimensions and a colour or transparency, then inspect the download."],"steps":["Set Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Canvas background and Canvas alpha. Review the selected units and options before preparing the output.","Select Prepare image. Inspect the resulting preview, dimensions and file size, then download the output you need."],"why":"Explicit canvas dimensions help prepare a simple asset for a later design step.","check":"Compare the finished picture with its source. Printing also needs a resolution and scaling basis. Use the print size tool for that calculation.","faq":[{"q":"Do pixel dimensions alone set a print size?","a":"No. Printing also needs a resolution and scaling basis. Use the print size tool for that calculation."},{"q":"What should I check before using Blank Image Canvas?","a":"Check Output width (pixels), Output height (pixels), Canvas background and Canvas alpha. Use the exact units shown beside the controls and replace any example values with your own inputs."}]}]}